A Woman Who |
By May Kellogg Sullivan |
ILLUSTRATED |
Boston: James H. Earle & Company 178 Washington Street |
Copyright, 1902
By MAY KELLOGG SULLIVAN
All Rights Reserved
CONTENTS.
Chapter | Page | |
I | Under Way | 9 |
II | Midnight on a Yukon Steamer | 19 |
III | Dawson | 28 |
IV | The Rush | 36 |
V | At The Arctic Circle | 48 |
VI | Companions | 58 |
VII | Going to Nome | 78 |
VIII | Fresh Danger | 81 |
IX | Nome | 94 |
X | The Four Sisters | 109 |
XI | Life in a Mining Camp | 131 |
XII | Bar-Room Disturbances | 149 |
XIII | Off For Golovin Bay | 162 |
XIV | Life at Golovin | 184 |
XV | Winter in the Mission | 199 |
XVI | The Retired Sea Captain | 215 |
XVII | How the Long Days Passed | 231 |
XVIII | Swarming | 247 |
XIX | New Quarters | 261 |
XX | Christmas in Alaska | 275 |
XXI | My First Gold Claims | 292 |
XXII | The Little Sick Child | 311 |
XXIII | Lights and Shadows of the Mining Camp | 325 |
XXIV | An Unpleasant Adventure | 340 |
XXV | Stones and Dynamite | 354 |
XXVI | Good-bye to Golovin Bay | 374 |
XXVII | Going Outside | 379 |
Transcriber’s Note
Obvious printer errors have been corrected. All other
inconsistencies remain as printed.
A list of illustrations, though not present in the original, has been provided below:
- COVER
- MAY KELLOGG SULLIVAN IN ALASKA DRESS.
- DAWSON, Y. T.
- CITY HALL AT SKAGWAY.
- PORCUPINE CANYON, WHITE PASS.
- MILES CANYON.
- UPPER YUKON STEAMER.
- FIVE FINGER RAPIDS.
- GOING TO DAWSON IN WINTER.
- A KLONDYKE CLAIM.
- EAGLE CITY, ON THE YUKON, IN 1899.
- YUKON STEAMER “HANNAH.”
- FELLOW TRAVELERS.
- ESKIMOS.
- UNALASKA.
- STEAMSHIP ST. PAUL.
- NOME.
- LIFE AT NOME.
- CLAIM NUMBER NINE, ANVIL CREEK.
- CLAIM NUMBER FOUR, ANVIL CREEK, NOME.
- MAP OF ALASKA.
- ESKIMO DOGS.
- WINTER PROSPECTING.
- AT CHINIK. THE MISSION.
- CLAIM ON BONANZA CREEK.
- ON BONANZA CREEK.
- SKAGWAY RIVER, FROM THE TRAIN.
PREFACE
This unpretentious little book is the outcome of my own
experiences and adventures in Alaska. Two trips, covering
a period of eighteen months and a distance of over
twelve thousand miles were made practically alone.
In answer to the oft-repeated question of why I went to
Alaska I can only give the same reply that so many others
give: I wanted to go in search of my fortune which had
been successfully eluding my grasp for a good many years.
Neither home nor children claimed my attention. No good
reason, I thought, stood in the way of my going to
Alaska; for my husband, traveling constantly at his work
had long ago allowed me carte blanche as to my inclinations
and movements. To be sure, there was no money
in the bank upon which to draw, and an account with certain
friends whose kindness and generosity cannot be forgotten,
was opened up to pay passage money; but so far
neither they nor I have regretted making the venture.
I had first-class health and made up in endurance what
I lacked in avoirdupois, along with a firm determination
to take up the first honest work that presented itself, regardless
of choice, and in the meantime to secure a few
gold claims, the fame of which had for two years reached
my ears.
In regard to the truthfulness of this record I have tried
faithfully to relate my experiences as they took place. Not
all, of course, have been included, for numerous and varied
trials came to me, of which I have not written, else
a far more thrilling story could have been told.[Pg 8]
Enough has, however, been noted to give my readers a
fair idea of a woman’s life during a period of eighteen
months in a few of the roughest mining camps in the
world; and that many may be interested, and to some extent
possibly instructed by the perusal of my little book,
is the sincere wish of the author.
A WOMAN WHO WENT—TO ALASKA.
CHAPTER I.
UNDER WAY.

Y first trip from California to Alaska
was made in the summer of 1899. I
went alone to Dawson to my father
and brother, surprising them greatly
when I quietly walked up to shake
hands with them at their work. The
amazement of my father knew no
bounds,—and yet I could see a lot of
quiet amusement beneath all when he
introduced me to his friends, which
plainly said:
“Here is my venturesome daughter, who is
really a ‘chip off the old block,’ so you must not
be surprised at her coming to Alaska.”
Father had gone to the Klondyke a year before
at the age of sixty-four, climbing Chilkoot Pass in
the primitive way and “running” Miles Canyon
and White Horse Rapids in a small boat which
came near being swamped in the passage.
My brother’s entrance to the famous gold fields
was made in the same dangerous manner a year
before; but I had waited until trains over the
White Pass and Yukon Railroad had been crossing
the mountains daily for two weeks before myself[Pg 10]
attempting to get into Alaska’s interior. At that
time it was only a three hours’ ride, including stops,
over the Pass to Lake Bennett, the terminus of
this new railroad, the first in Alaska. A couple of
rude open flat cars with springless seats along the
sides were all the accommodation we had as passengers
from the summit of White Pass to Lake
Bennett; we having paid handsomely for the privilege
of riding in this manner and thinking ourselves
fortunate, considering the fact that our route was,
during the entire distance of about forty-five miles,
strewn with the bleaching bones of earlier argonauts
and their beasts of burden.
Naturally, my traveling companions interested
me exceedingly. There were few women. Two
ladies with their husbands were going to Dawson
on business. About eight or ten other women belonging
to the rapid class of individuals journeyed
at the same time. We had all nationalities and
classes. There were two women from Europe with
luggage covered with foreign stickers, and a spoken
jargon which was neither German nor French, but
sounded like a clever admixture of both.
Then there was the woman who went by the
name of Mrs. Somebody or other who wore a seal-skin
coat, diamond earrings and silver-mounted
umbrella. She had been placed in the same stateroom
with me on the steamer at Seattle, and upon
making her preparations to retire for the night had
offered me a glass of brandy, while imbibing one[Pg 11]
herself, which I energetically, though politely, refused.
At midnight a second woman of the same
caste had been ushered into my room to occupy the
third and last berth, whereupon next morning I
had waited upon the purser of the ship, and
modestly but firmly requested a change of location.
In a gentlemanly way he informed me that the only
vacant stateroom was a small one next the engine
room below, but if I could endure the noise and
wished to take it, I could do so. I preferred the
proximity and whirr of machinery along with closer
quarters to the company of the two adventuresses,
so while both women slept late next morning I
quietly and thankfully moved all my belongings
below. Here I enjoyed the luxury of a room by
myself for forty-eight hours, or until we reached
Skagway, completely oblivious to the fact that
never for one instant did the pounding of the great
engines eight feet distant cease either day or night.
A United States Judge, an English aristocrat
and lady, a Seattle lawyer, sober, thoughtful and of
middle age, who had been introduced to me by a
friend upon sailing, and who kindly kept me in
sight when we changed steamers or trains on the
trip without specially appearing to do so; a nice old
gentleman going to search for the body of his son
lost in the Klondyke River a few weeks before,
and a good many rough miners as well as nondescripts
made up our unique company to Dawson.
Some had been over the route before when[Pg 12]
mules and horses had been the only means of transportation
over the Passes, and stories of the trials
and dangers of former trips were heard upon deck
each day, with accompaniments of oaths and slang
phrases, and punctuated by splashes of tobacco
juice.
On the voyage to Skagway there was little seasickness
among the passengers, as we kept to the
inland passage among the islands. At a short distance
away we viewed the great Treadwell gold
mines on Douglass Island, and peered out through
a veil of mist and rain at Juneau under the hills.
Here we left a few of our best and most pleasant
passengers, and watched the old Indian women
drive sharp bargains in curios, beaded moccasins,
bags, etc., with tourists who were impervious to the
great rain drops which are here always falling as
easily from the clouds as leaves from a maple tree
in October.
Our landing at Skagway under the towering
mountains upon beautiful Lynn Canal was more
uneventful than our experience in the Customs
House at that place, for we were about to cross the
line into Canadian territory. Here we presented
an interesting and animated scene. Probably one
hundred and fifty persons crowded the small station
and baggage room, each one pushing his way
as far as possible toward the officials, who with
muttered curses hustled the tags upon each box and
trunk as it was hastily unlocked and examined.[Pg 13]
Ropes and straps were flung about the floor, bags
thrown with bunches of keys promiscuously, while
transfer men perspiring from every pore tumbled
great mountains of luggage hither and thither.
Two ponderous Germans there were, who, in
checked steamer caps enveloped in cigar smoke of
the best brand, protested vigorously at the opening
of their trunks by the officers, but their protests
seemed only the more to whet the appetites of
these dignitaries. The big Germans had their revenge,
however. In the box of one of these men
was found with other things a lot of Limburger
cheese, the pungent odor of which drove the women
screaming to the doors, and men protesting indignantly
after them; while those unable to reach
the air prayed earnestly for a good stiff breeze off
Lynn Canal to revive them. The Germans laughed
till tears ran down their cheeks, and cheerfully
paid the duty imposed.
Skagway was interesting chiefly from its historical
associations as a port where so many struggling
men had landed, suffered and passed on over
that trail of hardship and blood two years before.
Our little narrow gauge coaches were crowded
to their utmost, men standing in aisles and on platforms,
and sitting upon wood boxes and hand luggage
near the doors.
It was July, and the sight of fresh fruit in the
hands of those lunching in the next seat almost
brought tears to my eyes, for we were now going[Pg 14]
far beyond the land of fruits and all other delicacies.
“Pick it up, old man, pick it up and eat it,” said
one rough fellow of evident experience in Alaska
to one who had dropped a cherry upon the floor,
“for you won’t get another while you stay in this
country, if it is four years!”
“But,” said another, “he can eat ‘Alaska strawberries’
to his heart’s content, summer and winter,
and I’ll be bound when he gets home to the States
he won’t thank anyone for puttin’ a plate of beans
in front of him, he’ll be that sick of ’em! I et beans
or ‘Alaska strawberries’ for nine months one season,
day in and day out, and I’m a peaceable man,
but at the end of that time I’d have put a bullet
through the man who offered me beans to eat, now
you can bet your life on that! Don’t never insult
an old timer by puttin’ beans before him, is my advice
if you do try to sugar-coat ’em by calling ’em
strawberries!” and the man thumped his old cob
pipe with force enough upon the wood box to empty
the ashes from its bowl and to break it into fragments
had it not been well seasoned.
Upon the summit of White Pass we alighted
from the train and boarded another. This time
it was the open flat cars, and the Germans came
near being left. As the conductor shouted “all
aboard” they both scrambled, with great puffing
and blowing owing to their avoirdupois, to the rear
end of the last car, and with faces purple from exertion
plumped themselves down almost in the[Pg 15]
laps of some women who were laughing at them.
We had now a dizzy descent to make to Lake
Bennett. Conductor and brakeman were on the
alert. With their hands upon the brakes these
men stood with nerves and muscles tense. All
talking ceased. Some of us thought of home and
loved ones, but none flinched. Slowly at first, then
faster and faster the train rolled over the rails until
lakes, hills and mountains fairly flew past us as
we descended. At last the train’s speed was
slackened, and we moved more leisurely along the
foot of the mountains. We were in the beautiful
green “Meadows” where pretty and fragrant wild
flowers nodded in clusters among the tall grass.
At Bennett our trunks were again opened, and
we left the train. We were to take a small steamer
down the lakes and river for Dawson. We were no
longer crowded, as passengers scattered to different
boats, some going east to Atlin. With little
trouble I secured a lodging for one night with the
stewardess of the small steamer which would carry
us as far as Miles Canyon or the Camp, Canyon
City. From there we were obliged to walk five
miles over the trail. It was midsummer, and the
woods through which we passed were green. Wild
flowers, grasses and moss carpeted our path which
lay along the eastern bank of the great gorge called
Miles Canyon, only at times winding away too far
for the roar of its rushing waters to reach our ears.
No sound of civilization came to us, and no life was[Pg 16]
to be seen unless a crow chanced to fly overhead
in search of some morsel of food. Large forest
trees there were none. Tall, straight saplings of
poplar, spruce and pine pointed their slender fingers
heavenward, and seemed proudly to say:
“See what fortitude we have to plant ourselves in
this lonely Northland with our roots and sap ice-bound
most of the year. Do you not admire us?”
And we did admire wonderingly. Then, again,
nearing the banks of Miles Canyon we forged our
way on up hill and down, across wet spots, over
boulders and logs, listening to the roar of the
mighty torrent dashing between towering, many-colored
walls of rock, where the volume of water
one hundred feet in width with a current of fifteen
miles an hour, and a distance of five-eighths of a
mile rushes insistently onward, as it has, no doubt,
done for ages past. Then at last widening, this
torrent is no longer confined by precipitous cliffs
but between sparsely wooded banks, and now
passes under the name of “White Horse Rapids,”
from so strangely resembling white horses as the
waters are dashed over and about the huge boulders
in mid-stream. Here many of the earlier argonauts
found watery graves as they journeyed in
small boats or rafts down the streams to the Klondyke
in their mad haste to reach the newly discovered
gold fields.
After leaving White Horse Rapids we traveled
for days down the river. My little stateroom next[Pg 17]
the galley or kitchen of the steamer was frequently
like an oven, so great was the heat from the big
cooking range. The room contained nothing but
two berths, made up with blankets and upon wire
springs, and the door did not boast of a lock of any
description. Upon application to the purser for a
chair I received a camp stool. Luckily I had
brushes, combs, soap and towels in my bag, for
none of these things were furnished with the stateroom.
In the stern of the boat there was a small
room where tin wash basins and roller towels
awaited the pleasure of the women passengers, the
water for their ablutions being kept in a barrel,
upon which hung an old dipper. To clean one’s
teeth over the deck rail might seem to some an unusual
undertaking, but I soon learned to do this
with complacency, it being something of gain not
to lose sight of passing scenery while performing
the operation.
At Lake La Barge we enjoyed a magnificent
panorama. Bathed in the rosy glow of a departing
sunset, this beautiful body of water sparkled like
diamonds on all sides of us. Around us on every
hand lay the green and quiet hills. Near the waters’
edge they appeared a deep green, but grew
lighter in the distance. Long bars of crimson,
grey and gold streaked the western horizon, while
higher up tints of purple and pink blended harmoniously
with the soft blue sky. As the sun
slowly settled the colors deepened. Darker and[Pg 18]
darker they grew. The warm soft glow had departed,
and all was purple and black, including the
waters beneath us; and as we passed through the
northern end or outlet of the lake into Thirty
Mile River we seemed to be entering a gate, so
narrow did the entrance to the river appear between
the hills.
At night our steamer was frequently tied up to a
wood pile along the banks of the river. No signs
of civilization met our eyes, except, perhaps, a rude
log hut or cabin among the trees, where at night,
his solitary candle twinkling in his window and his
dogs baying at the moon, some lonely settler had
established himself.
The Semenow Hills country is a lonely one.
Range upon range of rolling, partly wooded, hills
meet the eye of the traveler until it grows weary
and seeks relief in sleep.
Five Finger Rapids was the next point of interest
on our route, and I am here reminded of a short
story which is not altogether one of fiction, and
which is entitled: Midnight on a Yukon Steamer.
CHAPTER II.
MIDNIGHT ON A YUKON STEAMER.

HE bright and yellow full moon drifted
slowly upward. The sun had just set
at nine in the evening, casting a warm
and beautiful glow over all the lonely
landscape, for it was the most dreary
spot in all the dreary wilderness
through which the mighty Yukon
passes.
The steamer had tied up for wood,
and now the brawny stevedores with
blackened hands and arms were pitching it to the
deck.
To the passengers, of whom there were a
goodly number, time hung heavily, and the younger
ones had proposed a dance. Musical instruments
were not numerous, but such as there were, were
brought out, and two non-professionals with an accordion
and a banjo, were doing their very best.
A small number of sober ones were to be seen on
deck pacing restlessly back and forth, for the ruthless
mosquito was distinctly on evidence, and
threatened to outgeneral the quiet ones, if not the
orchestra and the hilarious dancers.
On the upper deck, a lady, clad in warm cloak
and thick veil, walked tirelessly to and fro. A big
stump-tailed dog of the Malemute tribe at times followed
at her heels, but when she had patted his[Pg 20]
head and spoken kindly to him he appeared satisfied,
and lay down again with his head between his
paws. Then sounds from the dancers below, the
shrill laughter of the women mingled with the
strum of the banjo and the wheezy accordion
seemed to disturb the dog’s slumber, and he would
again pace up and down at the lady’s heels.
At times there would come a lull in the tumult,
and the click of the glasses or crash of a fallen
pitcher would make a variety of entertainment for
the lady and her dog on the upper deck; but the
short and dusky midnight was well passed before
the dancing ceased and partial quiet and order were
restored.
Two figures remained near the stern of the boat.
One, a young woman with a profusion of long
auburn hair, the other a man with flushed face and
thick breath.
“I cannot tell now which one it will be,” said the
girl coquettishly, “but if you wait you will see.”
“No more waitin’ in it,” he growled. “I have
waited long enough, and too long, and you must
choose between us now. You know we will soon
be at ‘Five Fingers,’ and you must be good or
they may get you,” with a wicked leer and clutch
at her arm calculated to startle her as she carelessly
sat on the deck rail.
“I’m not afraid of ‘Five Fingers’ or any other
fingers, and I’m not afraid of your two hands
either,” making her muscles very tense, and sitting[Pg 21]
rigidly upright, “and you can’t scare me a bit; I’ll
do as I like, so there!”
By this time the moon shone high above the tops
of the tall slender pines, and spread its soft light
over all the swift and swirling waters. To the west,
the hills faded first from green to blue, then to
purple, and lastly to black, silhouetted as they were
against the quiet sky.
The swift flowing current pushed the waters up
among the weeds and bushes along the river’s edge
and the loose rocks were washed quite smooth.
Now and then might be heard the bark of a wood-chopper’s
dog stationed outside his master’s cabin,
and the steady thud of the steamer never stopped.
At two o’clock it was growing light again, and
still the young man pleaded with the girl on the
deck. She was stubborn and silent.
Swiftly now the boat neared the “Five Fingers.”
Only a few miles remained before the huge boulders
forming the narrow and tortuous channels
called the “Five Fingers” would be reached, and
the face of the pilot was stern. It was a most dangerous
piece of water and many boats had already
been wrecked at this point.
Suddenly above the noise of the waters and the
steamer’s regular breathing there arose on the
quiet air a shrill shriek at the stern of the boat.
The lady on the upper deck had retired. The
captain was sleeping off his too frequent potations,
and only the pilot on the lookout knew that the[Pg 22]
scream came from a woman; but it was not repeated.
The pilot’s assistant was off watch, and his own
duty lay at the wheel; so it happened that a guilty
man who had been standing by the deck rail crept
silently, unnoticed, and now thoroughly sobered, to
his stateroom.
His companion was nowhere to be seen.
A small steamer following next day in the wake
of the first boat, came to Five Finger Rapids.
“See the pretty red seaweed on the rocks,
mamma,” cried a little boy, pointing to the low
ledge on the bank of the east channel.
Those who looked in the direction indicated by
the boy saw, as the steamer crept carefully up to
the whirlpool, a woman’s white face in the water,
above which streamed a mass of long auburn hair,
caught firmly on the rocks.
Standing by the side of his pilot, the captain’s
keen eye caught sight of the head and hair.
“It’s only Dolly Duncan,” he said, with a shrug
of his shoulders. “No one else has such hair; but
it’s no great loss anyway; there are many more of
such as she, you know.”
CHAPTER III.
DAWSON.

Y this time we had passed the Hootalingua,
Big Salmon, Little Salmon and
Lewes rivers, and were nearing the
mouth of Pelley River, all flowing into
one stream from the east and uniting
to form the Upper Yukon. Many
smaller rivers and creeks from the west
as well as the east empty into this river
which gathers momentum and volume
constantly until it reaches a swiftness
of five miles an hour between Five Finger Rapids
and Fort Selkirk.
This latter fort is an old Canadian Post where
mounted police and other officers and soldiers are
stationed. Never shall I forget my first experience
at Fort Selkirk. We arrived about one o’clock in
the afternoon and were told that our steamer would
remain there an hour, giving us all a chance to run
about on shore for a change. Taking my sunshade,
and attracted by the wide green fields dotted with
pretty wild flowers of various colors, I rambled
around alone for an hour, all the time keeping our
steamer in plain sight not many hundred yards
away. Curious to learn the meaning of a group of
peculiar stakes driven into the ground, some of
which were surrounded by rude little fences, I made
my way in a narrow path through the deep grass to[Pg 24]
the place, and soon discovered an Indian burial
ground. There were, perhaps, twenty little mounds
or graves, a few much sunken below the level as if
made long years before, but all were marked in
some manner by rude head boards.
These were notched, and had at one time been
fancifully stained or colored by the Ayan Indians,
the stains and funny little inscriptions being, for the
most part, obliterated by the elements. Dainty wild
roses here nodded gracefully to each other, their
pretty blooms being weighted down at times by
some venturesome, big honey bee or insolent fly;
both insects with many others, some of them unknown
to me, buzzing contentedly in the sunshine
overhead.
Daisies and buttercups grew wild. Flowering
beans and peas trailed their sprays upon the
ground. Blue bells, paint brush, and other posies
fairly bewildered me, so surprised was I to find
them here in this far Northland. Without this happiness
and cheer given me by my sweet little floral
friends I might not have been so well prepared to
endure the rudeness that was awaiting me.
Upon my return to the steamer I found all in confusion.
I could see no signs of departure and no
one of whom I cared to make inquiries. Men and
women were coming and going, but none appeared
sober, while many with flushed faces were loudly
laughing and joking. A few Canadian police in red
coats scattered here and there were fully as rollicking[Pg 25]
as any, and the steamer’s captain and purser,
arm in arm with a big, burly Canadian official, were
as drunk as bad liquor could well make them.
Going to my stateroom I sat down to read, and,
if possible, hide my anxiety. As there was no window
or other ventilator, and it was a warm day, I
could not close the door. While sitting thus the
doorway was darkened, and looking up I saw before
me the drunken Canadian official, leering at me
with a horrible grin, and just about to speak.
At that instant there stepped to his side the tall
form of the only really sober man on board—the
Seattle lawyer, who, in his most dignified manner
motioned the officer on, and he went; the gentlemanly
lawyer, tossing his half-consumed cigar overboard
in an emphatic way as if giving vent to his
inward perturbation, marched moodily on. Catching
a glimpse of his face as he passed, I concluded
that the situation was fully as bad or worse than I
had at first feared. Already we had been several
hours at Fort Selkirk and should have been miles
on toward Dawson.
The captain and crew were too drunk to know
what they were doing, and they were hourly growing
more so. Many were gambling and drinking
in the salon or dining room and others came from
the liquor store on shore a few rods away. The
voices of the women were keyed to the highest
pitch as they shouted with laughter at the rough
jokes or losing games of the men, while red-faced,[Pg 26]
perspiring waiters hurried back and forth with trays
laden with bottles and glasses. Now and then the
crash of a fallen pitcher or plate, followed by the
shrieks of the women would reach me, and looking
through the great cracks in the board partition
which was the only thing separating me from the
drunken crowd, I could see most of the carousal,
for such it now was.
My anxiety increased. I feared the danger of a
night on board in a tiny stateroom, without lock
or weapon, and entirely alone.
“Mr. H——,” said I quietly, a little later, to the
man from Seattle, as I stepped up to him while he
smoked near the deck rail. “When do you think
the steamer will leave this place?”
“Tomorrow, most likely,” in a tone of deep disgust.
“Do you not think that the captain will push on
tonight?” I asked in great anxiety.
“I doubt if there is a man on board with enough
sense left to run the engine, and the captain—look
there!” pointing to a maudlin and dishevelled Canadian
wearing a captain’s cap, and just then trying to
preserve his equilibrium on a wooden settle near
the railing. “It would be a blessing if the brute
tumbled overboard, and we were well rid of him,”
said the gentleman savagely in a low tone. Then,
seeing my consternation, he added: “I’ll see what
can be done, however,” and I returned to my room.
What should I do! I knew of no place of safety[Pg 27]
on shore for me during the night if the steamer remained,
and I dared not stay in my stateroom. I
had no revolver, no key to my door. I might be
murdered before morning, and my friends would
never know what had become of me. There was
no one on board to whom I could appeal but the
lawyer, and he might be powerless to protect me in
such a drunken rabble. With a prayer in my heart
I made my nerves as tense as possible and shut my
teeth tightly together. It was best to appear unconcerned.
I did it. Suggesting away all fright
from my face I watched proceedings in the dining
room through the cracks in the wall. It was a sight
such as I had never before seen. It was six o’clock
and dinner was being served by the flushed and
flustered waiters. Probably a hundred persons sat
at the tables in all stages of intoxication. Hilarity
ran high. Most of them were wildly jolly and gushingly
full of good will; but all seemed hungry, and
the odors from the kitchen were appetizing.
I now hoped that the dinner, and especially the
hot tea and coffee would restore some of these
people to their senses in order that they might get
up steam in the engines and pull out of this terrible
place before they were too far gone. Dinner was
well over in the dining room and I had not yet
eaten. A waiter passed my door. He stopped.
“Have you eaten dinner?”
“No, I have not.”
“Don’t you want some?”[Pg 28]
“Well, yes. I think I could eat something.”
“I’ll bring you some.” And he was gone.
A few minutes later he entered my stateroom
with a big tray, and putting it upon the edge of the
upper berth he left me. I ate my dinner from the
tray while standing, and felt better.
An hour afterward the drunken officials had been
coaxed into going ashore; the furnace in the engine
room was crammed with wood; the partially sobered
pilot resumed his place at the wheel; the
captain had pulled himself together as best he could
under the threats of the lawyer from Seattle, and
the steamer moved away from the bank, going with
the current swiftly towards Dawson. Nothing of
further importance occurred until next morning
when our steamer pulled up alongside the dock at
Dawson. It was Monday morning, the thirtieth of
July, 1899, and the weather was beautifully clear.
I had been fourteen days coming from Seattle.
Hundreds of people waited upon the dock to see us
land, and to get a glimpse of a new lot of “Chechakos,”
as all newcomers are called.
Soon after landing I met upon the street an old
Seattle friend of my parents, who knew me instantly
and directed me to my father. This man’s kind
offer to look up my baggage was accepted, and I
trudged down through the town towards the Klondyke
River, where my father and brother lived. I
had no difficulty in finding father, and after the first
surprise and our luncheon were over we proceeded[Pg 29]
to find my brother at his work. His astonishment
was as great as my father’s, and I cannot truthfully
state that either of them were overcome with joy at
seeing me in Dawson. At any other time or place
they undoubtedly would have been delighted, but
they were too well acquainted with conditions to
wish another member of their family there in what
was probably then the largest and roughest mining
camp in the world. The situation that presented
itself was this. Instead of finding my relatives
comfortably settled in a large and commodious log
cabin of their own on the banks of the Klondyke
River, as they had written they were, I found them
in the act of moving all their belongings into a big
covered scow or barge drawn close to the river
bank and securely fastened. Cooking utensils,
boxes, bags of provisions consisting of flour, beans
and meal, as well as canned goods of every description,
along with firewood and numerous other
things, were dumped in one big heap upon the
banks of the Klondyke River near the barge.
The small sheet iron box with door and lid, called
a Yukon stove, had been set up close in one corner
of the living room, which in size was about eight by
ten feet. Two bunks, one above the other in the
opposite corner, had been lately constructed by
father, who at the moment of my arrival was busy
screwing a small drop leaf to the wall to be used
as a dining table when supported by a couple of
rather uncertain adjustable legs underneath.[Pg 30]
The meaning of all this commotion was not long
to find. Father and brother had, along with many
more as peaceable and law-abiding citizens, been
ordered out of their log cabins, built at a great out-lay
of time, money and strength, so that their
homes should be pulled down in accordance with an
order given by the Governor. This land, as the city
had grown, had increased in value and was coveted
by those high in authority. No redress was made
the settlers, no money was paid them, nothing for
them but insulting commands and black looks from
the Canadian police enforcing the order of the
governor.
“Never again,” said my father repeatedly, “will
I build or own a home in the Klondyke. This scow
will shelter me until I make what money I want,
and then good-bye to such a country and its oppressive
officials.”
Other men cursed and swore, and mutterings of
a serious nature were heard; but there was nothing
to be done, and the row of comfortable, completed
log cabins was torn down, and we settled ourselves
elsewhere by degrees. A bunk with calico curtains
hung around it was made for me, and I was constituted
cook of the camp. Then such a scouring of
tins, kettles and pails as I had! Shelves were nailed
in place for all such utensils, and a spot was found
for almost everything, after which the struggle was
begun to keep these things in their places. Then I
baked and boiled and stewed and patched and[Pg 31]
mended, between times writing in my note book,
sending letters to friends or taking kodak pictures.
I was now living in a new world! Nothing like
the town of Dawson had I ever seen. Crooked,
rough and dirty streets; rude, narrow board walks
or none at all; dog-teams hauling all manner of
loads on small carts, and donkeys or “burros”
bowing beneath great loads of supplies starting out
on the trail for the gold mines.
“Don’t do that!” shouted a man to me one day,
as I attempted to “snap-shot” his pack train of
twenty horses and mules as they passed us. Two
of the animals had grown tired and attempted to
lie down, thus causing the flour sacks with which
they were loaded to burst open and the flour to fly
in clouds around them. “Don’t do that,” he entreated,
“for we are having too much trouble!”
Some of the drivers were lashing the mules to
make them rise, and this spread a panic through
most of the train, so that one horse, evidently new
to the business and not of a serious turn of mind,
ran swiftly away, kicking up his heels in the dust
behind him. There were also hams and sides of
bacon dangling in greasy yellow covers over the
backs of the pack animals, along with “grub”
boxes and bags of canned goods of every description.
Pick axes, shovels, gold pans and Yukon
stoves with bundles of stove pipe tied together with
ropes, rolls of blankets, bedding, rubber boots, canvas
tents, ad infinitum.[Pg 32]
There was one method used by “packers,” as the
drivers of these pack trains were called, which
worked well in some instances. If the animals of
his train were all sober and given to honestly doing
their work, then the halter or rope around the neck
of a mule could be tied to the tail of the one preceding
him, and so on again until they were all really
hitched together tandem. But woe unto the poor
brute who was followed by a balky fellow or a
shirk! The consequences were, at times, under
certain circumstances, almost too serious to be recounted
in this story, at least this can be said of the
emphatic language used by the packers in such
predicament.
One warm, bright day soon after my arrival in
Dawson, and when order had been brought out of
chaos in the scow—our home—I went to call upon
an old friend, formerly of Seattle. Carrie N. was
three or four years younger than myself, had been a
nurse for a time after the death of her husband, but
grew tired of that work, and decided in the winter
of 1897 and 1898 to go into the Klondyke. A party
of forty men and women going to Dawson was
made up in Seattle, and she joined them. For
weeks they were busily engaged in making their
preparations. Living near me, as she did at the
time, I was often with Carrie N. and was much
interested in her movements and accompanied her
to the Alaska steamer the day she sailed. It was
the little ship “Alki” upon which she went away,[Pg 33]
and it was crowded with passengers and loaded
heavily with freight for the trip to Dyea, as Skagway
and the dreaded White Pass had been voted
out of the plans of the Seattle party of forty.
Now in Dawson I called upon Carrie N. eighteen
months later, and heard her tell the story of her
trip to the Klondyke. They had landed, she said,
at Dyea from the “Alki” with their many tons of
provisions and supplies, all of which had to be
dumped upon the beach where no dock or wharf
had ever been constructed. Here with dog-teams
and sleds, a few horses and men “packers,” their
supplies were hauled up the mountain as far as
“Sheep Camp,” some ten miles up the mountain
side. It was early springtime and the snow lay deep
upon the mountains and in the gorges, which, in
the vicinity of Chilkoot Pass at the summit of the
mountain are frightfully high and precipitous.
The weather was not cold, and the moving of this
large party of forty persons with their entire outfit
was progressing as favorably as could be expected.
A camp had been made at Dyea as the base of operations;
another was made at Sheep Camp. At each
place the women of the party did the cooking in
tents while men gathered wood, built fires, and
brought water. Other men worked steadily at the
hauling, and most of their supplies had already
been transported to the upper camp; when there
occurred a tragedy so frightful as to make itself a
part of never-to-be-forgotten Alaskan history.[Pg 34]
It was on Sunday, and a snow storm was raging,
but the weather was warm. Hundreds of people
thronged the trails both going up and coming down
the mountain in their effort to quickly transport
their outfits over to the other side, and thus make
the best possible time in reaching the gold fields.
Here a difference of opinion arose among the people
of our Seattle party, for some, more daring than
the others, wished to push on over the summit
regardless of the storm; while the more cautious
ones demurred and held back, thinking it the part
of discretion to wait for better weather. A few venturesome
ones kept to their purpose and started
on ahead, promising to meet the laggards at Lake
Bennett with boats of their own making in which
to journey down the river and lakes to Dawson.
Their promises were never fulfilled.
While they, in company with hundreds of others
as venturesome, trudged heavily up the narrow
trail, a roar as of an earthquake suddenly sounded
their death-knell. Swiftly down the mountain side
above them tore the terrible avalanche, a monster
formation of ice, snow and rock, the latter loosened
and ground off the face of old Chilkoot by the rushing
force of the moving snowslide urged on by a
mighty wind. In an instant’s time a hundred men
and women were brushed, like flies from a ceiling,
off the face of the mountain into their death below,
leaving a space cleared of all to the bare earth[Pg 35]
where only a few seconds before had stood the
patient toilers on the trail.
Only one thing remained for the living to do, and
that was to drop all else and rescue, if possible, the
dying and engulfed ones. This they did. When
the wind had died away the snow in the air cleared,
and hundreds of men threw themselves into the
rescue work. Many were injured but lived. Some
were buried in snow but found their way to light
again. One man was entirely covered except one
arm which he used energetically to inform those
above him of his whereabouts. He was taken out
unharmed, and lived to welcome the writer of this
to Dawson, where he carted and delivered her trunk
faithfully.
But Carrie N. had remained at Sheep Camp and
was safe. Then her experience in nursing stood her
in good stead; and while men brought the dead to
camp, she, with others, for hours performed the
services which made the bodies ready for burial. It
was a heart-rending undertaking and required a cool
head and steady hand, both of which Carrie N.
possessed. Two men of her party thus lost their
lives, and it was not until days afterward that the
last of the poor unfortunates were found. Nearly
one hundred lives were lost in this terrible disaster,
but there were undoubtedly those whose bodies
were never found, and whose death still remains a
mystery.
CHAPTER IV.
THE RUSH.

INCE the discovery of gold by George
Carmack on Bonanza Creek in September,
1896, the growth of this country
has been phenomenal, more especially
so to the one who has visited and
is familiar with Dawson and the Klondyke
mining section.
As to the entire yield of gold from
the Klondyke Creeks, none can say
except approximately; for the ten per
cent. royalty imposed by the Canadian government
has always met a phase of human nature which
prompts to concealment and dishonesty, so that
a truthful estimate cannot be made.
The Canadian Dominion government is very
oppressive. Mining laws are very arbitrary and
strictly enforced. A person wishing to prospect
for gold must first procure a miner’s license, paying
ten dollars for it. If anything is discovered, and he
wishes to locate a claim, he visits the recorder’s
office, states his business, and is told to call again.
In the meantime, men are sent to examine the locality
and if anything of value is found, the man wishing
to record the claim is told that it is already
located. The officials seize it. The man has no way
of ascertaining if the land was properly located,
and so has no redress. If the claim is thought to[Pg 37]
be poor, he can locate it by the payment of a fifteen
dollar fee.
One half of all mining land is reserved for the
crown, a quarter or more is gobbled by corrupt
officials, and a meagre share left for the daring
miners who, by braving hardship and death, develop
the mines and open up the country.
“Any one going into the country has no right
to cut wood for any purpose, or to kill any game or
catch any fish, without a license for which a fee of
ten dollars must be paid. With such a license it is
unlawful to sell a stick of wood for any purpose, or
a pound of fish or game.” The law is strictly enforced.
To do anything, one must have a special
permit, and for every such permit he must pay
roundly.
The story is told of a miner in a hospital who
was about to die. He requested that the Governor
be sent for. Being asked what he wanted with the
Governor, he replied: “I haven’t any permit, and if
I should undertake to die without a permit, I
should get myself arrested.”
It is a well-known fact that many claims on Eldorado,
Hunker and Bonanza Creeks have turned out
hundreds of thousands of dollars. One pan of
gravel on Eldorado Creek yielded $2100. Frank
Dinsmore on Bonanza Creek took out ninety
pounds of solid gold or $24,480 in a single day. On
Aleck McDonald’s claim on Eldorado, one man
shoveled in $20,000 in twelve hours. McDonald,[Pg 38]
in two years, dug from the frozen ground $2,207,893.
Charley Anderson, on Eldorado, panned out
$700 in three hours. T. S. Lippy is said to have
paid the Canadian government $65,000 in royalties
for the year 1898 and Clarence Berry about the
same.
On Skukum Gulch $30,000 were taken from two
boxes of dirt. Frank Phiscator of Michigan, after
a few months’ work, brought home $100,000 in
gold, selling one-third of his claim interests for
$1,333,000, or at the rate of $5,000,000 for the
whole.
When a man is compelled to pay one thousand
dollars out of every ten thousand he digs from the
ground, he will boast little of large “clean-ups”;
and for this reason it is hard to estimate the real
amount of gold extracted from the Klondyke mines.
Captain James Kennedy, an old pioneer and conservative
mining man, estimates the output for the
season of 1899 as $25,000,000, or fifty tons of dust
and nuggets.
The most commendable thing about the Canadian
Government is their strict enforcement of
order. Stealing is an almost unheard of thing, and
petty thieving does not exist. Mounted police in
their brown uniforms and soldiers in their red coats
are everywhere seen in and around Dawson, and
they practice methods, which, to the uninitiated,
make them very nearly omnipresent.
While walking down street in Dawson one morning[Pg 39]
about nine o’clock, I passed a group of men all
wearing sober faces. “They’re done for now,” said
a rough miner, glancing in the direction of the
Barracks, where a black flag was fluttering at the
top of a staff.
“How so?” asked another, just come up to the
group.
“Three men hung over there, an hour ago.
They’re goin’ to bury ’em now,” and the speaker
twitched his thumbs first toward the Barracks, then
farther east, where a rough stretch of ground lay
unused. Here could be seen policemen and soldiers,
evidently in the midst of some performance
not on their daily routine.
A number of prisoners wearing the regulation
garb of convicts,—pantaloons of heavy mackinaw,
one leg of yellow and the other of black,—were
carrying long, rough boxes, while others were digging
shallow graves.
Upon inquiry I found that what the miner had
said was true. Three prisoners, two of them Indian
murderers, with another man notoriously bad,
had indeed been hung about eight o’clock that
morning in the barracks courtyard. In less than
two hours afterward they were interred, and in as
many days they were forgotten.
By the middle of July, 1899, the steamers leaving
Dawson on their way down the Yukon to St.
Michael and the new gold fields at Nome, were well
filled with those who were anxious to try their luck[Pg 40]
in Uncle Sam’s territory where they can breathe,
dig, fish, hunt, or die without buying a license.
By August the steamers coming from St. Michael
brought such glowing accounts of the Nome gold
fields, that while few people came in, they carried as
many out as they could accommodate.
By September the rush down the Yukon was tremendous,
and of the twelve thousand people in
Dawson many hundreds left for Nome.
When, after six weeks spent in curiously studying
conditions and things,—not to say people,—in
the great mining camp, it was decided that I should
accompany my brother down the Yukon to Cape
Nome, and so “out” home to San Francisco, I felt
a very distinct sense of disappointment. The novelty
of everything, the excitement which came each
day in some form or other, was as agreeable as the
beautiful summer weather with the long, quiet
evenings only settling into darkness at midnight.
In September came the frosts. Men living in
tents moved their little Yukon stoves inside, and
brought fresh sawdust and shavings from the mills
for their beds. Others packed their few possessions
into small boats, hauled down their tents, whistled
to their dogs, and rolling up their sleeves, pulled
laboriously up the swift little Klondyke to their
winter “lays” in the mines.
Hundreds were also leaving for the outside.
Steamers, both large and small, going to White
Horse and Bennett, carried those who had joyfully[Pg 41]
packed their bags and smilingly said good-bye; for
they were going home to the “States.” How we
strained our eyes from our cabin window or from
the higher bank above, to see the people on the
decks of the out-going boats. How the name of
each tug and even freight-carrier became a familiar
household word, and how many were the conjectures
as to whether “she” would get through to
White Horse Rapids in the low water before a
freeze-up!
One day our own steamer came. She was a magnificently
equipped river boat called the “Hannah,”
belonging to the Alaska Commercial Company, and
had cost one hundred thousand dollars. This was
to be her last trip for the season, and with us it
was “home now, or here all winter,” and we made
ready to leave. My kodak had been emptied and
filled again, calls on acquaintances made, and good-byes
said. My battered and broken trunk, which,
at the hands of the English customs officials had
suffered much, had now to be repaired and put to a
good long test. This box was in a state of total
collapse; rollers all gone, covering torn and bent,
screws and nails lost, sides split, bottom entirely
dropped out, but it must go; so my big brother was
wheedled into putting it into some kind of shape
again, and it came out stronger than before.
No lunches were needed. The cuisine of the
Hannah was said to be as perfect as could be in this
far away corner of the globe, and we trusted to that.[Pg 42]
On September sixteenth the Hannah sounded
her whistle—all was hurry and bustle, and such a
sight! If hundreds had stood on the docks to welcome
us as we entered the city, there were thousands
now. It was pleasant. We felt flattered,
especially as the band struck up our own national
airs, giving us a medley of “Yankee Doodle,”
“America,” “Tramp, Tramp, Tramp,” and “When
Johnny Comes Marching Home.” They felt constrained,
however, to wind up with “Sweet Marie,”
and rag-time dances, one old fellow in slouch hat
and with a few drinks too many, stepping the jigs
off in lively and comical fashion.
Our pride was perceptibly lessened afterward,
when we learned that we had on board a dance hall
outfit, and the band belonged to the Monte Carlo
saloon!
We were now in the midst of a group, cosmopolitan
beyond our wildest dreams. Pushing their way
through the crowd to the gangplank came men,
women and dogs, carrying grips, kodaks, tin cash
boxes, musical instruments, army sacks, fur robes,
and rolls of blankets. Struggling under the weight
of canvas tents, poles, Yukon stoves and sleds, as
well as every conceivable thing, they climbed the
stairway to the deck. Here, and in the main saloon,
all was deposited for the time being.
There was a woman with a fine grey cat, for
which she had been offered fifty dollars, wrapped in
a warm shawl, much to pussy’s disgust. A number[Pg 43]
of women had dogs and were weeping, probably at
leaving other canines behind. Several persons carried
little grips so heavy that they tugged along—evidently
“Chechako,” or paper money, was more
scarce with them than dust and nuggets.
As freight, there was a piano, many iron-bound
boxes containing gold bullion, securely sealed and
labeled, and tons of supplies for the consumption
of the passengers, of whom there were now five
hundred.
Then the whistle again sounded—the gangplank
was hauled in, handkerchiefs fluttered, the
band struck up “Home Sweet Home”—we were
headed down the Yukon River and toward the
Arctic Circle.
We had now a journey of seventeen hundred
miles before us. We were to traverse a country
almost unknown to man. We were two of a party
of five hundred persons, the majority of whom, if
not actually desperadoes, were reckless and given
over to the pursuit of gold regardless of the manner
of its getting. There were loose characters of the
town by hundreds; there were gamblers running a
variety of games both day and night; there were
dance house girls and musicians; there were drunks
and toughs, and one prize fighter. No firearms or
knives were seen, though many, no doubt, had
them.
With the enormous amount of gold on board[Pg 44]
(for the steamer’s safe was overflowing, and the
purser’s room well packed with the precious stuff),
with the numbers of hard characters we carried,
and the now increasing remoteness from centres of
government, there were dangers, we were forced to
confess, but which we only admitted in whispers.
Three hours after leaving Dawson we were taking
on wood at Forty Mile. This is the oldest
camp on the Yukon River, and the early home of
Jack McQuestion. The river banks were lined
with canoes; many natives stood looking at us from
the shore, and while stevedores handled the wood,
many passengers visited the town. It was not long
before they came back with hands full of turnips,
just pulled from the ground, which, had they been
the most luscious fruit, could not have been eaten
with more relish.
I then tried to buy one of a young man, but he
had evidently been long away from such luxuries,
for he refused to sell; afterward, his gallantry getting
the better of him, he politely offered me one-half
of the vegetable, which I took with thanks.
As my brother peeled the precious turnip, I
asked him how long since he had eaten one. “Two
years,” he promptly replied. Knowing that he was
especially fond of such things, I ate a small slice,
and gave him the remainder. It is needless to say
he enjoyed it.
To the right of the landing at Forty Mile, just
across a small stream which runs into the Yukon,[Pg 45]
is Fort Cudahy, containing the stores and warehouses
of one of the large companies, as well as a
post-office.
But we were soon off again, steaming along between
hills yellow with fading poplar leaves and
green streaked with pines. Many rocky spurs towered
grandly heavenward, with tops, like silvered
heads, covered with newly fallen snow. The Yukon
is here very crooked and narrow, and abrupt banks
hedged our steamer in on all sides.
Next morning early we arrived at Eagle City,
Alaska. We were now in Uncle Sam’s land, and
breathed more freely. We felt at home. We cheered
and waved our handkerchiefs to the blue uniformed
soldiers on the river bank who had come to see us.
We went ashore and called upon lieutenant L.,
lately from his home in Connecticut and campaigning
in Cuba. Taking us into a log house near by,
he pointed out forty thousand rounds of ammunition
and one hundred and fifteen Krag-Jorgensen
rifles of the latest pattern.
Here were stationed one hundred and fifteen
men, some of them at that time out moose hunting
and fishing. Captain Ray, an old white-haired gentleman,
stood outside his cabin door. At Eagle we
saw the new government barracks just being finished,
the logs and shingles having been sawed at
the government saw-mill near by, at the mouth of
Mission Creek.
We were particularly struck with the very youthful[Pg 46]
appearance of our soldiers, and their wistful
faces as they watched our preparations for departure.
The lieutenant had said that life in Cuba, or in
almost any old place was preferable to that at
Eagle, with the long winter staring them in the face,
and we could see that the poor fellow longed for
home. We were quite touched, but tried to cheer
him as best we could.
Circle City, on a big bend of the river from
which it derives its name, was reached the following
evening. Here all hands crowded over the gangplank
and into the stores. In less time than it takes
to write it, these places were filled with miners,
each man pulling away at his strong, old pipe, the
companion of many weary months perhaps; while
over the counters they handed their gold dust in
payment for the “best plug cut,” chewing gum,
candy, or whatever else they saw that looked tempting.
Here we bought two pairs of beaded moccasins
for seven dollars.
As a heavy fog settled down upon us, our captain
thought best to tie up the steamer over night, and
did so. Next morning by daylight we saw the
offices of the United States marshal; both log
cabins with dirt roofs, upon which bunches of tall
weeds were going to seed. We hoped this was not
symbolical of the state of Uncle Sam’s affairs in
the interior, but feared it might be, as the places
seemed deserted.[Pg 47]
Many of the one thousand cabins at Circle were
now vacant, but it is the largest town next to Dawson
on the Yukon River.
During the whole of the next day our pilots
steered cautiously over the Yukon Flats.
This is a stretch of about four hundred miles of
low, swampy country, where the Yukon evidently
loses its courage to run swiftly, for it spreads out
indolently in all directions between treacherous and
shifting sand-bars, fairly disheartening to all not
familiar with its many peculiarities.
We now learned for the first time that we were
practically in the hands of three pilots, two of
whom were Eskimos, one of them on a salary of five
hundred dollars per month. This man was perfectly
familiar with the entire river, being an expert
pilot, as he proved during this trip to the satisfaction
of all.
Owing to the near approach of winter, and the
extremely low water at this point, the captain, crew,
and many others, wore anxious faces until the Flats
were well passed. Should our steamer stick fast on
a sand-bar, or take fire, we might easily be landed;
but to be left in such a bleak and barren place, with
cold weather approaching, snow beginning to fall,
no shelter, and only provisions for a few days, with
traveling companions of the very worst type, and
no passing steamers to pick us up, we would indeed
meet a hard fate, and one even the prospect of
which was well calculated to make strong men
shudder.
CHAPTER V
AT THE ARCTIC CIRCLE.

E were now at the Arctic Circle. For
three days we had no sunshine, and
flurries of snow were frequent. The
mountain tops, as well as the banks
and sand-bars of the river, were spread
with a thin covering of snow; enough
at least to give a wintry aspect. This
added to the leaden sky above, made
the warmth of big coal fires acceptable
indoors, and fur coats comfortable on
the decks.
At Fort Yukon the low water prevented our landing.
We were told, however, that the place contained
one hundred log houses, as well as an old
Episcopal Mission, in which Mrs. Bumpus had lived
and taught the natives for twenty years. Many of
the Eskimo girls are trained as children’s nurses
and make very satisfactory ones.
Into the Yukon Flats empty the Porcupine
River, Birch Creek and other streams. Fort Yukon
was established by the Hudson Bay Company many
years ago, all supplies coming in and shipments of
furs going out by way of the McKensie River and
the great Canadian Lakes.
Toward evening one day, while the stevedores
were busy handling wood, we went ashore and visited[Pg 49]
an Eskimo family in their hut. It was built
on the high river bank among the trees, quite near
the steamer’s landing. On the roof of the hut, there
lay, stretched on sticks to dry, a large brown bear
skin. Near by we saw the head of a freshly killed
moose, with the hoofs of the animal still bloody.
As we stooped to enter the low door of the cabin,
we felt the warmth from the fire in the little Yukon
stove which was placed in the corner of the room.
Next to this was a rude table, on which lay a quarter
of moose meat, looking more or less tempting
to travelers living on canned goods.
A bed stood in one corner, upon which two or
three little children were playing, and upon a pile
of rags and skins on the floor sat an old Eskimo
woman, wrinkled and brown. These were her children
and grandchildren, and she was spending her
life on the floor of the cabin, watching the little
ones play around her, for she was paralyzed.
There were no chairs in the cabin, and but few
rude utensils and playthings. A box or tin can,
which had contained provisions, was now and then
utilized.
After a few moments with the Eskimos, we
backed out into the open air again, for the atmosphere
of the hut was peculiar, and not altogether
agreeable to our southern olfactories. It reminded
us of Mrs. Peary’s description of native smells in
Greenland.
The short path back to our steamer lay through[Pg 50]
a poplar grove, and under our feet was spread a
carpet of brown and yellow leaves, which, in the
cool night air, smelled ripe and woodsy.
Next came Fort Hamlin, where we again saw
some of Uncle Sam’s boys, and where we trudged
out through the soft light snow and took some
kodak views.
Rampart City was reached in the early evening.
One long row of houses upon the south bank of
the Yukon, near the mouth of the Big Minook
Creek constitutes the town. Here empty the Little
Minook, Alder, Hunter, and many other gold-bearing
creeks, and a bustling town sprung up only to
be almost depopulated during the Nome excitement.
By this time several inches of snow had fallen,
and the ground was freezing. We managed here
to climb the slippery steps of the log store building
in the dusk and buy a pound of ordinary candy, for
which we paid one dollar.
Again we were in deep water. This time so very
smooth that the hills, peaks, trees and islands were
all mirrored on its surface, and very beautiful.
The days were now quite short. About five in
the afternoon the electric lights were turned on
through the steamer, fresh coal again piled on the
fires, and we reminded ourselves how comfortably
we were traveling.
Then the dinner bell rang, and we sat down to
dinner. Some attempt at decoration had been[Pg 51]
made, for tall glasses stood in the centre of the
tables filled with ripe grasses and pretty autumn
leaves, but, strange to relate, we were more interested
in the contents of our soup plates and what
was to follow. The cold and bracing air during
our short walks on deck had given us all famous
appetites, and we relished everything.
After hot soup with crackers, we ate of fresh
fish, three kinds of canned meats, baked or boiled
potatoes, with one other kind of vegetable, canned
tomatoes, corn or beans. Side dishes consisted of
pickles, olives, cheese, sardines, canned fruits, fancy
crackers or biscuits, and afterward came pudding
and pie. These last were made from various canned
fruits, and with the rice, sago or tapioca pudding,
formed most enjoyable desserts. On Sunday nuts
and raisins or apples were added to the menu.
If we ate with keen appetites, we were not too
much occupied to take note of the passengers
around us. Nearly opposite sat a beautiful woman
with a profusion of auburn hair piled high on her
head. She was fashionably dressed in black silk
or satin, and her white fingers were loaded with
costly rings. As she handed a dish to the man beside
her, her diamonds and other gems sparkled
brightly. Her companion, much older, had a hard
and villainous face. A heavy frown of displeasure
habitually rested upon his brow, and his glance was
shifting and evasive. He was a professional gambler,[Pg 52]
kept his game running continually, and was
going to Nome.
At the end of the table sat a tall and pleasant
mannered young Englishman, with blue eyes and
ruddy cheeks. He represented mining interests in
the Klondyke amounting to millions, and was on
his way to London. He was fond of wine, and consorted
chiefly with those who were fast bringing
him down to their level.
There was the girl with pretty black eyes, lady-like
movements, low voice, and exquisite toilettes.
A blue-eyed, pretty little blonde, with infantile complexion,
small hands and feet, and wearing a tailor-made
suit attracted considerable attention. She
was fond of cigarettes and smoked many times a
day, though she only looked “sweet sixteen.” They
were both dance-house girls.
There was a young and handsome Englishman
in the triggest of dude toggery, but having a squaw
wife and three children, as well as older men at the
head of similar broods.
The long tables were spread two or three times
at each meal, as several hundred people were to
be fed.
A different class, and a worst one if possible, was
met with at these late meals. Do you see that short,
fat woman over there with the bleared eyes, and
the neck of a prize fighter? She is a Dawson saloon
keeper, and is now on her way to Nome.
But there were a number of people on the[Pg 53]
steamer not properly belonging to this set, and
after supper a few usually gathered in one corner
to listen to each other’s experiences in the far
Northwest. Some were tales of hardship, sickness
and death; some of hair-breadth escapes from the
jaws of an Arctic winter, or from shipwreck. One
told of having, two years before, paid $175 for five
sacks of flour in the Klondyke; selling the same, a
few days later, for $500. Stories of rich strikes
were related; how one man, while drunk, was persuaded
by his associates to trade a valuable claim
for one apparently worthless; his indescribable
feelings the next day and until he had prospected
the so-called worthless claim, when it proved ten
times richer than the first one.
A little middle-aged Norwegian woman told her
story with great gusto. She had sailed from Seattle
two years before with Mayor Woods’ expedition,
getting as far as a point on the Yukon River two
hundred miles below Rampart City. Here the low
water prevented their going farther. She, in company
with others, made her way to Rampart as
best she could, rested and “outfitted” for a trip
to Dawson over the ice. Finally, with sleds and
provisions, eight dogs and four men, she started.
It was a journey of about eight hundred miles.
Before leaving Rampart she experimented with fur
sleeping bags, and finally made one in which she
could sleep comfortably on the ice and snow. Rice
and tea were their staple articles of diet, being more[Pg 54]
quickly prepared in hasty camps at night, and being
found most nourishing. After a perilous trip of
thirty-five days in the dead of winter, they reached
Dawson in good shape, two days ahead of a party
of men with whom a wager had been made. With
these, and similar stories, we whiled away the long
evening hours by the fire. Many short stops were
made along the river. A few little settlements were
passed during the night. At Holy Cross and Russian
Mission we saw flourishing Catholic schools
for the natives.
The Yukon was now getting wider and wider,
the water was shallow and more shallow, then suddenly
we felt a heavy jar. The big stern wheel refused
to move,—we were stuck fast on a sand-bar!
Here we remained all day, dreading a hard freeze
which was liable to settle down upon us at any
time, fixing our boat and us in the ice indefinitely.
But we were now in the Aphoon, or eastern
mouth of the Yukon, and near enough to Behring
Sea to get the benefit of the tides; so that in the
early evening we again heard the thud of the big
machines,—the steamer quivered,—the stern
wheel again revolved,—we had entered the Behring
Sea!
By four o’clock next morning we were in St.
Michael Bay, having covered the sixty miles from
the mouth of the river during the night. Snow
was falling heavily through which we saw the lights
of the harbor, and a number of vessels at anchor.[Pg 55]
By daylight we counted eleven ships and two revenue
cutters lying under the lee of the island.
Breakfast was served on board, and an hour later
we went ashore. We now sought the steamer company’s
hotel, and had no difficulty in getting good
rooms and seats at table; for we were still in their
care, having bought through tickets to San Francisco.
Here we were to wait for the ocean steamer
“Bertha,” which was now nearly due from that
place, and we anxiously watched the weather signs
hoping all would be favorable, and that she would
very soon put in her appearance.
Our hotel was a new frame building of about
forty rooms, lighted by electricity, having large
halls, pleasant double parlors overlooking the bay,
with a good view of incoming ships from the
north. Just across the street stood an old block
house or fort containing the funny little cannon
used by the Russians over a hundred years ago.
The antiquated lock on the door, the hundreds of
bullet holes in the outer walls, were all quaintly
interesting.
Half a mile south were stores, a hotel, another
large company’s dock, and in good weather we
tramped over there or north the same distance to
the headquarters of a third company. These three
were small settlements by themselves, and constituted,
with their employees, natives and dogs, the
whole population of St. Michael. Good sidewalks
connected these different stations and commanded[Pg 56]
fine and extensive views of the surrounding water.
St. Michael, as an island, is not large, and is entirely
without trees or timber. However, there is
deep, wet moss or tundra everywhere, as one soon
discovers to his sorrow if he attempts to leave the
plank walks. St. Michael Bay, lying between the
island and the mainland on the east, is a fine body
of water. The coast line is well defined with ranges
of mountains zigzagging their cold and snowy
peaks, blue tinted or purple during the day, and
pink in the setting sun.
St. Michael is the windiest place on earth. After
a few days spent in studying the native dress of the
Eskimos, and in trying to adapt my own dress to
the freakish breezes I concluded that if I stayed at
St. Michael I should dress as they did. If I started
for the eating room with my hat properly placed
on hair arranged with ever so much care, a heavy
beaver cape, and dress of walking length, I was
completely demoralized in appearance five minutes
later on reaching the mess-house. With a twisting
motion which was so sudden as to totally surprise
me, my dress was wound around my feet, my cape
was flung as if by spiteful hands entirely over my
head, causing me to step in my confusion from the
plank walk; while my hat was perched sidewise
anywhere above or on my shoulder. One unfortunate
woman wearing an overskirt covering a
striped cambric sham, was seen daily struggling,
with intense disgust on her face, up the steps of the[Pg 57]
eating house, with her unruly overskirt waving
wildly in the wind.
But this wind did not keep the Eskimo women
and children at home. Dressed in their fur parkies,
which are a sort of long blouse with hood attachment,
short skirts and muckluks, or skin boots,
they trotted down to the beach daily to fish, standing
on the wet and slippery rocks, regardless of
wind, spray or snow. Here they flung their fish
lines out into the water and hauled the little fish up
dexterously; when, with a curious twitch they disengaged
the finny fellows and tossed them into a
big pan. Little Eskimo children ran on in front of
their mothers, and shaggy dogs followed close behind
at the smell of the fish.
CHAPTER VI
COMPANIONS.

UT there were passengers arriving at
St. Michael each day from different
points bound for Nome.
At last the side-wheeler “Sadie” was
to leave for Nome, and what a commotion!
Men in fur coats, caps and mittens,
leading dogs of all colors and
sizes, some barking, but all hustled
along with no thought of anything except
to reach Cape Nome as quickly
as possible. At last they were off. A rough, and in
some instances a drunken lot, but all hopefully
happy and sure that they would “strike it rich” in
the new gold fields. Many, no doubt, were going
to their death, many to hardships and disappointments
undreamed of, while a few would find gold
almost inexhaustible.
Still we waited day after day for the ocean
steamer “Bertha.” One Sunday morning we
looked from the hotel windows to see a clear, cold
sky, with sun and high wind. About ten o’clock
we heard a steamer whistling for assistance. She
was small and used for errands by one of the steamship
companies. Still none went to the rescue,
as the gale was terrific. A steam tug started out,
but she passed by on the other side, not caring to
act the part of good Samaritan to a rival. In a[Pg 59]
few moments the fires of the little steamer were
out,—she was sinking. Through a glass we saw
three men on the roof of the craft—then they
clung to the smokestack. A larger steamer,
though herself disabled, finally reached the three
drowning men. It was not a moment too soon,
for the water was icy, the gale fearful. They were
then hauled in, almost exhausted and frozen.
It was a wild day. Soon after noon, one of the
two big covered barges in tow by the “Lackme,”
already loaded for a start for Nome, began to sink.
The wind came from the north, and little by little
the barge became unmanageable, until at last she
was cut loose and deserted. For an hour we
watched the barge, until, she too, sank out of sight
beneath the waters of the bay.
Small steamers still came straggling in from
Dawson crowded with passengers going to the new
gold fields, and our tired cooks and stewards in the
kitchens were rushed both day and night. Here
the price of a meal, to all but those having through
tickets to San Francisco, was one dollar, and fifteen
hundred meals a day were frequently served.
In this hotel we waited two weeks, patiently at
times, restlessly at other times. What would we
do if the Bertha failed to appear? Possibly she
was lost, and now drifting, a worthless derelict,
at the mercy of the winds! Not another boat
would or could carry us, tickets on each one having
long ago been sold. If we should be frozen in[Pg 60]
all winter, with no way of letting our friends at
home know of our whereabouts for six months,
how terrible would be their anxiety, how hard
for us in this exposed spot near the Arctic Sea!
Many times a day and in the night did this emergency
present itself to us, and we shuddered.
Each day we climbed the hill a quarter of a mile
away to look, Robinson Crusoe like, over the ocean
to see if we could discover the “Bertha.”
In the meantime, with note book and pencil in
hand I often sat in the parlor; and, while occupied
to a certain extent, I gathered sundry bits of information
regarding the gold fields in this wonderful
new Golconda. Two million dollars, it was
said, had already been extracted from the beach
at Nome, and no estimate could be made on what
was still there. The pay streak ran to the water’s
edge, and even farther, but just how far, no one
knew.
Back of this beach spread the tundra, an expanse
of marsh, ice and water, which extends some four
miles inland. The size of the claims allowed by
law is one thousand three hundred and twenty feet
in length, and six hundred and sixty feet in width;
or about twenty acres of land. The insignificant
sum of $2.50 is required to be paid the recorder.
In the York District the area allowed for claims
is smaller, being five hundred feet in width, and the
length depending on the geographical formation or
creek upon which the claim is situated.[Pg 61]
North of Nome there are ninety to one hundred
miles of gold-bearing beach to be worked, and
again to the south a vast stretch of like character
extending to Norton Bay. The tundra, which is
nothing but the old beach, follows the present
shore, and is fully as rich as the surf-washed sands.
More productive and larger than all is the inland
region traversed by rivers and creeks that form a
veritable network of streams, all bordered by gold-producing
soil.
Anvil Creek, Sunset Gulch, Snow Gulch and
Dexter Creek, near Nome, are all exceedingly rich;
one claim on Snow Gulch having been sold for
$185,000, and another for $13,000.
Golovin Bay District is situated eighty-five
miles east of Nome City, and is large and very rich.
Fish River is the principal one in this section, and
has innumerable small tributaries running into it,
most of which are also rich in gold.
Casa de Paga is a tributary of the Neukluk River,
and very rich. On Ophir Creek, claim No. four,
above Discovery, $48,000 was taken out in nineteen
days by the Dusty Diamond Company working seventeen
men. On number twenty-nine above Discovery
on Ophir Creek, seventeen dollars were
taken out a day per man, who dug out frozen gravel,
thawed it by the heat of a coal-oil stove, and afterward
rocked it.
There was much discussion over the rights of
those claiming mining lands located by the power[Pg 62]
of attorney; though the majority of men here
seemed to believe they would hold good, and many
such papers were made out in due legal form.
At last, on the morning of October ninth, the
“Bertha” really appeared. It was a clear, cold
day, sunny and calm. I ran in high spirits to the
top of the hill overlooking the bay to get a good
view. Sure enough, there lay the “Bertha” on the
bright waters as though she had always been there.
How rejoiced everyone was! How relieved were
those who intended to remain here because of the
additions to the winter’s supplies, and how rejoiced
were those waiting to get away? How we
all bustled about, packing up, buying papers and
magazines just from the steamer, sealing and
stamping letters, making notes in diaries, taking
kodak views, saying good-bye to acquaintances,
ad infinitum.
All were willing to leave. Finally on the afternoon
of the tenth we were stowed into the big
covered barge which was to take us out to the
“Bertha.” It was cold and draughty inside, so
we found a sheltered place in the sun on some piles
of luggage, and sat there. As the “Bertha” was
reached, a gangplank was thrown over to the
barge, which came as close alongside as possible,
and up this steep and narrow board we climbed,
clinging to a rope held by men on both decks.
Our trouble had now begun. We were overjoyed
at making a start at last, but under what[Pg 63]
conditions! The river steamer “Hannah” had
been a model of neatness as compared with this
one. On deck there were coops of chickens, and
pens of live sheep and pigs brought from San Francisco
to be put off at Nome, as well as a full passenger
list for the same place. On the way here a
landing had been attempted at Nome, but the surf
had been so tremendous that it could not be accomplished,
and passengers still occupied the staterooms
that we were to have. However, we were
temporarily sandwiched in, and, about four P. M.,
said good-bye to St. Michael.
It was a lovely day and the waters of the bay
were very calm. Along shore in the most sheltered
places were numbers of river steamers and smaller
craft being snugly tucked up for the winter. From
three tall flagstaffs on shore there floated gracefully
as many American flags as though to wish us
well on our long journey out to civilization.
That night on board was simply pandemonium.
Hundreds of people had no beds, and were obliged
to sit or walk about, many sitting in corners on
the floor, or on piles of luggage or lying under or
upon the tables. Every seat and berth were taken.
Many of the staterooms below were filled from
floor to ceiling with flour in sacks for Nome, as
well as every foot of space in passage-ways or
pantries. Many men were so disorderly from
drink that they kept constantly swearing and quarreling,
and one man, in a brawl, was almost toppled[Pg 64]
into the sea. To make things worse, the
stench from the pens of the animals on deck became
almost unbearable, and the wind came up,
making the water rough.
There was no sleep for us that night. We longed
to reach Nome that we might be rid of some of
these objectionable things, and hoped for an improvement
afterward.
From St. Michael to Nome, the distance is about
one hundred and twenty-five miles, and the latter
place was reached about eight A. M. A little before
daylight we had been startled by a series of
four sudden shocks or jars, the first being accompanied
by a very distinct creaking of timbers of the
ship, so that some of us rose and dressed; but the
ship had apparently sustained no injury, and we
proceeded on our way. Whether we had struck a
rock, or only a sand-bar, we never knew, for the
ship’s men laughed and evaded our questions; but
the passengers believed that the boat had touched
a reef or rock, hidden, perhaps, beneath the surface
of the sea.
By daylight the animals had been removed to
a barge, and soon after breakfast the Nome passengers
were taken ashore in like manner, for the
surf was so heavy on the beach, and there being no
docks or wharves, it was impossible for a large
steamer to get nearer.
Away in the distance to the north lay the famous[Pg 65]
new gold camp of Nome. Stretched for miles
along the beach could be seen the little white tents
of the beach miners, back of which lay the town
proper, and still back, the rolling hills now partly
covered with snow. Not a tree or shrub could be
seen, though we strained our eyes through a strong
glass in an effort to find them. A few wooden
buildings larger than the rest were pointed out as
the Alaska Commercial Company’s warehouses and
offices, near where the loaded barges were tossed
by the huge breakers toward the beach.
Passengers now went ashore to visit the camps,
but to my great disappointment I was not allowed
to do so on account of the tremendous surf.
When, after watching others, seeing their little
boats tossed like cockle shells upon the sands, and
hearing how thoroughly drenched with salt water
many of the people were while landing, I gave it up,
and remained on board.
For five days we lay anchored outside, while
stevedores loaded supplies from the “Bertha” on
barges towed ashore by the side-wheeler “Sadie.”
For hours the wind would blow and the breakers
and surf run so high that nothing could be done;
then at sundown, perhaps, the wind would die
away, and men were put to work unloading again.
The calls of those lifting and tugging, the rattle of
pulleys and chains, never were stilled night or day
if the water was passably smooth, and we learned
to sleep soundly amid all the confusion.[Pg 66]
Next morning the steamer “Cleveland” cast
anchor near the “Bertha.” Presently we saw a
small boat lowered over the side and two women
were handed down into it, four men following and
seating themselves at the oars. The ship on which
the women had first sailed had been wrecked on St.
George’s Island; from there they were rescued by
the revenue cutter “Bear,” transferred to the
“Cleveland,” and were now going ashore at Nome,
their destination. As they passed us we noticed
that they sat upright in the middle of the lifeboat,
the hoods of their cloaks drawn quite over their
heads. We were told that one of these women had
come to meet her lover and be married, and we felt
like cheering such heroism.
Next day the bodies of several men were picked
up on the beach near town. They had started for
Cape Prince of Wales in a small boat and been
overtaken by disaster. Many were dying of fever
on shore, and nurses, doctors and drugs were in
great demand.
Many tales of interest now reached our ears, but
not many can here be given.
One of the first American children to open his
eyes to the light of day in this bleak and barren
place—Nome City—was Little Willie S. His
parents lived in a poor board shack or house which
his father had built just back of the golden beach
sands. Here the surf, all foam-tipped, spread itself
at the rising and falling of the tides, and here the[Pg 67]
miners toiled day after day washing out the
precious gold.
It was here that Willie’s papa, soon after the baby
came, sickened and died. He had worked too long
in the wind and rain, and they laid him under the
tundra at the foot of the hill.
For a time the baby grew. The mother and child
were now dependent upon the community for support,
but the burly and generous miners did not
allow them to want. Willie was a great pet in the
mining camp; the men being delighted with a peep
of his tiny, round face and pink fingers.
The little child could have easily had his weight
in gold dust, or anything else, had he wanted it.
Big, shining nuggets had already been given him
to cut his teeth upon when the time came, but that
time never came.
Willie died one day in his mother’s arms, while
her hot tears fell like rain upon his face.
Then they laid him to sleep beside his papa under
the tundra, where the shining wheat-gold clung to
the moss roots and sparkled as brightly as the frost
and snow which soon covered everything.
When spring came Willie’s mamma found the
baby’s tiny grave, and put wild flowers and grasses
upon it, and there they nodded their pretty heads
above the spot where Willie and his papa quietly
sleep.
Passengers for San Francisco were now coming
on board with their luggage. Several men were[Pg 68]
brought on board on spring beds, being ill with no
contagious disease. A box containing the body of
a man, who had shot himself the day before, was
placed upon the hurricane deck, lashed down, and
covered with tarpaulins. Strong boxes of gold
bullion, with long, stout ropes and boards attached
in case of accident, were stowed away in as safe a
place as could be found. Copies of the first issue
of the “Nome News” were bought at fifty cents a
copy; size, four pages about a foot square. Beach
sand and pebbles, were handed about in many funny
receptacles,—pickle jars, tin cans, flour sacks,—any
old thing would do if only we had the pleasure
of seeing the golden sand.
One night about three o’clock the barge brought
the last passengers and freight. The water was
smooth, the moon shone brightly, there was no
wind, and the captain and his mate gave their
orders in quick, stern tones. They were in haste
to leave. They had lingered here too long already.
All were soon hustled on board; the “Sadie” and
her barges moved away; we took a last, long look
at Nome as she stretched herself on the golden
sands of the beach under her electric lights; the
“Bertha” whistled, stuck her nose into the rollers
and steamed away.
A more majestic old body of water than Behring
Sea would be hard to find; and we remember it
with thanksgiving, for we had no storms or rough[Pg 69]
weather during the eight hundred and fifty miles to
Unalaska.
Right glad was I that we were fortunate in having
a pleasant little party of eight or ten persons,
and our evenings were spent in visiting, spinning
yarns, and singing songs, while some hours each
day were passed on the hurricane deck. Here we
became familiar with the sea phrases commonly
used, and watched the old salts “bracing the mast
arms,” “hoisting the jibs,” or “tacking,” and
could tell when we had a “cross sea,” a “beam
sea,” or a “sou’ wester.” As we neared Unalaska
on the Aleutian Islands, the sea became rough,
and we had more wind, but we joyfully sighted
high hills or rocks to the east, and bade good-bye
to old Behring. For three and a half days he had
behaved well, and never will we quietly hear him
maligned.
Unalaska, sweet isle of the sea! How beautiful
she looked to our eyes which had only seen
water for days! Its bold and rocky cliffs, its towering
peaks snow capped; its sequestered and winding
valleys, and bright, sparkling waterfalls; its
hillsides in all the artistic shades of red, brown,
yellow, green, purple, black and white; its water in
all the tints of blue and azure, reflecting sky that
looked
All, all, greeted the eye of the worn voyager most
restfully.
Clusters of quaint red buildings were soon seen
nestling under the mountain—that was Dutch
Harbor, and a mile farther on we arrived at the
dock at Unalaska. We would be here twenty-four
hours taking on fresh water, coal, and food, they
told us, and we all ran out like sheep from a pen,
or school children at intermission. We drank
fresh water from the spring under the green hillside;
we bought apples and oranges at the store,
and furs of the furrier; we rowed in a skiff and
scampered over the hills to Dutch Harbor; we
watched jelly-fish and pink star-fish in the water;
we saw white reindeer apparently as tame as cows
browsing on the slopes; we visited an old Greek
church, and were kept from the very holiest place
where only men were allowed to go, retaliating
when we came to the cash box at the door—we
dropped nothing in; we climbed the highest mountain
near by, and staked imaginary gold claims
after drinking in the beauties of the views which encompassed
us; we snapped our kodaks repeatedly,
and then, having reached the limit of our time and
strength, wended our way back to the steamer now
ready to sail.
Leaving the harbor, we all stayed on deck as long
as possible trying to fix the grandeur of the scenery
in our minds so it could not slip away, and then
Priest Rock was passed, we had turned about eastward,[Pg 71]
and were in Unimak Pass. Here the wind
blew a gale from the west, on account of which we
were obliged to go below to our staterooms after
watching the sailors lash everything on the hurricane
deck well down in case of storm. After a few
hours we left the Pass, with its precipitous cliffs,
its barren and rocky slopes, its cones of extinct
volcanoes, its rough and deep water, and headed
due southeast for “Frisco.”
Many unpleasant people and things we found on
board as we proceeded, for not all of these had
been left at Nome; but with a philosopher’s fortitude
we studied to overlook everything disagreeable,
and partly succeeded. That our efforts were
not a complete success was due partly, at least, to
our early education and large stock of ideality,
and we were really not so much to blame.
The remainder of our journey was somewhat
monotonous, broken only by drunken brawls at
midnight on deck, waking us from sound slumbers;
or the sight of a whale spouting during the day.
Sometimes a breeze would spring up from the
wrong direction, rolling us for a few hours, causing
us to prefer a reclining posture instead of an
upright one, and giving our complexions a still
deeper lemonish cast; sometimes we were well inclined
to feed the fishes in the sea, and did not; but
at all times we were thankful that matters were no
worse.
Then, after many days out from Unalaska we[Pg 72]
began to look for land. Seagulls and goonies had
followed in the wake of our ship, and rested themselves
each day aloft in the rigging. Sails were
now and then seen in the distance, like the spreading
white wings of enormous swans gliding quietly
over the bosom of the deep, and we realized that we
were nearing land. In the darkness one night there
came to us a little white boat containing three men,—one
was a pilot to guide us safely through the
beautiful Golden Gate; the light on Point Bonita
was sighted—we were almost home.
We were now six weeks out from Dawson and
twenty-one days from Nome; we had no storms,
accidents or deaths on board, and carried five hundred
passengers, as well as three million dollars in
gold. I had been away from home four months
without a day’s illness, and during my trip through
Alaska had traveled seventy-five hundred miles,
nearly one-half of this distance alone.
CHAPTER VII.
GOING TO NOME.

NE beautiful day in the spring of 1900
I sailed again for Alaska—this time
for Nome from San Francisco. An
English family consisting of the
mother, one son and a daughter were
to accompany me, and we had spent
weeks in making our preparations. We
were taking supplies of clothing, food,
tents and bedding sufficient to last until
some of our numerous plans of work after our arrival
brought in returns. My hope was to meet my
father there, for he had written that he thought he
should go to the new gold fields, where he could do
beach mining.
I was not above doing any honest work, and felt
confident that I could make my way if I could gain
an entrance into that country. The English people
were all workers, and I had known them for ten
years or more.
Our steamer was the good ship “St. Paul,” belonging
to the Alaska Commercial Company, and
was advertised to sail on May twenty-fifth. When
I laughingly called the attention of one of the owners
of the ship to the fact that that date fell upon
Friday, and many persons objected to sailing upon[Pg 74]
that day, he postponed the starting of the “St.
Paul” to May twenty-sixth, and we left the dock
on Saturday afternoon amid the cheers and hand-waving
of thousands of people who had come to
see the big boat off for Nome.
The steamer was well fitted out, spick and span
in fresh carpets and paint, and crowded to the utmost
capacity for comfort. Every stateroom was
full; each seat at the tables occupied. Not a foot of
space above or below decks was left unused, but
provision was made for all, and the ship was well
manned.
I was now much gratified to learn that there were
many on board whom I had met before; that the
steward, stewardess and several of the waiters had
been on duty on the steamer “Bertha” during my
trip out from Alaska the fall before, while I was
upon speaking terms with a dozen or more of the
passengers with whom I had traveled from the
same place. Of passengers we had, all told, four
hundred and eighty-seven. Of these thirty-five were
women. There was only one child on board, and
that was the little black-eyed girl with her Eskimo
mother and white father from Golovin Bay whom
I had seen at St. Michael some months before, and
who was now going back to her northern home.
She wore a sailor suit of navy blue serge, trimmed
with white braid, and was as coy and cunning as
ever, not speaking often to strangers, but laughing
and running away to her mother when addressed.[Pg 75]
From the day we sailed from San Francisco until
we reached Nome I missed no meals in the dining
salon, a pace which my English friends and others
could not follow, for they were uncomfortably ill
in the region of their digestive apparatus for several
days. I slept for hours each day and thoroughly
enjoyed the trip.
During the nine days’ sail from San Francisco to
Unalaska, a distance of two thousand three hundred
and sixty-eight miles, I studied well the passengers.
We had preachers on board, as well as
doctors, lawyers, merchants and miners, and there
were women going to Nome to start eating houses,
hotels and mercantile shops. There were several
Swedish missionaries; one, a zealous young woman
from San Francisco, going to the Swedish Mission
at Golovin Bay.
This young person was pretty and pleasant, and
I was glad to make her acquaintance as well as that
of three other women speaking the same tongue
and occupying the next stateroom to mine. The
last named were going to start a restaurant in
Nome. As they were sociable, jolly, and good sailors
for the most part, I enjoyed their society. They
had all lived in San Francisco for years, and though
not related to each other, were firm friends of long
standing and were uniting their little fortunes in
the hope of making greater ones.
The young missionary was a friend to the other
three, and I found no better or more congenial[Pg 76]
companions on board the ship than these four honest,
hard-working women, so full of hope, courage
and good sense as well as Christianity. Little did
I then think that these people, placed by a seeming
chance in an adjoining stateroom, were to be my
fellow-workers and true friends, not only for the
coming months in that Arctic land to which we
were going, but, as the sequel will show, perhaps
for years to come.
Not many days had passed when we found that
we had on board what few steamers can boast of,
and that was an orchestra of professional musicians
among the waiters. These were men going, with
all the others, to seek their fortunes in the new gold
fields, working their passage as waiters on the ship
to Nome, where they intended to leave it. Three
evenings in the week these musicians, with the help
of several singers on board, gave concerts in the
dining salon, which, though impromptu, were very
enjoyable.
A sweet and trained singer was the English girl
of our company, and she sang many times, accompanied
by the stringed instruments of the musicians,
much to the delight of the assembled passengers.
When she sang, one evening, in her clear
sympathetic voice the selection, “Oh, Where Is My
Wandering Boy Tonight,” there was not a dry eye
in the room, and the mind of many a man went back
to his old home and praying mother in some far
distant state, making him resolve to write oftener[Pg 77]
to her that she might be comforted with a knowledge
of his whereabouts and welfare. These evenings
were sometimes varied by recitations from
an elocutionist on board; and a practised clog
dancer excited the risibles of the company to the
extent that they usually shouted with laughter at his
exhibition of flying heels.
Day after day passed. Those who were continually
seasick had diversion enough. It was useless
for us to tell them a pathetic tale of some one, who,
at some time, had been more ill than they, because
they would not believe a word of it, and it was
equally useless to recommend an antidote for mal
de mer such as theirs. “No one was ever so ill before,”
they said. They knew they should die and be
buried at sea, and hoped they would if that would
put an end to their sufferings. We tried at last to
give them comfort by recommending out of former
experiences ship’s biscuit, dry toast and pop-corn
as remedies, but only received black looks as our
reward. We then concluded that a diet of tea, coffee
and soup was exactly such a one as the fishes
would recommend could they speak, these favorite
and much used liquids keeping up a continual
“swishing” in one’s interior regions, and causing
one to truthfully speak of the same as “infernal”
instead of internal. But they were all tree physical
as well as free moral agents and decided these
things for themselves.
At last we entered the Japan current and the[Pg 78]
weather was warmer and more enjoyable. On Monday,
June fourth, we saw from the deck a few drifting
logs and a quantity of seaweed, and these, with
the presence of gulls and goonies flying overhead,
convinced us that we were nearing land.
We were not mistaken. After eating an excellent
six o’clock dinner we went above to find ourselves
between high, rocky cliffs, which loomed up into
mountains not far distant, and we knew we were
again at the Aleutian Islands and in the rough
waters of Unimak Pass. As we drew nearer and
entered the harbor so well land-locked, the sun
dipped low into yellow-red western waters, thereby
casting long shadows aslant our pathway so delicately
shaded in greens.
The little hamlet of Dutch Harbor nestled cosily
at the foot of the mountains which bordered the
bay, and here numbers of ships lay anchored at rest.
Passing along easily beyond another high mountain,
we were soon at the dock of Unalaska, beside
other great ships in port. Both groups of craft were
evidently waiting for the ice to clear from Behring
Sea before proceeding on their way northward, and
we counted sixteen ships of different kinds and
sizes, the majority of them large steamers. All were
loaded with passengers and freight for Nome.
Scout boats had already been sent out to investigate
and find, if possible, a passage through the ice
fields, and the return of these scouts with good
news was anxiously watched and waited for, as the[Pg 79]
most desired thing at that time was a speedy and
safe landing on the supposedly golden beach sands
of Nome.
At Unalaska we spent four days taking on fresh
water and coal, during which time passengers visited
back and forth from the waiting steamers,
many persons having friends on other boats and
each having a curiosity to see if they were faring
as well or ill as he, comparing notes as to the expense
of traveling with the different companies, etc.
Passengers on the “St. Paul” agreed that they
had “no kick comin’,” which was one of the commonest
slang phrases, intended to mean that they
had no fault to find with the Alaska Commercial
Company and their steamer “St. Paul.” All were
well cared for and satisfied, as well they might be,
with the service of the ship’s men.
Leaving Unalaska the sun shone clear and cold
upon the mountains where in places the sides
looked black from the late fires started in the deep
tundra by miscreants. The tops of the mountains
were covered with snow. Down deep gorges dashed
mountain waters of melting snow and ice, hurrying
to leap off gullied and rocky cliffs into the sea. Their
progress was never impeded. No tree nor shrub
obstructed the way with gnarled old trunks, twisted
roots, or low hanging branches, for none grow in
Unalaska, and the bold dignity and grandeur of
the mountains is never diminished by these lesser
objects.[Pg 80]
As our ship sailed out into Behring Sea we were
closely followed by the steamer “George W. Elder,”
whose master, an old friend of our captain, had decided
to follow in our wake, he being less familiar
than the latter with Alaskan waters, and having
confidence in the ability of his friend to successfully
pilot both ships to Cape Nome.
CHAPTER VIII.
FRESH DANGER.

T this plan all the passengers appeared
pleased. We were now entering upon
the most dangerous part of our voyage.
No one knew what was before us. If
our ship should receive serious damage
from the ice floes or bergs with which
we were almost sure to come in contact,
it would be well if we were accompanied
by a sister ship which could
render assistance. If she were in trouble
and we unharmed, we could lend a helping hand
to her; and so none murmured at the unique arrangement.
Nothing, however, was seen of the much dreaded
ice until about noon on Sunday, June tenth. The
air had been steadily growing colder so that woolen
clothing and fur wraps were in demand. Men thrust
their hands into their pockets, or drew on gloves
while they stamped their feet upon deck to keep
themselves warm in the open air. Soon to our
right lay a great semi-circular field of ice, in places
piled high, looking cold, jagged and dangerous. In
the distance those having field-glasses saw two
clumsy, slow-moving objects which they could
easily distinguish as polar bears on floating cakes
of ice.[Pg 82]
By the latter we were soon surrounded, and were
obliged, slowly and cautiously, to pick our way
through towards the narrowest spot, or where the
nearest open water could be seen beyond. Floating
ice now lay all around us, appearing only a few feet
above the water; below it the bergs extended many
times that distance. Sometimes they were small
and looked harmless enough; but many were large,
massive, and full of death-dealing power if urged
against the sides of a ship by the wind or struck
accidentally. Carefully we picked our way along,
watched as we were by every soul aboard the
“Elder” following, until we had successfully made
our way through the ice pack and glided out into
the blue waters beyond. Then came a great shout
from the throats of spectators on both ships, and
praises for the master and his crew who were doing
such good work were loudly sung.
Immediately our manoeuvres were repeated by
the “Elder,” and we watched her with interest equal
to their own; then as she passed the danger point
and swung safely through the ice bergs and out,
both ships, like fresh, uncaged birds, sped lightly
and swiftly over the water northward.
In a few hours we were awakened from afternoon
naps by the ringing of the ship’s bell and found
ourselves again surrounded by floating bergs. A
man in the bow was taking soundings with lead
and line, calling out every few seconds. “No bottom!
No bottom!” and then hauling in the lead[Pg 83]
again as the ship crept carefully along. From submerged
floes there was now the greatest danger,
but we gradually drew away from all floating ice
and sailed safely away as before.
Each Sunday on board the “St. Paul” had been
marked by some religious service conducted by one
of the preachers, while an improvised quartet of
voices led the singing. June tenth service had been
held in the forenoon, when a short sermon had followed
the singing of a few familiar old hymns by
the assembled passengers. Now in the early evening,
while I sat with a few friends in the dining
salon rehearsing hymns for the coming service,
suddenly the ship’s bell rang out upon the still night
air. Instantly there came a jar, a quiver, and all
rushed out upon deck to see what had happened.
We had been rudely jostled by an unseen ice floe
while the eyes of the pilot had been occupied by the
ones visible. Several times this happened. We
were in the midst of a sea of ice floes. There was
no visible egress ahead; we must back out, if possible,
as we had come.
Soon our steamer was stopped for the night, and
religious services were begun in the dining salon.
About one hundred persons were present. Our
quartet sang five or six selections, “Rock of Ages”
and “Throw Out the Life-line” among others.
The preacher offered prayer, read Scripture promises,
and spoke feelingly for twenty minutes. He
talked of our lives being only short spans, the[Pg 84]
length of which depends upon the will of God; and
it is the duty of each soul, he said, to be prepared
to meet its Maker.
It was a solemn moment for all. Outside the ice
drifted slowly about, thick fog settled over us, the
ship’s whistle sounded, and night came on. The
loneliness increased.
When the speaker had closed his remarks he
asked that the quartet sing “Nearer My God to
Thee,” and we sang it. Sweet and firm was the
voice of the English girl now, and when, with uplifted
arm and softly spoken benediction, the minister
dismissed us, it was to go upon deck feeling
stronger and much comforted.
There was yet no breath of wind stirring. For
this we thanked a kind Providence, for, had the
wind risen, our lives would have been in jeopardy
indeed. In that case the massive ice cakes would
have been blown swiftly and heavily about to crush
all ships like egg-shells and send them to the bottom
of the sea.
For breakfast we ate yellow corn-bread and
bacon with a relish such as it never gave at home,
and even those who had been seasick for days were
beginning to “get away” with their rations. At
eight in the morning the anchor with its rattling
chain was dropped and we lay in an open spot. An
hour later there was no perceptible motion of the
ship, the sea was smooth as a carpet, and our tired
captain had gone to bed. For forty-eight hours he[Pg 85]
had not slept, nor scarcely left the bridge, and the
rest was badly needed.
Two days we lay anchored in a dead calm, waiting
for the passing ice to open a way for us through
to Nome. Three ships lay near us, as well as two
larger ones out farther in the ice-fields; but the fog
hung grey and persistent over our heads and we
could do nothing but wait. Another concert was
given by the musicians, and as the steamer lay
gently rocking upon the waters of the great sea,
through the open front windows there floated out
to our sister ship the sweet and pleasing strains of
the violins and mandolins.
Were they telling in lively allegretto movements
of our safe landing on golden shores, and of our
successful achievements followed by a safe and
happy return to home and loved ones? Or were
the adagios mournfully predicting perils, coming
disaster and death? Who could tell? For myself,
I felt that whatever came to me would be in accordance
with the will and wish of a Higher Power, and
it would be all right in any case. My choice was,
of course, from the human standpoint, for life, happiness
and success in the pursuit of gold; but this
with me was not an obstinate nor rebellious sentiment.
Should all these good things be denied me,
I could say, it is well. I felt satisfied that the way
for my going to Alaska had been wonderfully
opened by an Unseen Influence which I had been
taught from earliest childhood to recognize, and[Pg 86]
this belief, which was a firm and abiding one, held
me calm and contented. Night after night I slept
in my berth as soundly as though at home in my
bed, and not even the sudden jolt and quiver of the
icebergs coming often into collision with the ship
caused me to waken.
The night of June twelfth, about eleven o’clock,
just after having retired, but being still awake, I
heard a sudden and piercing scream. The English
madam with me, being still dressed, rushed upon
deck to find out the cause of the disturbance. Rushing
towards her with pale and frightened face was
her daughter who had been lunching in the dining
salon. An iceberg of immense proportions and
greater height than usual had struck the ship with
a crash, coming up suddenly and most unexpectedly
from underneath the fog bank so that the watchful
pilot was taken unawares. The English girl said
the berg, when alongside the ship, reached the
height of the upper deck and appeared like a huge
mountain of ice from her place at the window. It
was consternation at the sight of what was apparently
sure and speedy destruction which had caused
the woman’s scream.
Investigation was immediately made of the ship’s
plates, which, though considerably dented by the
ice, were still, thanks to a kind Providence, intact;
and again I settled myself for the night and slept.
Next day men were restless. They wanted to be
on their way to Nome. It was not for this that they[Pg 87]
had paid a large price for their tickets and assurances
that they would arrive early at Nome; and
they agreed that there was no more danger in
steaming ahead than in lying anchored with the ice
bumping into us and liable to break through the
ship’s sides at any moment.
“Will you sign a petition to the captain asking
that he proceed on his way to Nome without further
delay?” asked a friend of me while the “St.
Paul” was anchored and the ice still drifting
around us.
“They are circulating such a petition, and have
a good many signers, or those who are willing to
sign it, and I wanted to know how you feel about
it,” said my friend.
“What is the matter with the captain? Did they
not announce their confidence in him by coming
aboard this steamer, and has he done anything to
cause them to lose faith in his ability to pilot them
safely through? Has he not brought them on their
voyage thus far without accident?” I asked.
“Oh, yes, certainly.”
“Then I, for one, shall abide by the captain’s
judgment, and remain anchored here so long as
he sees fit to order it. You can say to the others
that I will sign no petition,” said I.
Whether my decision and firmness in the matter
had any weight with others, I know not; but the
petition was dropped, and the captain probably
never knew that such a thing had been proposed.[Pg 88]
The morning of June thirteenth the sun shone
out clear and bright. Great fields of ice surrounded
us, and many other ships were also hemmed in at
different places. The “Elder” lay contentedly beside
us. It was not so cold when the fog had lifted,
and the clearer atmosphere made it possible to see
for many miles over the berg-strewn waters. Men
were walking restlessly about on deck trying to
keep their impatience down and their hands and feet
warm. They feared that other ships with hundreds
of passengers would land at Nome before they
could, and that would mean loss, perhaps in many
ways, to them. We were less than two hundred
miles from Nome and could easily make the run
in a day if allowed a free sea.
By this time the face of the steward began to
show anxiety and he watched the horizon with interest.
Serving, as he did, nearly fifteen hundred
meals daily, he feared a shortage of supplies if the
ship was delayed many days longer. Ten sacks of
flour, and fifteen hundred pounds of meat were used
daily, and other things in proportion. For breakfast
one day ninety dozen eggs were fed to the
people.
High overhead the stars and stripes were now
hoisted to announce our joy at being delivered from
so many dangers, and at leading the way for others
to follow. No one could pass us, and we would,
after all, be among the first, if not the very first, to
reach Nome.[Pg 89]
The captain looked jaded and worn, but happy
and relieved, being able now to get some of the
much-needed rest so long denied him when in the
ice fields. When congratulated by the passengers
upon his skill, for by this time they had entirely forgotten
their discontent of the previous days and
were willing to give him and his crew due praise,
he smiled and thanked them kindly, then went away
to rest.
Early next morning anchor was dropped at
Nome. At last we had reached our destination.
We had traveled thirty-one hundred and thirty-nine
miles in nineteen days and could have done it in
much shorter time had it not been for the ice. Several
small ships lay at anchor before us, but we were
immediately followed by many large steamers
bringing thousands of people to Nome. The
weather was splendid. Many of the passengers were
in such haste to reach shore than they left without
breakfast; but we waited until ten in the morning
before boarding the “lighter,” and I donned a dress
suitable to the occasion. This was cut short, and
was worn with high, stout boots, leggings, warm
coat, cap and veil, with extra wraps for the trip of
two miles to shore.
Certainly we now presented a very unique spectacle.
We were really a sort of Noah’s Ark collection,
with the roof of the Ark omitted. Women in
abbreviated skirts, long rubber boots, golf capes,
caps and sweaters; men covered in long “raglans,”[Pg 90]
fur coats, “jumpers,” or whatever happened to be
at hand; and all rushing pell-mell in the direction
of the lighter, by means of which they hoped to land
on the golden beach of Nome. Baggage there was
in stacks. There were boxes, grips, trunks, army
sacks; everything but babies, bird cages and band
wagons. Passage for an automobile had been engaged
in San Francisco, but at the last moment the
lady accompanying the big machine was suddenly
indisposed and obliged to allow the “St. Paul” to
sail without her.
The sea was now quite rough. The lighter was
brought close alongside. The rope ladder was
thrown over the side of the ship with its lower end
dangling upon the lighter’s deck, and we were told
we could now go ashore.
This was the moment for which we had longed,
and all were ready, like Cassibianca, minus the fire
and peanuts. The fat widow of the company tied
her bonnet more tightly under her chin, clutched
at her pudgy skirts, and grasping the deck rail,
placed her foot upon the rope ladder to descend.
“Don’t look down!” shouted some one to her,
fearing she might grow dizzy if she did so.
“Don’t hurry; take your time!” called out another.
“Keep cool and you’re all right!” instructed another,
at which time the widow, with fluttering veil,
pale face and eyes starting from their sockets with
fright reached the lowest round of the ladder and[Pg 91]
stepped to the deck of the lighter. Her bonnet was
awry, the belt of her dress had become unfastened,
while her skirts were twisted around her in some
unaccountable way and her teeth chattering; but
she only drew a long sigh as she sank in a limp
heap upon an army sack marked with big black letters,
and said gaspingly: “This is terrible!” Others
followed her example. Some protested they would
rather stay on the ship or go back to San Francisco
than scramble down that “beastly rope ladder”
swaying as it did back and forth with every motion
of the ship to which it was attached. For myself, I
had never posed as especially courageous, and wondered
how I should get on. But I said nothing.
From watching the others I had learned that to
“make haste slowly” was a good method to follow
in the present case, as a misstep without a firm
hand grip upon the sides of the ladder while descending
would be likely to send one without warning
into the yard wide gulf of boiling waters between
the ship’s side and the lighter, as the barge
was literally dancing attendance upon the vessel in
the rough sea.
Finally everything was ready. All passengers
had left the ship. The lighter was crowded to the
last inch of space; baggage and freight along the
sides, and passengers in the middle, sitting wherever
they could find a box or bag upon which to sit.
A tug boat made fast to the lighter—we said good-bye
to the “St. Paul” and moved away.[Pg 92]
“We are bidding good-bye to all comforts now!”
exclaimed an old Nomeite dubiously, “for we
won’t find any on shore; leastwise not unless it has
improved more in the last ten months than I think
it has. It was a tough place enough last summer,
and that’s no josh either!” looking around him at
the ladies of the party and evidently wondering
what they would think of the celebrated mining
town.
Many by this time looked sober, but it was not a
hard camp that they feared. They had expected to
find a typical camp with all the attendant evils usual
in such a place, and now they were almost there. In
fact they looked out over the heaps of baggage
towards shore at the long fine of white tents, buildings
of every description from a board shack to a
hotel or large store, and it seemed good in their
eyes—very good. For some unseen reason, as
the barge, following as it did at the end of the long
line from the tug, rode first upon the top of a big
breaker and then below in the trough, there was a
decided longing on the part of some to be on land.
It did not much matter where it was—Europe,
Asia, Africa or “any old place”; but as for this
“confounded, zig-zaggin’, heavin’ old hulk which is
tryin’ its best to take us to Honolulu sideways—I
want no more of it!” growled one man.
“Give me Nome or I die!” gasped another.
“No more big water in mine for two years, and
mebbe by that time they will have air ships to fly[Pg 93]
in,” muttered a little man as he lay on his back
among a pile of bags and gulped at something in
his throat he was trying to keep down.
So the barge bobbed up and down among the
breakers, riding to the crest of a wave with a gliding,
graceful motion, only to reach out beyond it,
and then, as the waters underneath receded, dropping
heavily with a thud and a splash, making one
feel that he was being dealt with most unceremoniously.
The same thing was again and again repeated,
until we rode as close to the shore as the tug could
take us, then the line was cut, a rope was thrown
us from shore, and with a steam windlass or other
contrivance, we were hauled upon the sands.
Then a gangplank was speedily pushed out over
the intervening watery space which the passengers
took their turns in crossing until all stood upon the
beach; a few, to be sure, with wet feet, damp clothing
and soggy tempers if some vicious, big breaker
in parting had dashed its white foam-tipped waters
over their heads, but all glad and thankful to arrive
in Nome at last.
CHAPTER IX.
NOME.

HE man who had predicted that we
would find no comforts in Nome
proved himself a true prophet. There
were none. Crowded, dirty, disorderly,
full of saloons and gambling houses,
with a few fourth-class restaurants and
one or two mediocre hotels, we found
the new mining camp a typical one in
every respect. Prices were sky high.
One even paid for a drink of water.
Having our newly found Alaska appetites with us,
we at once, upon landing, made our way to an eating
house, the best to be found.
Here a cup of poor tea, a plate of thin soup and
questionable meat stew with bread were served us
upon nicked china, soiled table linen and with blackened
steel knives and forks, for the enormous sum
of one dollar a head; which so dumbfounded us
that we paid it without a murmur, backed out the
door and blankly gazed into each other’s faces.
“Such prices will ruin us!” gasped the madam.
“That table linen! Ugh!” shuddered the young
man.
“Fifteen cents in California for such a meal!”
growled the English girl in her matter-of-fact way,
and with wide distended eyes; while I found such
amusement in watching the three faces before me[Pg 95]
that I barely found breath to remind them of the
two tons of nice things in their own packing cases
at the landing.
“If only they are soon landed,” groaned madam,
and we set off at our best gait to find the cases.
But we did not succeed. The freight was being
unloaded from the ship, we were told, as rapidly as
it was possible to handle it, but one lighter and
small tug boat in a very rough sea, unloading a
ship two miles off the beach, must have time; and
we waited. Only two or three lighters were to be
had at Nome. Other large steamers were being unloaded,
and hundreds of people were hourly being
landed upon the beach. There was no shelter for
them anywhere, every building was full, and confusion
was badly confounded. To make matters
worse it began to rain. If we could only find our
freight and get our tents, beds, supplies, etc., we
would be all right, but it would be impossible that
day we found, after making repeated excursions
through the freight house and numberless inquiries
at the office.
Something must be done, but what? I now remembered
some Dawson acquaintances in town
made the fall before while coming down the Yukon
River with my brother. To one family of these I
made my way. They were in the grocery and bakery
business on a prominent corner on First street
and their signboard caught my eye.
Blessings on the heads of kind Mr. and Mrs. M.[Pg 96]
of Nome City! They were delighted to see me.
They lived back of the store in one room, which
contained their bed, stove, cupboard, baby-organ,
table, chairs and trunks; but they also owned a one-room
shack next door, which was vacant for a
few days, being already rented to a dentist who
would make some repairs before taking possession.
I could bring my friends and baggage into this without
charge, if I wished, until we secured our freight,
Mrs. M. said kindly, and I pressed her hand in real
gratitude with many thanks.
“I am almost ashamed to show you the room,”
said the kind little woman, as she unlocked the door
of the shack and stepped inside, “but it is better
than no shelter in this rain, and you can have a fire
in the stove,” pointing to a small and rusty coal
heater in one corner. “I wish I had some blankets
or fur robes to lend you, but everything I have is
in use. You are welcome to bring in as many
friends as you like if they will share the poor place
with you; and you are quite safe here, too, for you
see the barracks are just opposite,” pointing across
the muddy little alley down which a few boards had
been laid for a sidewalk; “and the soldiers are here
to keep order, though they do sometimes find it
rather a hard job.”
Then I thanked the little woman again most
heartily, and, as I took from her hands the door-key
and stepped outside into the rain to bring my
waiting friends and baggage from the freight house,[Pg 97]
I offered a little prayer of thanks to our good
Father, and hurried away.
At the steamer’s landing all was hurly-burly and
noise. It was now late in the afternoon, still raining
at intervals, and muddy under foot, though the
weather was not cold. Finding my English friends
I told them of Mrs. M.’s kindness and offer of her
room, which they were well pleased to accept with
me, and we gathered up our luggage and started
for the place. Passing through the freight house
on our way to the street, madam said, pointing to
the figures of two woman huddled in a corner:
“See! Judge R. from the St. Paul has not
found a room yet, and Mrs. R. and her friend, the
nurse, are sitting there, waiting for the judge to
return! His wife is nearly sick, and they have no
idea where they can get a room. Judge R. has been
looking hours for one without success,” she said,
in a sympathetic tone.
“Let us speak to them,” said I, going over to
where the ladies sat.
Hearing their story, and seeing for myself that
both women were cold, hungry and disheartened,
I decided on the spot to share Mrs. M.’s hospitality
with them; made the proposal, which they very
thankfully accepted, and we trailed off up the street
laden with luggage.
Then madam’s son was found, informed of the
situation, asked to bring Judge R. and a few loaves
of bread from the shop, along with the remaining[Pg 98]
luggage, to our new camping place in the little
board shack near the barracks.
Seeing us arrive, and that the three elderly ladies
looked worn and travel-stained, Mrs. M. urged us
to come into her room and take tea and crackers
which she had already placed upon the table. This
invitation the older ladies gladly accepted, while the
English girl and myself looked after our new lodgings.
Here now was a state of things indeed! The entire
stock of luggage for seven grown persons was
soon deposited in the middle of the floor. The
room of which the shack consisted was about eight
by ten feet square, set directly upon the ground,
from which the water oozed at every step of the
foot. Two small windows, a front and back door,
with the small stove—that was all. These were
our accommodations for the night, and perhaps several
nights and days.
Then we two set to work with a will. We swept
the floor, we gathered sticks for a fire, we threw
boards down outside the door upon which to walk
instead of in the mud, a pail of water was brought
from a hydrant after paying twenty-five cents for it,
and a box was converted into a table. Luggage
was sorted, lunch baskets were ransacked, while tin
cups, coffee pot, knives, forks and spoons were
found, with a fresh white cloth upon which to spread
the food.
When Judge R. finally appeared, it was supper[Pg 99]
time. He carried a tin fry-pan under one arm, a bag
containing one dozen eggs, and a few slices of ham
on a paper plate, for which articles he had paid the
goodly sum of one dollar and seventy-five cents.
Waving the fry-pan above his old grey head, the
jolly judge shouted: “See, the conquering hero
comes! Oh, but I’m hungry! Say, how in the
world did you get this place? I hunted four mortal
hours and failed to find a shack, room, or tent for
the night. Four thousand people landed here today,
and still they come. Jerusalem crickets!
What a crowd! Everybody is in from Dan to Beersheba!
We will have fifteen thousand people here
soon if they don’t stop coming, and no shelter for
’em!” Then changing his tone and glancing
toward his wife:
“And how is my dear little wifey by this time?”
tenderly patting Mrs. R.’s white hand, which belonged
to a woman tipping the beam at two hundred.
“Aren’t you glad we came? I am.” Then rattling
on without giving his wife a chance to speak,
for her eyes had filled with tears:
“I think I’ve got a ‘case’ already. Claim number
four on D. Creek jumped last winter while
owner was away—jumper won’t leave—talked
with owner today—think I’ll get the job,” said the
hopeful old judge, sitting on an empty cracker box
and eating bread and cheese from his fingers.
“Eat your supper, dear,” to his wife, who was[Pg 100]
taking nothing, “and you shall have a bed tonight—the
best in Nome City. See! There it is now,”
pointing to a big roll of dark brown canvas done up
with a few varnished sticks.
“A folding cot—new patent—good and
strong. (It’ll need to be strong to hold you up,
won’t it, dearie?) Now, please take your tea like
a good girl, to brace up your courage. Or would
you like a drop of sherry?”
To all this Mrs. R. shook her head, but she did
not speak, neither did she attempt to eat, for there
was a big lump in her throat which prevented.
The rest of our party enjoyed the supper. Some
sat on boxes, others stood up, but we ate ham and
eggs, bread, butter and cheese, tea and crackers,
pickles, jellies and jams, as being the greatest
“comforts” we could find in the camp, and we
made them speedily disappear.
At last the supper things were cleared away, and
remaining food repacked in the baskets. The patent
cot was unrolled, set up and made ready for Mrs.
R., who was the only one favored with a bed. The
others finally faced the proposition and prepared,
as best they could, their chosen floor spaces for
their beds.
All slept in their clothing, for we had no bedding
and the night was cold. The two men were banished
to the outer air, where together they smoked
and talked of affairs of the day, while we women
unbuttoned our shoes, took out a few hairpins,[Pg 101]
cold-creamed our sunburned faces, and then, between
jokes, stories and giggling, we settled ourselves,
with much difficulty and hard snuggling,
among our bags, raincoats, steamer rugs and wraps
on the rough board floor for the night.
Coming in later, the judge spread his borrowed
fur robe upon the floor beside his wife’s cot, covered
himself with one-half of the same, chuckling as
he did so.
“I’m glad my bones are well cushioned with fat,
and that I’m old and tough and like this sort of
thing. I say, wife, isn’t it jolly?” And the portly
and sunny old judge dropped off to sleep to keep
me awake most of the night by his snoring.
If I slept little that night I did not waste my time.
My brain was busy forming plans of action. It was
not wise to have only one plan, for that one might
fail. Better to have several, and some one of these
would probably succeed. I felt a good deal of
anxiety to know whether my father or brother had
or would come to Nome. If either or both of them
came I would have no further difficulty because I
would work for and with them, but if they did not
come what was I to do?
I had little money. I would not go home. I
would work. I was a good cook, though I had
never done such work except for our own home
folks. I knew that cooking was the kind of service
most in demand in this country from women, for
my travels in Alaska the year before had taught[Pg 102]
me that. I could teach music, and I could paint
passably in water colors and oils; in fact, I had been
a teacher of all three, but in Alaska these luxuries
were not in demand. I could not expect to do anything
in these directions, for men and women had
come to Nome for gold, expected to get lots of it,
and that quickly. They had no time for Beethoven’s
sonatas or water color drawings.
It was now an urgent question of food, shelter
and work with all, and the man or woman who
could the quickest devise ways and means, the one
who saw the needs of the time and place and was
able to supply those needs, was the one who could
make the most money. Of course, being a woman,
I was unable to do beach mining as could a man,
and as many men expected to do. Those who
brought large outfits and plenty of money with
them were immediately obliged to hire help, but it
was generally a man’s help, like carpenter work,
hauling and handling supplies or machinery, making
gold washers and sluice boxes, or digging out
the gold in the creeks. None of these could I do.
On the steamer all these things had been well
talked over among ourselves, for others besides
myself were wondering which way they should turn
when they found themselves in Nome.
As to there being any disgrace connected with
work of any sort—it never entered my head. From
a child I had been taught that work was honorable,
and especially for a woman housework and cooking[Pg 103]
were respectable and healthy service. So I had no
pride whatever in the matter; it was only a question
of finding the work, and I did not doubt my ability
to find it somewhere.
On the voyage from San Francisco I had thought
well of the three Swedish women, and believed they
would succeed in their proposed plan of restaurant
work. I said to myself that if I were obliged to
seek work I should like to be with them if possible;
or, at least, with some of the “lucky Swedes,” as
the rich Anvil Creek mine owners were usually designated.
These miners all hired cooks for their
camps, as they kept large numbers of men at work
day and night on the Anvil Creek claims, the season
being so short for placer mining in this country.
Anvil Creek was only four miles away and the “Star
Restaurant,” as my friends had already named their
proposed eating-house, would be headquarters for
all the Scandinavians on Anvil and the entire district.
For this reason, and because the three had so
many acquaintances who would bring them patronage,
and because their pleasant faces and agreeable
manners always made friends for them, I felt sure
that they would be able to give me work if they
chose and I so desired. Then, too, there were the
several Dawson families of my acquaintance here,
and I would find them; possibly some of them
might give me work if I asked them.
However, the first move to be made was to find
our freight and baggage, and a spot upon which to[Pg 104]
pitch our tents, and the sooner that was done the
better, as the test and cleanest camping places were
fast being appropriated by the newcomers hourly
landing. It was not easy to find a clean, dry spot
for a tent, as I had found the day before that the
black, soggy soil was hardly free from frost a foot
down, and this made it everywhere marshy, as the
water could not keep down nor run off where it was
level. Some one on the steamer who had been in
Nome before had advised us to pitch our tents on
the “Sandspit” at the mouth of Snake River, as
that was the cleanest, driest and most healthful spot
near fresh water that we could find; and my mind
was made up that it was to the Sandspit I would
go. Many had been the warnings from friends before
leaving home about drinking impure water,
getting typhoid fever and other deadly diseases, and
without having any particular fear as to these
things I still earnestly desired a clean and healthful
camping place.
This, then, was the way I planned during most
of the first night after landing at Nome. If I slept
it was towards morning, when I had become accustomed
to the regular and stentorian snores of the
old judge; or when, for a few moments, after turning
in his sleep, his snorts and wheezes had not yet
reached their loudest pitch; and when my wishes
had shaped themselves so distinctly into plans for
work that I felt relieved and full of confidence, and
so slept a little.
Next day I looked for my father. At the landing,
on the streets, in the stores, at all times I was on
the lookout, though it was a difficult matter to find
any one in a crowd such as that in Nome. I saw
several acquaintances from Dawson the year before,
and people from different steamers that I knew,
but not my father. At nine o’clock next morning
three of us started out to find the Sandspit, with,
if possible, a good camping spot to which we could
take our freight as soon as it was landed, and part
of our number was detailed to stay at the landing
while we investigated. Down through the principal
thoroughfare we pushed our way, now on plank
sidewalk, now in the middle of the street if the walks
were too crowded; but going to the west end of
town till we came to Snake River Bridge, where
we crossed to the Sandspit. At the toll-gate we
easily passed, as all women were allowed to go over
free, men only being charged ten cents toll. Here
we quickly found a clean, dry place on the river
bank a hundred feet below the bridge and two hundred
feet from the ocean, which we chose for our
tents. Now arose the question, would any one
have any objection to our pitching our tents temporarily?
Seeing some men striking camp near by
we asked them. They told us that we could get
permission, they thought, from an old captain near
by on a stranded boat, now being used as an eating-house,
and to him we went. He was not in.
Going back to the Sandspit, it was decided that[Pg 106]
I should remain upon the spot, while my companions
went back to the landing. I was to remain
there till some of them came back. This I did,
sitting on a box in the sunshine with my kodak,
umbrella and lunch basket beside me for hours.
When madam returned, saying their search for their
freight was still unavailing, I left her in my place
and again called upon the captain.
Calling the third time at his boat, I found him
and secured his ready permission to temporarily
pitch our tents upon the sands, for he was an Alderman
with adjoining “town lots,” he told us.
By six o’clock that afternoon a part of madam’s
baggage and freight was found, hauled by dog-team
through town to the Sandspit and deposited upon
the ground. Then we bestirred ourselves to get a
tent up in which we could sleep, as I, for one, was
determined not to be kept awake by the judge’s
snores another night if I had to work till morning.
The others shared my feelings, and we worked like
beavers till midnight. By that time a small tent
had been put up, boxes of bedding unpacked, as
well as cooking utensils, oil-stoves and foods, so
that we could begin cooking.
At the continuous daylight we were much
pleased. Coming gradually into it, as we had done
on the steamer, we were prepared for it, but the
advantage of a continuous day to a busy, hustling
camp like this one, had not presented itself to us
until we ourselves attempted to work half the night;[Pg 107]
then we realized it fully. At nine in the evening a
beautiful twilight enveloped all, restful to nerves
and eyes, but still light enough to read by.
At ten o’clock it was lighter, and upon the placid
waters of Snake River, only fifteen feet away, lay
quiet shadows cast from the opposite side, clearly
and beautifully reflected. A few small steamers lay
further down stream near the river’s mouth, row
boats were tied along the edge of the water, and on
the Sandspit below us was a camp of Eskimos, their
tiny canoes and larger skin boats being hauled upon
shore beside them for safety. At midnight the sun
was almost shining, the air was salt, fresh and clear,
while the sky seemed to hang low and lovingly
above our heads.
After eating a midnight lunch of our own getting
of bread and butter with hot tea, we deposited ourselves,
still dressed, upon the tops of madam’s big
packing cases, from which had been taken pillows
and blankets, and slept soundly till morning, notwithstanding
the fact that the hammers of hundreds
of carpenters were busy around us all night.
Next morning all felt fresh and invigorated. The
sun shone brightly. In the roadstead two miles
away lay several newly arrived steamers, their deep-toned
whistles frequently sounding over the intervening
waters. It was a beautiful sight and welcome
sound. How easily the long and graceful
breakers rolled and broke upon the sands. With
what music the foam-tipped wavelets spread their[Pg 108]
edges, like the lace-trimmed ruffles on some lady’s
gown, upon the smooth and glistening beach. How
the white tents everywhere looked like doves of
peace just alighted, and the little boats danced up
and down on the river. I was glad to be there. I
enjoyed it. Nothing, not even the hard work, the
storms, nor the bitter Arctic winter which came
afterwards ever effaced from my memory the beautiful
pictures of river, sea and sky repeatedly displayed
during those first novel and busy days at
Nome.
CHAPTER X.
THE FOUR SISTERS.

T was during the first excitement of the
gold discoveries in the Klondyke that
four sisters left their home in Chicago
and started for Dawson. They were
young, hopeful, ambitious and handsome.
They owned a town lot in the
city, but they had not the means with
which to erect a building upon it, and
the money would never be forthcoming
if they remained where they were.
The ordinary salary of a working woman in office
or store was not sufficient to allow them more than
a trifle above necessary living expenses, and they
could see themselves old, wrinkled and grey before
they could hope to attain their desired object.
Reaching Dawson safely, as they did after weeks
of peril and many novel experiences, they set to
work at what seemed to them at the moment the
most lucrative labor of which they were capable.
They were fitted for laundry work only by being
well and strong physically, and by having a willingness
to do whatever they first found to do.
This proved to be work at the wash-tub. Here
the four women labored month after month with a
will, with the result that at the end of a year their[Pg 110]
bank account was not insignificant, they owned
several gold claims, and in all the mining camp
there were none who did not respect the four
sisters.
Then came their first dark days. It was midsummer.
Down among the grass roots and between
the rocks of the hillside back of the famous
camp, there trickled numerous fresh water springs,
pure and cold when they left their sequestered
sources among the seams and fissures, but gaining
nothing of purity when spread out upon the little
plain now thickly dotted with cabins.
Here in the hurry and rush of the fast growing
camp, when fortunes came quickly, and men lived
at a rapid pace, there was little time for sanitary
precautions, and so it presently happened that a
shadow, like a huge black bird of ill omen, suddenly
hovered above the camp, sending a shudder
through its entire length. A tiny germ, so small as
to pass unnoticed and unheeded by, and yet withal
so deadly as to be called a plague, crept along,
insinuating itself into the streamlets making their
way as best they could to their father, the Yukon;
and the fever laid low many victims.
Early and late had the sisters toiled, never in a
half-hearted way, but untiringly, day after day, until
one of their number, being perhaps less strong, or
more weary from work to which she had been unaccustomed,
and more susceptible to disease, was[Pg 111]
stricken with fever, and after only a few days’ illness,
whispered her loving good-byes.
This happened in the summer of 1899, and
rumors of the great gold strike at Nome now
reached Dawson. One sister had been persuaded
by a member of the Dawson Bar to make for him
a happy home during the remainder of his life, and
she was married.
Again their party numbered the original four,
though there were now only three sisters.
The excitement in Dawson regarding the new
Nome gold fields daily increased, and it was stated
by reliable steamer men from St. Michael that the
new strike rivaled that of the Klondyke.
The little party of four decided to go to Nome.
In a short time their business was arranged, sales
made, gold claims placed in charge of agents, and
everything made in readiness for their journey to
Nome.
It was the middle of September. The last boats
were leaving Dawson, both for points on the Upper
Yukon and for St. Michael. People leaving
Dawson by boat in the fall seldom linger beyond
the third or fourth week in September, for then the
river may freeze at any time and they be prisoners
in the camp indefinitely.
The lower river steamer “Hannah” was about
to push from the dock at Dawson when a friend introduced
me to the three sisters, and during the
following days on board an acquaintance sprung[Pg 112]
up which I much enjoyed. Little did we know that
this friendship would afterwards be renewed nearly
two thousand miles away, and under circumstances
vastly different from any with which we had before
become familiar.
Landing safely from the “Hannah” at St.
Michael, a few days were spent by the sisters waiting
for stormy weather to subside, and they then
sailed for Nome. Here they landed during the last
days of September, amid falling snow, bleak winds
and boiling surf, upon the sands of the most inhospitable
beach in all that dreary Northland. No tree
was to be seen. Not a rock under whose friendly
shelter one might hide from the storms. There
was almost no lumber in the camp with which to
build houses, and no incoming steamers expected.
A few rude shacks, tents and saloons, with two or
three companies’ buildings—of these was the town
composed. Many were rushing for the steamers in
waiting, determined only upon one thing—to get
home to the States. Some carried heavy sacks of
gold, others went empty-handed. There was the
summer’s accumulation of filth in the camp, too
young as yet for cleanly conditions, and these
brought their sure accompaniment—the fever.
Many suffered for weeks with it, and then died.
Again came the dread plague to the sisters.
Scarcely had they unpacked their trunks or found
shelter for the winter when the younger of the[Pg 113]
sisters was stricken down. For days she raved in
delirium, and all feared she would die. Night and
day they watched anxiously by her bedside. Everything
was done for her recovery and comfort that
could be done in a new and rough camp like the
one at Nome; for all who knew the beautiful little
sister loved her well.
Then came the time when all the long and heavy
yellow hair had to be cut from the lovely head in
obedience to the doctor’s orders. But the little
sister lived. Their prayers were answered, the
worst was over, the danger past.
Then followed long and weary weeks of convalescing,
while the winter storms raged outside
the little cabin, and the sun retreated farther from
the Arctic Circle and Nome, but the sisters thanked
God, and again took courage.
Months after came the welcome springtime.
With the earliest fine weather and revival of business
in the camp the sisters erected a store building
and warehouse on the beach near by. Into the
latter they moved temporarily, hoping to rent the
store to some of the numerous “tenderfeet” sure
to arrive on the first passenger steamers.
It was here I found the sisters on my arrival at
Nome from San Francisco in June, 1900. Little
sister was well and strong again, growing a fresh
crop of roses and lilies on her cheeks, and a new
head covering of lovely, wavy yellow hair. On her
lips she wore the same sweet, old smiles, however,[Pg 114]
and I knew her well by these. Since her recovery
from the fever the hands of the sisters had not been
idle, and they had become expert at sewing furs.
This had kept them busy as bees all winter, and
many were the caps, coats, mittens and capes made
by their industrious fingers, which brought them
a good income, while their rooms were always the
rendezvous of friends than which a jollier lot could
not be discovered.
Of the good influence going out through the
rough mining camp during the long and dreary
winter from the home of these sweet and Christian
women, no account has probably ever been kept,
except by the recording angel, who never forgets.
The day after we landed at Nome I secured work.
Not, however, to begin immediately, which pleased
me well, as I should then have a little time to look
for father, inspect the camp, study conditions and
take notes and kodak views.
“Can you cook for a gang of men?” asked Mr.
A. kindly smiling down at me when I had stopped
him on the street and asked for work in his camp
for the English girl and myself, as we wished to be
together.
“Indeed, I can. I will do my very best, Mr. A.,
and I feel sure we can please you. My friend is an
extra good cook, as you will discover if you give
us work. Will you try us?”
“I will,” he replied.
“At what wages, please?”[Pg 115]
“Five dollars per day, each, with board,”
promptly answered the gentleman whose two gold
claims on famous Anvil Creek made him one of
the richest men in Alaska.
So it was settled. Claim number nine, Anvil,
was about seven miles from Nome, and one of the
most noted claims in the district. Mr. A., a former
Swedish missionary at Golovin Bay, had, with his
doctor brother, voyaged to Nome on the “St.
Paul” when we did, so we already had a slight
acquaintance with both gentlemen and were pleased
to get the work.
Anvil Creek claims had been worked the summer
before. Gold had first been discovered in the
fall of 1898 by Mr. Hultberg, a Swedish missionary,
who learned of the precious metal around
Nome from the Eskimos. His mission was stationed
at Golovin Bay, and he notified the Swedes,
Brynteson, Hagalin, Lindbloom and Linderberg,
who in turn saw G. W. Price and induced him to
go with them, as he was the only one there experienced
in mining. Price was on his way to Kodiak
over the ice by dog-team en route to California, as
the representative of C. D. Lane, the San Francisco
mining man and millionaire.
The most of Anvil Creek was staked by this
party before they returned to the mines at Council
City, fifty miles up Fish River from Golovin Bay.
“On July second, 1899, a second cleanup was
made on number one above Discovery Claim, Anvil[Pg 116]
Creek, the property of J. Linderberg. The result
of four men shovelling out of the creek bed from a
cut five feet to bedrock for twenty hours amounted
to fourteen thousand dollars in gold dust. The
men shovelled all the gravel from the moss down
to bedrock into the sluice box as it was all pay
gravel. The owner refused five hundred thousand
dollars for the property without considering the
offer.”
Tierney is authority for the statement that this
claim produced four hundred thousand dollars that
season.
From this time the discoverers were known by
the sobriquet of the “Lucky Swedes,” for Anvil
Creek was all good, there being no really “poor
dirt” in it, and number nine, above Discovery
Claim, proved itself, the first summer, also a banner
winner.
It was here that we expected to work, as soon
as supplies could be hauled to the claim, the
monotony of bread making and dish washing to
be varied by the new and strange sights on an
enormously rich gold claim not far from the Arctic
Circle.
Everywhere around us were carpenter’s hammers
in operation, and tents were rapidly going up.
We found great difficulty in reserving ground
space enough for another tent, as others found the
Sandspit as desirable for tenting as we did, and
elbowed us closely. Along the river’s edge and[Pg 117]
the beach near by many were digging and panning
in the sands searching for “colors.” Dog-teams
were hauling freight and baggage, with their swearing
and perspiring drivers at their heels, and while
the big black-snake whips flourished in air above
the dogs or upon their straining backs, the tongues
of the faithful brutes hung from their mouths, and
their wide open eyes looked appealingly at bystanders.
My heart ached for the animals, but there
were no humane societies in Alaska.
About five o’clock on Sunday afternoon it began
to snow. This was the first June snowstorm I
had ever seen. Our little tent leaked badly, as it
had been hastily pitched, and the snow melted as it
fell. Small rivers of water were soon dropping
upon our heads. Rain coats, oil cloth, and opened
umbrellas were utilized to protect the clothing and
the bedding.
An hour of this experience would have been
enough for one time, but troubles seldom come
singly, and so the wind began to blow. Donning
her rain coat and rubbers the English girl did her
best to tighten ropes and make the tent taut, for
madam’s son had not returned from town. Presently,
to our great joy, we saw him coming with
a loaded dog-team of freight, and best of all, with
a man friend to assist him, whose strong arms and
broad shoulders were well fitted to tent pitching.
Hastily the cart was unloaded and the large canvas
tent unrolled and laid upon the sand. Stakes were[Pg 118]
driven, poles adjusted, ropes stretched with much
straining, as the wind whistled more vigorously,
and snow still fell; and the two men, both wet and
cold, huddled into the little tent for a cup of hot tea
which was waiting.
Then strong hands opened more boxes and a
large oil stove, carpets, rugs and many other necessary
things were hustled into the new tent, as well
as trunks, bedding, and the contents of the small
tent, with the exception of canned goods and such
things as water would not injure. The sands were
clean but wet, and if we were thankful for a stout
canvas cover over our heads we would have also
been glad of a dry place under foot. However,
carpets and rugs were spread down, stoves lighted,
and the tent door flap fastened as securely as
possible.
As well as we could we arranged all for the
night, but we expected to sleep little, for the storm
was now fearful. Rain, snow and hail, each came
down by turns, accompanied by a high wind which
drove the surf in roaring rage upon the beach. How
thankful we were that we had chosen this spot instead
of one directly in reach of the great rollers
with their mist and spray; though we had the roar
and boom of the surf in our ears continually. Sometimes
it seemed that the wind had lulled, and then
with increased violence it again screamed above
our heads, threatening us each moment with disaster.[Pg 119]
At midnight a supper of hot macaroni, cocoa,
bread, butter and cheese, with canned meat and
jam, was heartily eaten by all, including the visiting
friend from Sitka who had assisted. A low box
was used for a table and we all sat upon the mats,
eating from tin cups and plates with the keenest
appetites.
The weather was now awful. The storm had increased
until it seemed each moment that the tent
would be torn from its fastenings, and we be left
without any protection whatever. The ropes and
stakes had frequently to be looked after and made
stronger. The snow had turned to rain, which beat
heavily upon the stout canvas resisting well the
water without leaking.
By one o’clock the wind showed signs of abating,
and we were so much in need of sleep, that, all
dressed as we were, we rolled ourselves in our blankets
and dozed on the rugs close to the oil stoves.
For an hour I lay uneasily dreaming, or listening
to the royal cannonading of the heavy surf upon
the beach. From my diary I quote the following
extract:
“Monday, four in the morning, June eighteenth,
1900.—It is four in the morning and we are sitting
around the oil stoves in the middle of the tent.
We have just had hot cocoa and crackers. The
surf still booms, but it does not rain, and the wind
has died down. We are better off than many people.
Tomorrow we will put up the other tent and[Pg 120]
get more settled. We are thankful not to be on
the sea beach, where so many are camped. A.
wishes herself home again. People around our
tent all night were talking, moving, afraid of the
storm, but the big ships are still here and they
would put out to sea if it were necessary for their
safety. They say we have smallpox in town from
the steamer ‘Ohio,’ and yesterday Mrs. H., who
came up on the ‘St. Paul,’ was reported to be
dying from pneumonia. The nurse, Mrs. Judge
R.’s friend, is caring for her. Judge R. and wife
are still in Mrs. M.’s shack near the barracks. It has
been daylight all night. I hope to hear from father
soon, and get my freight. My friends here have all
theirs. The two men are smoking and talking
while I write, and the Eskimo dogs not far away
are howling in their usual interesting nightly manner.
I will now try to get a little more sleep.”
We had heard much of beach mining at Nome,
but saw little of it. Stories were told of men who,
in the summer of 1899, had taken hundreds of dollars
in gold dust from the beach sands by the
crudest methods, and thousands of men were now
flocking into the camp for the purpose of doing
beach mining. They were sadly disappointed. Not,
however, because there was no gold in the beach
sands, but because it was so infinitesimally tiny that
they had no means of securing it. No hand rocker,
copper plate, nor amalgam had been used with
success, neither did any of the myriads of prospective[Pg 121]
miners bring anything with them which promised
better results. Great heaps of machinery
called by hopeful promoters “gold dredgers” were
being daily dumped upon the beach from the ships,
signboards were covered with pictures of things
similar, while the papers continually bloomed with
advertisements of machines, which, if speedily secured
by the miners, would, according to the imaginative
advertiser, soon cause all to literally roll in
riches.
One flaming dodger ran in large letters thus:
“Calling millions from the vasty deep. A fortune
in one hundred days. Our dredger will work three
thousand yards of sand in heavy surf at Cape
Nome. It will take out twenty-four thousand dollars
in a day. You can make more money with us
than by taking flyers in wild-cat oil schemes, etc.”
The poster was illustrated by a huge machine
gotten up on the centipede plan; at least, it resembled
that hated insect from having attached to its
frame two sets of wheels of different sizes along
the sides like the legs of a centipede, but with a
steam boiler for a head, and a big pipe for a throat
from which the salt water was disgorged to wash
out this immense amount of sand and give the gold
to the miner. It did not save the gold.
Thousands of dollars of good, hard-earned
money were dumped upon the beach in the shape
of heavy machines of different kinds, which were
worse than useless, and only brought bitter disappointment[Pg 122]
to their owners. Men had stripped the
beach the summer before of all coarse gold which
had, perhaps, been ages in washing up from the
ocean’s bed, or down the creeks from the hills, and
only the fine, or “flour gold,” as it was called, remained.
By the newcomers men were cursed for spreading
abroad tales of beach mining of the year before,
but this was unjust, for conditions were not the
same. The waters bringing the gold to the beach
could not, in one season, replenish and leave the
sands as rich as they had been after long years,
perhaps ages of action, and blame could not rightly
be attached to any one. Almost without exception,
the men who did the cursing were the men who had
never been hard workers, and did not intend to be,
and so, after becoming satisfied that the nuggets
were not there to be simply picked up and pocketed,
they turned, looked backward, and went
home. It was well for the new camp that they did.
There was also much trouble over real estate.
Land was very high in price. Some Swedes, who,
the year before, had paid seven hundred dollars
for a town lot three hundred by fifty feet in size,
now sold one-half of it for ten thousand dollars.
It is small wonder, then, where “possession is nine
points of the law” that men who rightfully claimed
ground were ready to fight to keep it, and those
who were wrongfully in possession many times
stood guard with firearms.[Pg 123]
In pitching our tents upon the sandy beach,
especially after gaining permission of the old captain
who told us we would be in the street if ever
a street should be opened through on the Sandspit,
but that was not likely, and he had given us his full
and free consent to our camping temporarily there
next his lots, we expected to have no trouble. Here
we miscalculated. Though the captain was kind
and reasonable, he had a partner who was just the
reverse, and this person gave us infinite trouble.
Scarcely had our first load of baggage been put
upon the ground when he began to tramp fussily
about at all times of day and night. After our
stakes were driven he would come quietly in the
night and pull them up, so we would find our canvas
flapping in the morning breeze when we waked.
Or, after we had retired for the night, he would
come with some other, stand within hearing distance,
and threaten us if we did not move away.
One morning, upon rising, we found that he had
moved a long carpenter’s bench directly upon the
spot next madam’s tent, which I was trying to reserve
for my own tent as soon as I succeeded in
getting my things from the steamer. This disappointed
me much, but I said nothing; and when
my tent finally came I pitched it on the other side,
with my door directly opposite hers and only six
feet from her entrance.
As to appearance this old man was a jolly sight.
He wore long and tangled hair which had once[Pg 124]
been curly, but now hung in unkempt and dirty
shreds upon his shoulders, while his hat was an
antiquated relic of a former life in the States. A
pair of old trousers generally hung by one suspender
over a colored shirt, which, the summer before,
possibly, had had a wash-tub experience, but not
later; his footwear was altogether unmentionable.
He was called well-to-do, and there was no necessity
for him to cut such an abominable figure, so he
soon became a by-word, and was designated as
“sour dough.” At all events, he was sour enough,
and kept up a continual siege of torment until he
received a temporary quietus.
We three women were sitting in the tent one
morning when there came a voice at the door. Going
forward to enquire what was wanted, a man
said gruffly, thrusting a piece of paper into my
hand.
“A notice from the chief of police.”
“For what?” I inquired.
“For you, to vacate these premises without
delay.”
“Indeed! Are they to open a street? Will the
other campers about here move also?” I asked.
“I don’t know. My orders are that you shall
move immediately. See that you do it,” said the
man rudely.
While holding the paper in my hands I glanced
over it hastily, and saw the marks of a spurious
document. It was poorly constructed, and bore[Pg 125]
no official signs. I recognized it as a counterfeit.
“We have had permission from captain S., one
of the aldermen, to put our tents here, and we shall
stay unless he orders us away,” said I stoutly.
“You have permission from captain S.?” he
asked in surprise.
“Yes, sir, from captain S. himself, and you can
say to the chief of police that we shall stay here
until the captain orders us to leave,” saying which
I stepped back into the tent.
The man retreated, muttering to himself as he
went, for he was utterly routed, and never returned;
neither did we hear any more for some time about
moving our tents. It was as I suspected. Mr.
Sourdough had thought to frighten us away, and
the order from the chief of police was utterly
bogus.
Some time afterward, when madam attempted to
put a floor into her tent, “Sourdough” again put
in an appearance. He threatened, but she held
out, when the obstinate and perverse old man
trotted off down town and secured an officer and
four soldiers to come and put her off. The officer
looked the ground over, inquired if there was room
for teams to pass if necessary, and seeing her tent
in line with many others, he turned to the old man
and said:
“This tent takes up no more of the street than
the others. This lady has as much right to be here
as any one else. What is the matter with you?[Pg 126]
Let the women alone,” and he and his soldiers
marched away.
Mr. Sourdough tore his hair. He was wild with
anger. The floor of madam’s tent went down and
stayed.
Each day I was in the habit of giving my Swedish
friends a call, and found them finally ready to
set up their restaurant tent. A large floor was laid
on Second street near the post-office, the large
canvas stretched over the frame, tables and seats
provided, a corner partitioned off for a kitchen,
dishes placed upon shelves, and they began serving
meals. At this juncture I happened in one day just
before noon and found them rushed with work
and unable to fill their meal orders for lack of help.
Mary was peeling potatoes in haste, while trying to
do other things at the same time, and Ricka and
Alma were flying like bees.
“Let me peel those potatoes for you,” said I,
taking the knife from Mary’s hand; and when she
demurred, I told her I really had nothing to do,
and would be glad to assist.
When the potatoes were peeled, dishes were
heaped up to be cleaned, and I quickly washed
them, feeling that I was of some service, and not
heeding the surprised looks of a few acquaintances
who chanced to catch a glimpse of me at work in
the kitchen through the door.
This I did each day, coming over after I had
eaten my breakfast, and rolling up my sleeves to[Pg 127]
my elbows, drove them deep into the dish pan and
hot water.
Many were the jolly times we now had. How
the jokes flew past each other over the puddings,
and the crisp pies needed almost no other seasoning.
How cheerfully “the boys” brought wood
and water and counted it reward enough if they
only received a smile from little Alma. Many a
man was glad enough, too, to render such service
for a meal or lunch of hot coffee and doughnuts,
especially such good, big, motherly ones as Mary
made, and there was no lack of men helpers. How
the coffee steamed, the hot bread and meats
smoked, and the soup odors tantalized the olfactories
of hundreds of “tenderfeet” with their lusty
Alaska appetites, which were increased by an open
air life such as all in those days were living.
When at last we were summoned to our work,
on Number Nine, the Swedish women pressed
my hand cordially, leaving a good-sized bill in it
at the same time, saying: “When you get through
on Number Nine come back to us; we need you.”
I thanked them gratefully and said good-bye.
The English girl and myself were soon settled in
our little tent with its clean new floor on the hillside
of claim Number Nine. No tree was to be seen
on the long, rolling hills, and only an occasional
boulder on some summit like Anvil Peak, perched
as a sentinel above us. A few wild flowers bloomed
on the tundra, and the waters of the little stream[Pg 128]
gurgled over the soft slate pebbles that strewed its
course; but the season so far was a dry one, and
more water was needed before much could be done
at sluicing. Miners were not happy at the prospect
of a dry season, which meant a stoppage of all mining
operations, and eagerly scanned the heavens
for rain indications. A small force of men were at
work night and day. On Thursday, July twelfth,
eleven hundred dollars in gold dust was taken from
the sluice boxes in the creek, and two days afterwards
twelve thousand dollars, with which the
owner of the claim was much dissatisfied, calling
them small clean-ups.
A few hundred feet up stream, on Number Ten,
the machinery of C. D. Lane whirred constantly.
On the upper end of Number Nine a small new machine
called a separator was put in by some men
from New York who had taken a lay on the claim;
but this scheme was not successful.
Seeing men at work prospecting along the
“benches,” as the banks of a stream or hillsides are
called by miners, and having a woman’s proverbial
curiosity, after my work was done I climbed the
hill to investigate. The prospectors had left after
digging a hole about six feet deep and four square,
evidently having satisfied themselves as to what
the ground contained. Into this hole I descended
to feel of the cold, wet earth and inspect the walls.
The miners had reached the frost line and gone,
taking with them samples of pretty white quartz[Pg 129]
rock, as much of the debris at the bottom of the
hole plainly showed, but whether it contained gold
I knew not. As yet I was a tenderfoot; but something
satisfactory was without doubt found here
and in the vicinity, as quartz claims were staked
over the placer claims the whole length of Anvil
Creek that summer.
While rambling about in search of flowers during
our afternoon rests, we found many interesting
spots. To the northwest, over the high, bare
ridge, lay Snow Gulch, from which fabulous sums
had the summer before been taken, the blue and
winding waters of famous Glacier Creek lying just
beyond. Walking through the dry, deep tundra
over the hills was warm, hard work, though we
wore short skirts and high, stout boots, and womanlike,
we were always filled to the brim with
questions and ready to rest if we chanced to meet
any one, which was not often.
Wherever we went, and whatever the hour, we
met with no incivility. Hats were lifted, and men
rested a moment upon their shovels to look after
us as we passed, while frequently some rough
miner swallowed the lump in his throat or wiped a
tear, as he thought of his wife, daughter or sweetheart
far away. We were the only women in the
mines for miles around, but felt no fear whatever,
and indeed we were as safe there as at home, and
there was no occasion for anxiety.
Life was extremely interesting. Our work was[Pg 130]
not hard the first few weeks; after that the force of
men was increased. Rich pans of dirt (two shovels
full to a pan) were daily being brought to light.
One pan contained seventy-two dollars and seventy-five
cents, one eighty-three dollars and thirty-five
cents. Big, fat nuggets already melted into
wondrous shapes, but iron rusted, as all Anvil
Creek gold is, for some reason, was discovered
each day. One nugget tipped the scales at thirty-nine
dollars, one at twenty dollars, and one at fifty
dollars, with many others of like value.
Wednesday, August eighth, the following entry
was made in my diary: “Today has been the banner
day for gold dust. The night’s cleanup of
twelve hours’ work was a big one—three pans full
of gold. Later—Still more yet. A cleanup of nine
thousand dollars and three of the largest nuggets
I ever saw has just been made this evening. Two
of the nuggets were long and flat, as large as a
tree-toad, and much the shape of one. The men
took the first load of gold dust to town—seventy-five
pounds—but the bank was closed before they
could get the remainder there. The foreman says
they are prepared to keep it here safely over night,
however, and I believe they are, judging by the big
protuberances on their hip pockets.”
CHAPTER XI.
LIFE IN A MINING CAMP.

S the rains came to facilitate the sluicing,
more men were added to the force
shovelling in the creeks, and this made
our work heavier. An exceedingly
cranky foreigner, as head cook, presided
over the big coal range in the
mess-house, and we women “played
second fiddle,” so to speak. However,
we all had enough hard work, as a
midnight supper for the second force
had to be prepared and regularly served, and at this
we labored alternately.
Strange to relate, the men at the long tables
soon began to exhibit a very great partiality for the
dishes prepared by the English girl and myself, to
the end that the foreign fellow’s black eyes snapped
with anger, and he swore deeply under his breath.
“He vill eat vat I gif heem. He moose eat it
ven he hoongry, else he starve himsel’. I care not
he no like it, he get nothing other!” the angry man
would exclaim, as the untouched plates of the men
were scraped into the waste box. He would then,
fearing that we would cook some dish more palatable
to the miners, hide the best food, or forbid us
to use certain ingredients as we wished.[Pg 132]
Of the culinary stores provided there never could
be a complaint. Everything that money could buy
in the way of fresh meat, potatoes, onions, canned
and dried fruits and vegetables, flour, corn and oatmeals,
were stacked up in the greatest profusion.
From canned oysters, clams and French sardines,
to fine cocoa and cream, all was here found in
quantities, after being hauled in a wagon behind
powerful horses over the seven miles of heavy
roads from Nome. By the time the goods reached
camp they were almost worth their weight in gold,
but one might have supposed them dirt cheap, for
we, as hungry miners and cooks, were never limited.
Week after week the patient animals and their
driver were kept measuring the distance between
the city and the claim, even though the wet tundra
in low places grew sodden and boggy, and the
wheels repeatedly sank to the hubs. At times more
horses were attached to haul them out of some
hole, or if these were not at hand, certain heavy
cases were dumped off until the reeking, straining
brutes had successfully extricated the load. Covered
with mud and sweat, his high-topped rubber
boots each weighing a number of pounds, and his
stomach too empty to allow of conversation, after
a long, hard day’s work, the driver of this team
would fling himself upon one of the benches alongside
our table and say:[Pg 133]
“Yes, I’m ready to eat anything. Been caved in
for two hours.”
This young man, as well as the night foreman,
was a cousin of Mr. A., both farmer boys, honest,
kind and true. No oaths fell from their lips, and
no language was used which their own mothers
would ever blush to hear.
The second of these, the foreman, was dressed
also in great rubber boots, dark blue sweater, and
broad-brimmed felt hat, with a quick eye and ear
for all around him, though he was a man of few
words, which he weighed well before using. His
hip pocket always contained a loaded revolver, and
he was obliged to sleep days after being on duty
nights.
To eyes so unaccustomed as ours to the sight,
how strange it all looked at midnight. From the
big tent door which faced south and towards Nome
City we could see the blue waters of Behring Sea
away in the distance. Great ships lying there at
anchor, lately arrived from the outside world or
just about to leave, laden with treasure, at this long
range looked like mere dots on the horizon. Between
them and us there straggled over the beach
in a westerly direction, a confused group of objects
we well knew to be the famous and fast growing
camp on the yellow sands. To our right, as well
as our left, rolled the softly undulating hills, glowing
in tender tints of purples and greys, or, if the
moon hung low above our heads, there were[Pg 134]
warmer and lighter shades which were doubly entrancing.
Accompanying the low moon twinkled the silver
stars with their olden time coyness of expression.
Little birds, not knowing when to sleep in the endless
daylight, hopped among the dewy wild flowers
of the tundra, calling to their mates or nestlings,
twittering a song appropriate to the time and place
because entirely unfamiliar.
No other sound was to be heard except the picks
of the miners at work in the stream. No word was
spoken unless the foreman gave some order. Those
sleeping in nearby tents must not be wakened, and
besides the men at the shovels and picks did no
loitering. There were the long sluice boxes to be
filled with what was once the creek bed, from which
the water was now turned in another direction to
await the morning’s cleanup of gold.
At that time the water would be conducted into
the long boxes to wash away the dirt and gravel,
leaving the heavier gold in the bottom. Either Mr.
A. or his brother, with the foreman, attended to
cleaning up the gold. When all the dirt and gravel,
or rock, had been washed out of the sluices, a
whisk broom was used to brush the gold into a
corner of the box, a dustpan conveyed it to broad-mouthed
gold pans close at hand, and these were
carried into the kitchen.
Here the pans were placed upon the iron range,
big mush spoons were utilized for stirring, and the[Pg 135]
precious metal was well dried before being
weighed. As soon as possible afterward it was
taken to the Bank of Nome. A tall, black horse
was purchased for this purpose alone, and after a
few such trips the intelligent creature most reluctantly
approached the office where the gold was
kept, having learned of the grievous burden he
would have to bear. Sometimes he would snort,
throw himself and pull back, and in every way show
his unwillingness to proceed.
But no shirk was allowed here. The horse was
led close to the steps of the office tent, and a
gunny sack tied in the middle brought out by two
men and laid over the back of the unwilling beast.
A rain coat or blanket was flung over the sack, and
the man at the halter started for town, leading the
horse, which walked slowly and resignedly after being
compelled to go.
A second man, well armed with revolvers like the
first, always accompanied the pair, and when the
three had returned to the claim another cleanup
awaited them. Enormous sums of money were
taken from this claim while we were there, averaging
ten thousand to twenty thousand dollars per
day. Seventy men worked for a time when the
water was at its best, part of that number on the
day force and part at night.
In August the west bank of the creek was accidentally
pricked and found to be far richer than
the bed of the stream. Nuggets worth many dollars[Pg 136]
were continually unearthed, the largest one
that summer amounting to ninety dollars. The
richest pans contained sixty-four dollars, seventy-two
dollars and seventy-five cents and eighty-four
dollars, with others ranging all the way below.
From a bench claim next to Number Eleven on
this creek, and only one-fourth of a mile above
us, great heaps of gold were taken from the ground,
no pan carrying less, it was said, than five hundred
dollars.
From seventy men to wait upon when the stream
was at high water mark, to twenty-five when it was
lower, at any time our lot was hard. We worked
with chapped, bleeding hands and aching backs.
We worked until our tired limbs sometimes refused
to carry us further. By the middle of August the
nights began to grow dark at nine o’clock, and a
hold-up or two took place on the creek. The
weather was rainy and cold, with frosty nights between,
and as we were all in tents, and these sometimes
leaked, which did not improve the head
cook’s temper and he grew almost abusive; we retired,
went to town, and left him alone to meditate.
Here he hastily and angrily for a few days longer
tossed up nondescript messes for the men, which
none could eat, and was then discharged in disgrace.
In all there were fifteen placer claims staked on
Anvil. Some of these were scarcely touched that
summer, but from those operated fully two million[Pg 137]
five hundred thousand dollars were taken in three
months.
During the six weeks we had spent at Number
Nine, many improvements had been made along the
route and in Nome. Where before we had traveled
seven miles we now walked only two, riding on the
new narrow gauge railroad, spoken of there as
Mr. Lane’s, the remainder of the way.
At Discovery Claim, instead of a few straggling
tents, there were eating houses, saloons, store-houses,
a ticket and post-office, and the nucleus
of a town. The cars we boarded were open, flat
cars, with seats along the sides, to be sure, but they
were crowded at one dollar per head to Nome.
After waiting a little time for a start, the whistle
blew shrilly, the conductor shouted “all aboard!”
and we trundled along behind a smoky, sturdy engine
in almost civilized style.
This was the first railroad in Alaska with the exception
of the White Pass and Yukon road, and
will eventually extend to the southern coast and
Iliamna.
Next morning, after spending the night on the
Sandspit with madam, I called, bright and early,
upon my Swedish friends in their restaurant.
“Good morning, Mrs. Sullivan!” cried Mary in
a hearty voice, as she stirred the steaming mush on
the kitchen range.
“Good morning!” said Ricka more quietly, but[Pg 138]
with a pleasant, welcoming smile. “Did you come
from Number Nine?”
“Good morning!” from Alma, as she poured a
cup of hot coffee for a waiting customer. “Do you
want to help us? We have plenty of work.”
“That’s what I came for,” said I, laying aside
my hat and coat. “Will you lend me an apron
till I get mine?” glancing toward the kitchen sink
full of unwashed dishes, and the cupboard shelves
quite demoralized.
“I’ll lend you six if you will only help us. We
are so busy serving meals we cannot take time to
get settled,” said Mary. “Yes, we moved from the
tent last week,” she said in reply to my question.
“We like this much better. The tent leaked
during the hard rains, and flapped so much in the
wind that we were afraid it would come down upon
our heads. We have had this kitchen built on, and
shall keep open till the last boats are gone for the
winter. That will be two months longer, likely,”
and Mary talked on as she dished up the griddle
cakes and the two others waited upon the tables.
I felt quite happy to have found work so soon,
and that too among friends, and without any particular
responsibility attached to the position. I
would dignify my labor, doing it well and acceptably,
carrying always a sunny face and pleasing
mood. The work was of a kind despised by hundreds
of women, who, after landing at Nome, had
not found agreeable and genteel situations, and so[Pg 139]
had gone back home, or, in some cases, done even
worse.
To be sure, the pay was not large, the work tiresome,
and I would be snubbed by many persons,
but I had not come to Alaska for my health. That
was excellent. Then I had good food in sufficient
quantities, which was always a thing to be considered
in that country. I had a purpose in view which
I never lost. I would get some gold claims.
The Swedish people were brave and fearless,
as well as patient and strong. I had many
acquaintances among them already. I felt they
were good people to stay with, and they were congenial.
To be sure, a few spoke English with an
accent, and there were no small, white hands
among them; but if the hearts and lives were clean
and true, and so far as I could judge they were so,
I was satisfied.
The missionaries from Golovin, including the
young lady who had come up on the “St. Paul,”
had, with my three friends here, called at Number
Nine at different times during the six weeks of our
stay there. Already a plan had been considerably
discussed which would take a party of us to Golovin
to winter, either in the Swedish mission or near
it, and of all things in mind so far this prospect
most pleased me.
We would then be fifty miles from the rich Council
City mines on the Fish River Creeks, and only
half that distance from the Topkok diggings, of[Pg 140]
which we now heard considerable. Every creek
within many miles around Nome was entirely
staked, but in the vicinity of Golovin we might
hope to secure claims, or, at least, be in a good
position to learn of new gold strikes if any were
made during the coming winter.
“But we will keep a roadhouse if we go there,”
said Alma, “and be making some money. I am
sure there will be many people traveling through
Golovin all winter, and we can make a few dollars
that way as well as any one else. Then we will not
forget how to cook,” and the young woman, with
eyes always open to the main chance for “making
money,” as she called it, laughed at the bare possibility
of such a thing.
“We might do that and help in the mission, too,
there are so many of us. I would like to work in
the mission for a change, I think,” said Ricka, who
was very religiously inclined and quiet generally.
“What would you like to do, Mrs. Sullivan?”
asked Mary. “You say so little, and we talk so
much. I want to know what you think.”
“Well, there are three of you to talk, and I am
only one,” said I, laughing, as I placed the cups
and saucers, all clean and shining, on the cupboard
shelves. “I should like the mission plan better
than anything, for I have had some experience in
mission work; but if they do not need us there,
then I should like the roadhouse well enough,
though I think if eight or ten of us, each having[Pg 141]
enough supplies for himself for the winter, should
form a club and live under one roof, we could do
so more cheaply and comfortably than any other
way, and have a real jolly, good time in the bargain.
These young men, many of them, are intending to
winter here somewhere, and all hate to cook for
themselves, I know, while they would gladly get
the wood, water, and shovel snow, if we did the
cooking and housework. None need to work hard,
and if a rich gold strike were reported, somebody
might want to go and do some staking. In that
way we might get some gold claims,” I reasoned,
while all three listened during a lull in the work.
“That’s what we all came to Alaska for—gold
claims. I want three,” remarked Alma with complacency,
“and besides, there is plenty of driftwood
at Golovin on the beach which we could have for
nothing, and save buying coal at three dollars a
sack as we do here,” glancing at the scuttle near
the range reproachfully, as if the poor, inanimate
thing was to blame for prices.
Little Alma was keen at a bargain. There was
nothing slow about the grey matter in her cranium.
If there was buying to do, or a commodity to sell,
Alma was the one of the restaurant firm to do it,
enjoying well the bargaining, where she was seldom
outwitted.
So in the intervals between meals, or at night
when the day’s work was done, we discussed our
plans outside the kitchen door next the sea beach,[Pg 142]
watching the shipping in the roadstead, admiring
the lovely sky tints left by the setting sun, or gazing
at the softly rolling breakers under a silver-bowed
moon.
If we had plenty of hard work, with its not altogether
desirable phases, we also enjoyed much beside
the novelty. Some one we knew was always in
from the creeks, principally Anvil, to bring latest
news, as well as to collect the same, and the kitchen
as well as the dining-room, was the constant rendezvous
of friends of one or all of us. Those prospecting
among the hills or on the beach at some
distance from town came in often for supplies and
to visit the post-office, giving the “Star” a call for
hot coffee, if not a supper, before leaving. Jokes
and stories flew about over the tables, and interesting
incidents were always occurring. Good humor
and good cheer flowed on every side along with
the cordial greeting, and tea and coffee, though
nothing stronger in the way of drinks was ever
placed upon the tables.
In the kitchen we did not lack voluntary assistants
when work pushed, or there was what we
called “a rush.” One young man would fill the
water buckets at a neighboring hydrant, another
would bring in coal, and some other would carry
away refuse.
Happy, indeed, were the great numbers of dogs
fed from the “Star” kitchen. No beggar was ever
turned away. No homeless and discouraged soul,[Pg 143]
whether man or woman, sober or drunken, was allowed
to leave as forlorn as he entered. Men often
sat down at the tables, who, when filled with good
food and hot drink, in a warm and comfortable
room fell asleep from the effects of previous stimulants
and sank to the floor. When this happened
some strong and helpful arm assisted such a one
with friendly advice, to the street.
The two sisters were now our nearest neighbors,
the third and married one having gone with her
husband to live in a new cottage of their own in another
part of the town. The eldest of the two had
kindly offered me lodging in the back part of their
store building of which our restaurant rooms were
a half, and from which we were only separated by
a board partition. This was a temporary arrangement
until I could find something that suited me
close at hand, as I chose to be near my work on
account of going to my room in the evening after
my duties were done. The sisters themselves still
lived in their large warehouse a few feet back from
the store, and between it and the surf which rolled
ceaselessly upon the sands.
I was now more comfortably lodged than since
I had landed at Nome. My canvas cot, placed in
the back of the store, vacant except for a few rolls
of carpeting, matting and oil cloth on sale by the
sisters, stood not far from the large coal heater in
which fire was kept during the day, making the
room warm and dry when I came in at night. Near[Pg 144]
the foot of my cot a good window admitted light
and sunshine, and a door opened upon a flight of
six stairs into a tiny square yard before one entered
the warehouse, where lived the sisters. This latter
building was made of corrugated iron, on piles,
with windows and a door in the south end looking
directly out upon the water only a few feet away,
and was fitted cosily enough for the summer, but
not intended for anything further except storage
purposes. A second door in the north end, opposite
the one in the store, and only separated from
it by the little yard was the door generally used.
At this time lodgings without fire were worth dollars
a night in crowded Nome, and one’s next
neighbors might prove themselves anything but
desirable.
Meanwhile we worked steadily. Many of the
Anvil Creek mine owners and their men took meals
at the “Star” whenever in town. Some of their
office employees came regularly. Hundreds were
“going outside” on boats, and all was bustle and
excitement. At least twenty-five thousand people
had landed at Nome during the summer, and fully
one-half of them had gone home discouraged.
On Sunday, September second, there came up a
most terrible storm, which, for the velocity of its
gales, tremendous downfall of rain, terrific surf,
accompanied by great loss of life, as well as length
of duration, had not been equalled for over twenty[Pg 145]
years. Never before was the property loss so great
on the Behring Sea coast.
By nine o’clock Sunday morning the large
steamers at anchor had put far out to sea for safety.
The wind rose, the rain poured. The surf was
growing more rough. At dinner time those who
came in reported the dead bodies of nine men
picked up on the beach. They had attempted to
land from a steamer, and their small boat was
swamped. One of the men drowned was the mate
of the vessel. For days the storm lasted and our
work increased. It was not long before the continuous
rain had penetrated our little kitchen roof
and walls, roughly built as they were of boards,
and from that on we worked in rubber boots and
short skirts tucked still higher. With the storm
at its hardest, I donned a regular “sou’wester,” or
water proof hat, rather than stand with the rain
dripping upon my head, and a cape of the same material
covered my shoulders.
People living in tents when the storm began—and
there were thousands—had been washed out,
or been obliged to leave them, and could not get
their own meals. The “Star” swarmed with hundreds
who had never been there before, as well as
those in the habit of coming. Ten days passed.
Sometimes there would be a lull in the storm for
a few hours and we hoped it was over, but the surf
ran high and could not return before the wind
again lashed it into fury.[Pg 146]
One midnight, when I was sleeping soundly after
an unusually hard day’s duties in the kitchen, there
came a hasty knock at my door.
“Let me in quick Mrs. Sullivan, the warehouse,
we fear, is going. We must come in here.
We will bring some more of our things,” and little
sister dropped the armful of clothing she carried
and ran back for more.
Sure enough, as I looked, the water surged up
under the warehouse to the foot of the steps. When
she returned with another load I offered to dress
and assist them, but she said they would only bring
the clothing and bedding, and I better go back to
bed.
Breathlessly the sisters worked for a time, until
the tide prevented them from again entering the
warehouse, and they made their bed near me on
the floor. When, after watching the waters, they
felt satisfied that they receded, they retired, weary
and troubled, hoping that before another high
tide the storm would have subsided and the danger
would be past.
By September twelfth the surf was the worst
we had ever seen it, and Snake River had overflowed
its banks. Most of those on the Sandspit
were obliged to flee for their lives. Hundreds
were homeless on the streets. The town’s whole
water-front was washed away. Tents not only went
down by hundreds, but buildings of every description[Pg 147]
were swept away and flung by the angry surf
high up on the sands.
Anchored lighters and barges were loosened
from their moorings and came ashore, as did
schooners broken and disabled. Dead bodies were
each day picked up on the beach, which was strewn
with wreckage.
One dark night, when the rain had ceased for a
time to give place to a fearful gale which tossed the
maddened waters higher and higher, there appeared
upon the horizon a dim, portentous shape.
At first it was only a form, indistinct and uncertain.
As we watched longer, it gradually assumed the
semblance of a ship. Keen eyes soon discerned a
huge, black hulk, of monstrous size when riding
the crest of the breakers, smaller and partially lost
to sight when buried at intervals in the trough of
the sea.
A ship was drifting helplessly, entirely at the
mercy of the elements, and must soon be cast upon
the beach at our feet. Approaching swiftly as she
was, in the heavy sea, as the violence of the wind
bore her onward, lights appeared as signals of distress,
telling of souls on board in fearful danger.
In dismay we watched the helpless, on-coming
vessel. We were in direct line of her path as she
was now drifting. If by chance the mountain of
water should, by an awful upheaval, rear the wreck
upon its crest at landing, we would be engulfed in
a moment of time. No power could save the buildings[Pg 148]
which would be instantly shivered to heaps
of floating debris.
Should we flee for our lives? Or would the wind,
quickly, by some miracle, change its course, and
thereby send the menacing vessel to one side of us
or the other? Groups of patrolmen and soldiers
everywhere watched with anxious eyes, and friends
stood with us to encourage and assist if needed.
God alone could avert the awful, impending disaster.
He could do so, and did.
When only a few hundred feet from shore, the
huge black mass, rearing and tossing like a thing
of life in the raging sea, swerved to the west by a
sudden veer of the wind, and then, amid the roar
of breakers angry to ferocity, she, with a boom as
of cannon in battle, plunged into the sands of the
beach only a hundred and fifty feet away.
The earth trembled. With one long, quivering
motion, like some dumb brute in its death struggle,
the ship settled, its great timbers parting as it did
so, and the floods pouring clean over its decks.
Then began the work of rescuing those on board,
which was finally, after many hours, successfully
accomplished.
CHAPTER XII.
BAR-ROOM DISTURBANCES.

IRLS, O girls!” shouted Mary from
the kitchen door in order to be
heard above the waters, “Do come
inside!” Then, as we answered her
call and closed the door behind us,
she said: “The danger is over
now, and you can’t help those poor
people in the wreck. There are
plenty of men to do that. See! it
is nearly midnight, and we shall
have another hard day’s work tomorrow. Go to
bed like good children, do.”
“How about yourself, ma?” said Ricka, carrying
out the farce of mother and children as we
often did, Mary being the eldest of the four.
“I’m going too, as soon as I get this pancake
batter made, for I’m dead tired. We will hear
the particulars of the wreck at breakfast,” replied
Mary.
“Poor things! How I pity them. What an
awful experience for women if there were any on
board,” said sympathetic Ricka, and I left them
talking it over, to roll into my cot, weary from
twelve hours of hard work and excitement.[Pg 150]
No anxiety, and no thundering of the breakers
could now keep me awake, and for hours I slept
heavily.
Suddenly I was wide awake. No dream or
unusual sound had roused me. Some new
danger must be impending. My pulses throbbed.
The clock at the head of my cot ticked regularly,
and its hands pointed to four. The sisters slept
peacefully side by side. The whole town seemed
resting after the intense and continued anxiety
caused by the storm, and I wondered why I had
wakened.
However, something impelled me to get up,
and, rising quietly from my cot in order not to
arouse the others, I went to the south window
and peered out.
My heart fairly stood still.
The waters were upon us! They had already
covered the lower steps at the door not six feet
from the cot on which I had slept. I stood motionless.
If I knew that the waters were receding,
I would go quietly to bed, allowing the
others to sleep an hour longer; but if they were
rising there was no time to lose. None could
reckon on the tides now, for all previous records
had been recently broken. I would wait and watch
a few minutes, I decided, and I wrapped a blanket
around me, for my teeth chattered, and I shivered.
How cruel the water looked as I watched it creep
closer and closer. How quietly now it swept at[Pg 151]
flood tide up through the piles under the warehouse,
covering the little back yard and the kitchen
steps of the restaurant. With the cunning of a
thief it was creeping upon us in the darkness when
we were asleep and helpless.
Would the resistless waters persist in our destruction?
Where should we go in the storm if
obliged to fly for our lives?
Twenty minutes passed.
Another step was covered while I watched—the
tide was rising.
Crossing the room now to where my friends lay
sleeping, I touched little sister upon the shoulder.
“Wake up! Wake up! The tide is coming,—the
water is almost at the door! I have been
watching it for twenty minutes, and I’m sure we
ought to be dressed,” said I, trying to keep my
voice steady so as neither to betray my fright nor
startle them unnecessarily.
Springing from their bed they hurried to the
window and looked out.
“I should say so!” exclaimed the younger lady
in dismay.
“These treacherous waters will not give us up.
They want us, and all we possess, and are literally
pursuing us, I believe,” groaned Miss S., the
older sister, struggling to get hastily into her clothing.
“But we must waken the girls,” she said, rapping
on the intervening wall, and calling loudly[Pg 152]
for the three other women who still slept soundly
from fatigue.
With that, we all dressed, and began to pack our
belongings; I putting my rubber blanket upon the
floor and rolling my bedding in that. This I tied
securely, and dragged to the street door, packing
my bags and trunk quickly for removal if necessary.
In the restaurant none knew exactly what to do.
The water had covered the back steps, and the
spray was dashing against the kitchen door. Underneath,
the little cellar, dug in the dry sand weeks
before, and used as a storing place for tents, chairs,
vegetables and coal sacks, was filled with water
which now came within a foot of the floors. From
sheer force of habit, Mary began building a fire in
the range, and I to pack the spoons, knives and
forks in a basket for removal. Ricka thought this
a wise thing to do, but Alma remonstrated.
“The water will not come in. You need not be
afraid. If it does, we will only run out into the
street, leaving everything. Let us get breakfast
now, the people are coming in to eat,” and this very
matter-of-fact young woman began laying the
tables for the morning meal. It was six o’clock.
The men soon began to pour into the dining room
hungry, wet, and cold. Many had been out all
night assisting in the rescue work or patrolling the
beach, inspecting each heap of wreckage in search
of dead bodies and valuables, for many among the[Pg 153]
missing were supposed to have perished in the
storm.
Three men engaged in rescuing the survivors of
the big wreck of the night previous, had been swept
from the barge alongside, and gone down in the
boiling surf. Searching parties were out trying to
locate a number of men who had started two days
before, during a lull in the storm, against the warnings
of friends, for Topkok to the east. They were
never again seen.
I had now to find other lodgings, for the sisters
needed their room. Leaving my work for an hour
in the forenoon I tramped about in the mud looking
everywhere within two blocks of the “Star,”
for I did not wish to go further away.
After calling at a number of places, I was
directed to a small hotel or lodging house across
the street from the “Star,” and about one and a half
blocks further east. A man and his wife kept the
house, which consisted of eating room and kitchen
on the east side of the lower floor, and a big bar-room
or saloon on the west side. The second floor
was divided by a long narrow hall into two rows of
small rooms for rent to lodgers. The woman
showed me a little room with one window on the
west side.
“I wish to rent by the week, as I am expecting
to leave town before long,” said I, after telling her
my business, and where I was at work. “What
rent do you charge?”[Pg 154]
“Five dollars per week, unfurnished,” said she.
I caught my breath. The room was about eight
feet square, and as bare as my hand. Not even a
shade hung at the window. It was ceiled with
boards around and overhead. I asked if she would
put up a window shade. She said she would when
her husband returned, as she expected him in a few
days from Norton Sound.
After talking with the little woman she seemed
to wish me to take the room, assuring me that
there were only quiet, decent people in the house,
and the saloon below was closed each day at midnight.
There was a billiard table and piano in the
bar-room; but no window shades, shutters nor
screens of any sort, she said. Her own room was
next this one, and she was always there after nine
o’clock in the evening, so I need not feel timid.
Upon reflection, I took the room, and paid the
rent. My things could not stand in the street, and
I must have a place in which to sleep at night. It
was high and dry, and far enough away from the
surf, so that I need not fear being washed out.
I would not be in my room during the day, and it
was only for a few weeks anyway. It suited my
needs better than anything I could find elsewhere,
and as for furnishings, I could do without.
I went back to my work, and had my baggage
and cot sent to the room. I could settle things in
a few minutes in the evening before retiring.
The surf still boomed upon the beach, and rain[Pg 155]
and mist continued all day, but without wind. For
hours the waters kept close to our floors, but did
not quite reach them. Floating wreckage washed
up at our feet, and two lighters, loose from their
moorings, lodged beside the warehouse at the
mercy of the surf. We were in constant fear that
they would shove the warehouse off the piles
against our buildings, and that would be, without
doubt, the finale.
In the meantime there was “a rush” indoors
such as we never before had. Many carried hearts
saddened by the loss of friends or property. Some
had not slept for days. At the tables, at one
time, sat two beggars, and a number of millionaires.
Some who had reckoned themselves rich a
few days previous were now beggared. The great
wreck of the night before was going rapidly to
pieces. With a mighty force, the still angry breakers
dashed high over the decks of the ship. Masts
and rigging went down hourly, and ropes dangled
in mid-air, while men unloading coal and lumber
worked like beavers at windlass and derrick, which
creaked loudly above the noise of the waters.
More and more was the ship dismantled. When
the storm cleared, and the sun came out next day,
the scene was one of wondrous grandeur. Nothing
more magnificent had I ever before beheld.
Great masses of water, mountain high, rolled continually
landward, their snowy crests surmounted
by veils of mist and spray, delicate as the tracery[Pg 156]
on some frosted window pane. As the sun lifted
his head above the horizon, throwing his beams
widely over all, each mist-veil was instantly transformed
into a thing of surpassing beauty. It could
only be compared to strings of diamonds, rubies
and pearls. With a fairy’s witchery, or a magician’s
spell, the whole face of the waters was
changed. Each wrecked craft along the shore,
partially buried in sand, masts gone, keel broken,
and anchor dragged, with the surf breaking over
all, was transformed under the brilliant sunshine,
until no painting could be more artistically beautiful.
Under the fascination of it all we forgot the
anxiety, the labor, and suspense of the last days and
weeks, and every moment of interval between work
we spent at our door next the beach, or after the
falling of the tide, further out upon the sands.
Many wrecks lay strewn along the beach.
Schooners, barges, and tugs lay broken and helpless.
Untold quantities of debris, lumber, pieces
of buildings, tents, boxes, and barrels, all testified
to the sad and tremendous havoc made by this
great storm.
In my little room I rested quietly when my day’s
work was done. The landlady had taken down an
old black shawl I had pinned to the window, and
hung a green cloth shade of ugly color, and too
wide by several inches. It was better than no
shade, and I said nothing. For a bed I had my
own cot; for a washstand, a box. At the head of[Pg 157]
my cot stood two small boxes, one above the other,
and upon these I placed my clock, matches, pincushion,
brush and combs, while below were stowed
away other little things. A few nails on the wall
held my dresses, but my trunk remained packed.
A candle, tin wash basin, and bucket completed
my room furnishings, simple and homely enough to
satisfy the asceticism of a cloistered nun or monk.
On September twenty-seventh there fell the first
snow of the season. A little had for days been lying
upon the hilltops of Anvil, but none nearer. The
only fire in my room was an oil lamp upon which
I heated water upon going home at night; but with
plenty of blankets and wool clothing I was comfortable
with the window open.
One evening while going to my room I heard
some one singing in the bar-room. I hurried up
the stairs on the outside of the building, which was
the only way of entrance to the second floor, and
entered my room. Depositing my lighted lantern
upon the floor, I listened. The singing continued.
It was a youthful woman’s voice. I would see for
myself. Going quietly out the door, and down part
way to a window crossed by the stairs, I sat down
upon a step and looked into the room below. It
was the big bar-room. It was pleasant and warm,
with lights and fire. Upon the bright green cloth
of the billiard table lay a few gay balls, but no
game was then in progress. The big piano waited
open near by. The bartender stood behind the[Pg 158]
bar, backed by rows of bottles, shining glasses and
trays. A mirror reflected the occupants of the
room, some of whom were leaning against the
counter in various attitudes, but the central figure
stood facing them.
It was a beautiful young girl who was singing.
A few feet from, and directly in front of the girl,
was her companion, a well dressed and good looking
young man a little older. Both were intoxicated,
and trying to dance a cake walk, accompanying
themselves by singing, “I’d Leave my Happy
Home for You.”
She was singing in a tipsy, disconnected way the
senseless ditty, swaying back and forth to the imaginary
music. Beautiful as a dream, with dark
hair, and great melting eyes, her skin was like
lilies, and each cheek a luscious peach. Her tall,
graceful figure, clad in long, sweeping black draperies,
with white jeweled fingers daintily lifting her
skirts while she stepped backward and forward,
made a picture both fascinating and horrible.
I sat gazing like one petrified. The girl’s laugh
rang through the room. “I’d Leave my Happy
Home for You, ou—ou,” she was singing still,
weaving and swaying now from side to side as if
about to fall. Her companion approached and attempted
to place his arm about her shoulders, but
she gave him a playful push which sent him sprawling,
at which she shouted in great glee, dropping
her drapery and flinging her lovely arms above her[Pg 159]
head. How the diamonds sparkled on her little
hands I How the men in the bar-room clapped,
swearing she was a good one, and must have another
drink. Someone gave an order, and the bartender
handed out a small tray upon which stood
slender-necked amber-colored glasses filled to the
brim.
As the girl quickly tossed off the liquor, I
groaned aloud, awaked from my trance, and fled
to my room, where I bolted the door, and fell upon
my knees. God forgive her! What a sight! I
wanted to rush into the bar-room, seize the young
girl, and lead her away from the place and her
companions, but I could not. I had barely enough
room for myself. I had little money. What could
I do for her? Absolutely nothing. If I went in
and attempted to talk with her it would do no good,
for she was drunk, and a drunken person cannot
reason. The men would jeer at me, and I might
be ejected from the place.
Finally I went to bed. At midnight the singing
and shouting ceased, the people dispersed, the bartender
put out the lights, and locked the doors.
For the first time since reaching Nome, my pillow
was wet with tears, and I prayed for gold with
which to help lift these, my sisters, from their awful
degradation.
It was well towards midnight, and I had been
asleep for some time. My subjective mind, ever
on the alert as usual, and ready to share enjoyment[Pg 160]
as well as pain with my objective senses, began
gradually to inform me that there was music in the
air. Softly and sweetly, like rippling summer waters
over mossy stones, the notes floated upward
to my ears. The hands of an artist lay upon the
keyboard of the instrument in the room beneath.
I listened drowsily.
With the singing of brooks, I heard the twitter
of little birds, the rustle of leaves on the trees,
and saw the maiden-hair nodding in the glen. I
was a little child far away in the Badger State.
Again I was rambling through green fields, and
plucking the pretty wild flowers. How sweet and
tender the blue skies above! How gentle the far-away
voice of my mother as she called me!
They were singing softly now,—men’s voices,
well trained, and in sweetest harmony:
My ear is bending low.
I hear the angel’s voices calling
Old Black Joe.”
They sang the whole song through, and I was
now wide awake.
Familiar songs and old ballads followed, the
master hand at the keys accompanying.
“We are going outside on the Ohio tomorrow,”
said one in an interval of the music, “and then,
ho! for home again, so I’m happy,” and a momentary
clog dance pounded the board floor.[Pg 161]
“Have a drink on it, boys?” asked a generous
bystander who had been enjoying the music.
“No, thanks, we never drink. Let’s have a
lively song now for variety,” and the musician
struck up a coon song, which they sang lustily.
Then followed “America,” “Auld Lang Syne,” and
“‘Mid Pleasures and Palaces,” the dear old “Home,
Sweet Home” coming with intense sweetness and
pathos to my listening ear. No sound disturbed
the singers, and others filed quietly out when they
had gone away. “God bless them, and give them
a safe voyage home to their dear ones,” I breathed,
with tears slipping from under wet lashes, and a
great lump in my throat.
“Thank God for those who are above temptation,
even in far-away Alaska,” and again I turned, and
slept peacefully.
CHAPTER XIII.
OFF FOR GOLOVIN BAY.

Y October twelfth the weather began
to be quite wintry, with snow flurries,
cold wind, and a freezing ground. All
now felt their time short in which to
prepare for winter, change residence,
and get settled. After many days of
planning, in which eight or ten persons
were concerned, it was finally decided
that we should go to Golovin Bay.
The head missionary, and one or
two of his assistants from that place, had been with
us part of the time during the great storm, so we
were quite well acquainted, and we would be near
the Mission.
The “boys,” as we called the young men for
short, would build a cabin in which the funds of the
women were also to be pooled. Three of the boys
had gone, some weeks before, to Golovin to assist
in the erection of a new Mission Home, twelve
miles further down the coast; but as a shipload of
mission supplies had been lost at sea, including
building materials, their work was much hampered,
and it was not expected that the new home would
be completed, though sadly needed for the accommodation[Pg 163]
of the constantly increasing numbers
of Eskimo children for which it was intended.
In this case, no new helpers could be added to
the missionary force, though Miss L., a tall, intelligent
young woman, was to be placed in the Home
kitchen as cook, and would accompany us to Golovin.
It was decided, then, that the restaurant be
closed immediately before the last boat left Nome
for Golovin, as it would be impossible to get there
after the last steamer had gone until the ice was
solid, and winter trails were good over the hills.
Most of us did not care to remain so long where
we were, and made ready to sail on the small coast
steamer “Elk,” scheduled to leave Nome October
eighteenth.
On the evening of the sixteenth the doors of the
“Star” were formally closed. We had had a rush
up to the last moment, and all hands were completely
tired out. It had been a long pull, and a
steady pull, and the thought uppermost in the
minds of us four women was to get to Golovin and
rest. Even Alma sighed for a vacation from hard
work, feeling that the roadhouse, if they opened
one, must wait until she was rested.
Mary wished to remain at Nome for a while, and
come later by dog-team when the trails were good.
She would take a day after we had gone to finish
storing away the “Star” outfit for the next summer,
and make the rooms tidy, afterwards visiting
acquaintances, and doing shopping.[Pg 164]
For two days after closing the “Star” we were
busy as bees, but at a change of occupation. We
bought food supplies, coal-oil, and warm clothing,
receiving parcels of the latter, including yarns for
winter knitting, at the hands of the stewardess of
the “St. Paul,” who had kindly made our purchases
in San Francisco at better prices (for us) than we
found at Nome. Some bought furs, when they
could find them, though these were scarce and
costly, and each person carried his own bedding.
Letters to the outside were written and posted,
mails collected, freight and other bills paid, and
tickets secured on the steamer.
For my own part, I now found some kindly
helper with strong arms whenever I had a trunk,
bag, or box to lift or transfer, and no remuneration
for services thus rendered beyond a smiling,
“thank you very much,” was ever accepted.
What a strong, hearty, clean, and good-natured
lot were these Swedes. How helpful, sympathetic,
and jolly withal. It was easy for them to see the
clear, bright side of everything, and to turn an innocent
joke on themselves occasionally; for one told
on another is never so effective and enjoyable as a
joke on oneself; but there were often those with
tears in their eyes, and a homesick feeling at their
heart upon bidding farewell to friends who were
leaving for the outside.
With the approach of a long, hard winter in
the Arctic, so unknown and untried by many, with[Pg 165]
a distance of thousands of miles of ocean soon
to roll between them, it was many times difficult to
say a careless good-bye. For those remaining in
Alaska, who could foresee the future? Was it to
be a fortunate and happy one, or would it disclose
only misfortune, with, perchance, sickness and
death? Would these partings be followed by future
happy meetings, or were they now final? Who
could tell?
Among those constantly sailing for the outside
were those who left regretfully, and those who left
joyfully; there was the husband and father returning
to his loved ones with “pokes,” well filled with
nuggets, and the wherewithal to make them more
happy than ever before.
There were those returning to sweethearts who
daily watched and waited longingly for their home-coming
which would be more than joyful. There
were those leaving who would come again when
the long winter was over, to renew their search for
gold already successfully begun; and they were
satisfied.
There were many who left the gold fields with discouragement
depicted upon their every feature.
They had been entirely unable to adapt themselves
to circumstances so different to any they had before
known, and they had not possessed the foresight
and judgment to decide affairs when the
critical moments came. Perhaps a fondness for
home, and dear ones, pulled too persistently upon[Pg 166]
the heartstrings; nothing here looked good to them,
and they went home disgusted with the whole
world. Unless a man or woman can quickly adjust
himself or herself to changed conditions, and has a
willingness to turn his or her hand to any honorable
labor, he would better remain at home, and allow
others to go to Alaska.
If a man goes there with pockets already well
lined, intending to operate in mining stocks, he
still needs the adjustable spirit, because of the
new, crude, and compulsory manners of living. He
must be able to forget the luxury of silver spoons,
delicate hands, soft beds, and steam heat; enjoying,
or at least accommodating himself to the use of
tin spoons, coarse food, no bed, and less heat, if his
place and circumstances for a time demand such
loss of memory.
A bountiful supply of hopefulness is also necessary,
in order, at times, to make the darkness and
discomfort of the present endurable, and this will
wonderfully cheer and create patience. Thousands
of persons who were ill qualified in these
and other respects had journeyed to Alaska, only
to return, homesick, penniless, and completely discouraged,
who never should have left their home
firesides.
Not so with the Swedish people. They are accustomed
to a cold climate, hard work, and conditions
needing patience and perseverance, without
great luxuries in their homes, and being strong[Pg 167]
and hearty physically, they are well fitted, both by
nature and practice, for life in the new gold fields
of Alaska. There were more reasons than one for
their success in the far Northwest, and a little
study of cause and effect would disclose the truth,
when it will be found that it was not all “luck”
which made so many successful.
Our last day at Nome is a confused memory of
trunks, boxes, bags, barrels, dog-teams, tickets,
bills, lunches, tables, dishes, and numerous other
things. Tramping hurriedly through busy, dirty
streets, and heavy, sandy beach, with arms loaded
with small baggage (we had neither parrots nor
poodles) making inquiries at stores and offices,
doing innumerable errands, saying good-byes, and
having good-luck wishes called after us; and then,
when the sun had disappeared for the day, and
night was almost upon us, we turned our backs
upon our summer camp, and hastened to our winter
home.
At the water’s edge small pieces of ice washed
up and down with a clicking sound upon the sands,
as if to give us notice of approaching winter, but
the ocean was almost as smooth as a floor. No
breath of wind disturbed the surface, and only
a gentle swell came landward at intervals to remind
us of its still mighty, though hidden, power.
Then we were all in readiness to leave. A little
boat was drawn upon the sand. Into it all small
baggage was tossed. It was then pushed out[Pg 168]
farther by men in high rubber boots standing in the
water.
“I cannot get into the boat,” laughed Little
Alma, “I will get my feet wet.”
“Not if I can help it,” answered a stalwart sailor,
who immediately picked her up bodily and set her
down in the boat, repeating the operation three
times, in spite of the screams and laughter of Miss
L., Ricka and myself. Ricka and I were only of medium
height, but Miss L. was a good six-footer,
and when we were safely in the boat, and she had
been picked up in the sailor’s strong arms, if she
did not scream for herself, some of us did it for
her, thinking she would certainly go head first into
the water; but no, she was carefully placed, like
the rest of us, in the boat.
After getting settled, and the final good-byes
were waved, the men sprang in, those on shore
pushed the boat off; we were again on the bosom
of old Behring Sea. Smaller and fainter grew all
forms upon the shore. Darker and deeper grew
the waters beneath us. The lights of a few belated
steamers, twinkled in the distance, their reflections,
beautiful as jewels, quietly fixed upon the
placid waters. Like a thing of sense, it seemed to
me, the great ocean, full of turmoil, rage, and fury
so recently, it would show us, before we left, how
lamblike, upon occasions, it could be; and all old
scores against it were then and there forgotten.
A dark form soon lay just before us. “Where[Pg 169]
is the ‘Elk,'” I asked of a sailor rowing, looking
about in the gathering darkness which had rapidly
fallen.
“There it is,” pointing to a black hulk which
lay sullenly, without a spark of light visible, close
to us.
“But do they not know we are coming? Have
they no light on board? How can we get upon
deck?” we asked anxiously.
“O, they will bring a lantern, I guess,” laughed
the sailor, then thinking to put us at our ease, he
called lustily as he rested himself at his oars. Not
getting a reply, he shouted again.
Presently two men appeared with as many
lanterns.
“Here, you fellows, get a move on, and help
these ladies on board, will you? Were you asleep,
hey?”
“Wall, no, not ‘zactly, sah, but I’se done been
working hard today,” it was the colored cook replying,
as he rubbed his sleepy eyes.
“Haul up alongside this dory,” said the other
man as he put his lantern down, “and let the ladies
get into that first, then we’ll help ’em up here.”
With that we climbed out as we best could in
the darkness, one after another, the boys assisting,
until we all stood laughing in the little cabin, and
counted noses.
“Are we all here?” asked Mr. G., who, as usual
had a thoughtful care over all.[Pg 170]
“All here, I think, but the baggage. How about
that?” said I.
“I’ll see to that,” and he was already on deck,
while I continued counting.
“Alma, Ricka, Miss L., Mr. G., Mr. L., Mr. B.,
and myself—the lucky number of seven. How
fortunate we are. We are sure to have good luck.
Too bad Mary is not here, but then we would not
be seven,” and we were all laughing and talking at
the same time.
In the cabin there was only one lamp, and that
was swung over the table, looking in all its smoky
smelliness as if it had hung there for ages without a
scrubbing. The table was covered with dirty
dishes scattered upon an oilcloth spread. The
room smelled of fish, tobacco, and coal-oil, and we
were obliged to go to the door now and then for
fresh air. There was no fire, nor heat, neither was
there a place for any. Rows of berths in two tiers
lined each side of the cabin, but they were supplied
with mattresses only. Dark curtains hung on
wires before the berths, and these would furnish us
with our only privacy on the trip.
Finally we selected our berths, assorted our luggage,
and sat down to rest. We were disappointed
in the “Elk.” She was not a “St. Paul,” that was
certain. The colored cook soon entered. His
apologies were profuse.
“Hope de ladies will ‘scuze de state ob dis year[Pg 171]
room, but I’se done been mighty busy today, and
will hab tings fine tomorer.”
“That’s all right, Jim, if you only give us a good
dinner tomorrow. Can you do it?” asked Mr. L.
“Yas, sah, dis chile good cook when de tings
are gibben him to cook, but when dere’s no taters,
no fresh meat, no chicken, no fruit, den it’s mighty
hard to set up fine meals. Dat’s de truf!” and Jim
nodded his woolly head emphatically at the frequent
undesirable state of his larder.
“Prices high heah, sah, but dis old man almos’
fru wid de business; de las’ trip ob de ‘Elk’ dis
summah, an’ I’se glad of it,” and he disappeared in
the galley carrying his arms full of dishes.
When the table was cleared and Jim had spread
an old and much rumpled red cover over it, I took
from my basket a small square clock, and winding
it up with its little key, started it going. It was a
musical clock I had purchased when in Nome, of
a small boy about to leave for the outside. It had
been given him by a lady, and he had grown tired
of it, his mind being so much upon his contemplated
long journey. He would sell it for three dollars,
he said, and I paid the money, needing a time
piece, and having none. So now the little music
box ticked off its music to the entertainment of all.
However, we were all tired and the place was
cold, so after we had taken our last look at the
lights of Nome, scattered as they were along the
shore for miles in the darkness, we turned in for[Pg 172]
the night, all dressed as we were, and drew the curtains
around us. The long, deep-toned whistle of
the “Elk,” had sounded some time before, and we
were headed east, making our way quietly over the
smooth waters.
Another chapter of our lives had begun. What
would the end be, I wondered.
During the night I was awakened by men running
and shouting on deck. The steamer stopped.
Somebody went out to inquire the cause. In a little
while he returned, saying that four men had been
picked up, nearly frozen, in an open boat which
was leaking badly, and they were found just in time.
Dry clothes, with food and hot drinks, and they
would be all right again; so I turned over and tried
to sleep, but the men lounged about, smoking and
talking with the captain a good share of the night,
so that sleep was almost out of the question.
How I wished for fresh air! How I hated the
tobacco smoke! But we could say nothing, for the
men had no beds, no other place to sit, and it was
too cold on deck. We must be patient, and I was
patient, feeling thankful that the lives of the four
men had been saved, if each one did smoke like a
volcano and come near choking us to death.
After a while there was another commotion.
What now? Their five dogs had been left in the
leaking dory, which was trailing behind us, the boat
was swamping, and the animals were almost
drowned. They were whining, crying, and soaking[Pg 173]
wet; so the “Elk” was again stopped, the dogs
taken on board, along with some of the miners’
outfits, and we again started on our way.
The men said their dory had been blown ten
miles out to sea by a wind many hours before, and
had then sprung a leak, wetting their food, and
threatening them with destruction, when the “Elk”
appeared and took them aboard in the night.
“Wall, yes, we had given ourselves up for lost,
though none said much about it,” remarked one of
the saved men next day, in speaking of their experience.
“Some one mentioned God Almighty,
I believe, and I could almost have spoken to Him
myself, but it does look like He had done something
for us, don’t it?” said the miner, laughing
quietly, in a pleased, relieved way as he finished.
We were exceedingly glad for their deliverance
from a watery grave, but we pitied ourselves for
our discomforts, until we pictured ourselves in their
forlorn condition, far out from land, at night, in a
leaky boat, without food and freezing; then I found
myself feeling really grateful for the privilege of
sailing on the “Elk,” and not discontented as at
first. We would get fresh air enough this winter,
no doubt, to drive away all remembrances of the
air in the little steamer’s cabin, which was cold as
well as foul. There were no windows or ports that
we could see; there was doubtless a closed skylight
somewhere, but to keep warm even in our berths
required management. In my hand luggage I carried[Pg 174]
a bright woolen Indian blanket, a souvenir of
St. Michael the year before, in which I now rolled
myself, already dressed in my warmest clothing
and heavy coat.
A light-weight grey blanket was loaned me by
the cook, who had purloined it from the pilot’s
bunk, he being on duty and not needing it that
night. This I was rather chary of using, for reasons
of my own, but it was that or nothing, only
the mattress being underneath. On my head I
wore a pink crocheted affair, called sometimes a
“fascinator,” which was now used simply and solely
for service, I assured my friends, and not from any
lighter motive,—but my feet! How I should keep
them comfortable while on board was a question.
With my feet cold I would be perfectly miserable,
and although I wore wool hose and high, stout
laced boots, I soon found on going aboard the
“Elk” that to be comfortable I must make a
change.
I said nothing, but turned the situation well over
in mind. At last I found a solution. Going to my
bags once more, on the aside I drew out my new
reindeer skin muckluks, or high fur boots, and
looked at them. What enormous footgear, to be
sure. Could I wear those things? I had put five
good, hard-earned dollars into them, and they were
said to be warm and very comfortable when worn
properly, with hay in the bottoms, and Arctic socks[Pg 175]
over one’s hose, but I had no hay and could not
get any.
I had the socks in my trunk, but that was in the
hold of the ship, or somewhere out of my reach.
I held the muckluks in my hands, and slowly turned
them round. Suddenly a bright thought came. I
would pull them on over my shoes. I did it. They
went on easily. I drew the strings attached at the
back of the ankle forward over the instep, crossed
them, carried them back, crossed them a second
time and tied them in front, in order to use up the
strings so they would not trip me in walking. Just
below the knees I pulled a woolen drawstring which
was run into the green flannel, inch-wide heading,
and tied this loosely; then I studied them. Shades
of my buried ancestry! What a fright! My own
mother would never know me. I wanted to scream
with laughter, but could not, for I had performed
the operation in a most surreptitious manner, behind
closed doors (bunk curtains), after the others
had retired.
I had no compunctions of conscience as to putting
my shoes upon the bed, for the mattress was
both sombre and lonely, and as for the muckluks,
they had never been worn by man (and were surely
never made for woman). The most that I could
do was to lie back upon my bed, cram my fascinator
into my mouth, and struggle to suppress my
risibles.
After a time I succeeded, and lay enjoying the[Pg 176]
new sensation of feet and limbs warm and cozy as
if in my mother’s warm parlor at home; and then
I slept.
Next morning I kept my berth late. My sleep
had been much broken, and the place was cold.
The bad air had taken my appetite, and there were
already too many in the small cabin for convenience.
Four or five men and three women besides
our own party of seven, crowded in between the
dining table and the berths, filled the small cabin
quite beyond comfort.
The main question in my mind, however, was
how to prevent the company from seeing my feet.
I would put off the evil hour as long as possible,
for they were sure to laugh heartily when they saw
my muckluks, and to take them off—I would not.
Some one brought me a sandwich finally, inquiring
at the same time for my health, but I assured them
it was first class,—I was only resting. Watching
my opportunity, toward noon I slipped out of my
berth quietly and made myself ready for dinner,
keeping my feet well out of sight, for cook Jim had
promised a fine spread for the two o’clock meal.
When it came I was ready. It is said that hunger
is a good sauce, and I believe this is true, for otherwise
I could never have eaten the dinner that day.
Upon a soiled and rumpled white (?) cloth Jim
placed his “big spread,” which consisted of whole
jacketed boiled and baked potatoes, meat stew (no[Pg 177]
questions allowed), dried prunes stewed, biscuits,
and fourth rate butter, with tea and coffee.
At only one camp was there a stop made. There
were two or three passengers on board for Bluff
City, a new and prosperous mining camp, composed
chiefly, though so late in the season, of tents.
Lumber and supplies of different kinds had to be
put off. As the entrance to the hold of the ship
where the stores were kept was in our cabin, we had
plenty of fresh air while the doors were all open,
along with the mustiness from below, for several
hours. However, I managed to keep pretty comfortable
and snug in “fascinator” and muckluks,
enveloped as I was in my Indian blanket.
Hearing a bluff, hearty voice which sounded
familiar, I looked around, and in walked a man
whom I had seen at St. Michael the fall before.
He had charge of the eating house there, where my
brother and I had taken our meals for two weeks.
I had not forgotten his kindness in giving me sore
throat medicine when there had been nothing of the
sort to buy, and I was suffering.
This man remembered me well, and sat down to
chat for a little while with us. He was a miner now,
and a successful one, he said, for he was taking out
“big money” from his lay on Daniels Creek, only
five minutes’ walk from the beach. I had been informed
of his good fortune before meeting him, so
was ready with congratulations.
He told me of his cabin building, his winter’s[Pg 178]
stores and fuel, and seemed in high spirits. Of
course I could not ask him what he meant by “big
money,” or what he had taken from his claim, although
it would not here, as in the Klondyke, be
a breach of etiquette to inquire. After a few minutes
chat the man bade us good-bye, and descended
to the small boat alongside, which was to carry him
and his freight ashore.
It was nearly dark by this time, and another
night must be passed on board. Some were complaining
of the cold. Others were shuffling their
feet to get them warm.
“My feet are awfully cold,” said Alma, moving
them uneasily about. “Aren’t yours, Mrs. Sullivan?”
“Not at all,” I replied, trying to look unconcerned,
at the same time putting my feet further
under my skirts, which were not the very short
ones I had worn at Nome. “You know what having
cold feet in this country means, I suppose,
Alma?”
“O, I am not in the least homesick, if that is
what you mean. I am perfectly happy; but—”
(here she glanced down upon the floor in the direction
of my feet) “what have you over your shoes,
any way, to keep so warm, Mrs. Sullivan?”
There was no help for it, and the muckluks had
to come to light, and did. At sight of them they
all shouted, and Alma laughed till the tears ran
down her cheeks.[Pg 179]
“And you have had these on all day without our
seeing them? Where have you kept your feet, in
your pocket?” she persisted.
“Well, no, not exactly, but of course, under the
circumstances, you could hardly expect me to hang
a signboard out to call attention to them, could
you?” I laughed.
“I should say not. Will we all look like that in
muckluks? Is there nothing else we can wear this
winter? They will make our feet look so awfully
large, you see?”
“That’s the way we will all look, only a good
deal worse, for some of us have no skirts to cover
them with, as you have,” spoke up Mr. G. for the
first time.
“I thought the ‘Elk’ leaned to the land side
more today than usual,” said Mr. B. with a twinkle,
“but now it is explained.”
“Bad boy! My muckluks were on that side of
the ship from the first, only they were in my bag
for a while. They are no heavier now than they
were then. You shall have no supper,” said I, with
mock severity.
So I kept the fur boots on, in spite of their jokes,
wondering what they would say when I arrived at
Golovin and removed my fascinator (another surprise
I was keeping for them), and contented myself
by thinking I had the laugh on them, when they
complained of cold feet, and my own were so perfectly
comfortable.[Pg 180]
At last, on the morning of October twentieth,
with the sun just rising over the snowy hills surrounding
the water, the cliffs on both sides of the
entrance standing out clear and sharp in the cold
morning light, and with one ship already there, we
dropped anchor, being in Golovin Bay. The settlement,
a score of houses, a hotel, a flagstaff or two,
and the Mission.
I now waked the girls, who turned out of their
bunks, dressed as they had been since coming on
board the “Elk,” and we made ready to go ashore.
We were out in deep water, still some distance from
the beach, and must again get out into a small boat,
probably for the last time this year. Not all could
get into the boat; we must take turns, but we were
bundled into it some way, and soon we were upon
the sands, a dozen feet from dry land. Again we
were transferred by one man power, as at Nome,
to the sands, which were here frozen quite hard,
and upon which I had the sensation, at first, of
walking with a gunboat attached to each foot.
Some one conducted us to the Mission House,
only a few hundred yards from our landing place,
while the boat went back to the “Elk” for the
others. Miss E., who had come up on the “St.
Paul” with us, and now the housekeeper here,
came running out to welcome all cordially. By her
we were shown into the cozy little parlor, so tidy,
bright and warm that we immediately felt ourselves
again in civilization. Soon Mr. H., the head[Pg 181]
missionary, whom I had already met in Nome,
came in with Miss J., the teacher of the Mission
children. She also had spent some days with us at
Nome. These all made us very welcome, and our
party of seven was soon sitting together before a
good, smoking hot breakfast, to which we did real
justice.
When entering the house I had, upon first removing
my wraps and “fascinator,” given my
friends another surprise equal to the one of the
muckluks on the steamer. The day before leaving
Nome I had (surreptitiously again) made a visit to
the hairdresser, and when I left her room I appeared
another woman. My head now, instead of
being covered with long, thin hair, done up hastily
in a twist at the back, had short hair and curled all
over, a great improvement, they all voted, when
the first surprise was over.
My hair, all summer, had been like that of most
women when first in Alaska, falling out so rapidly
that I feared total baldness if something was not
done to prevent. This was the only sure remedy
for the trouble, as I knew from former experience,
and as I again proved, for it entirely stopped coming
out. Ricka soon followed my example, and we,
with Miss J., who had been relieved of her hair by
fever the year before, made almost a colony of
short-haired women, much to the amusement of
some of our party.
After we had eaten our breakfasts, several of us[Pg 182]
set to work at writing letters to send out to Nome
by the “Elk,” which would remain a few hours unloading
freight, as this might be our last opportunity
for many weeks, or until the winter mails
were carried by dog-teams over the trails. We fancied
our friends on the outside would be glad to
hear that we had arrived safely at Golovin, and our
pens flew rapidly over the paper. These letters,
finally collected, were placed in the hands of one
of the “Elk’s” crew for mailing at Nome, and the
steamer sailed away.
Not all, however, wrote letters. The business
head of the “Star” firm had not been idle, nor writing
letters, and while I wrote Alma was deeply engaged,
well seconded by Ricka, in making arrangements
with Mr. H. by which we could remain in
this Mission House all winter. Before noon it was
decided that we should stay, assisting the missionaries
all in our power until such time as they could
move to their new station, as soon as the ice was
firm enough in the bay to travel upon and the
Home was far enough toward completion. It was
impossible to finish the building now, but so far as
practicable it would be made habitable, and all
necessary and movable articles of furniture would
be carried to the Home, though many large pieces
would be left for our use.
This arrangement included our party of seven,
Mary at Nome, and the three boys at work at this
time on the new Home building, and would do[Pg 183]
away with all necessity for building a cabin, lumber
being expensive and good logs scarce.
This intelligence came just in time for insertion
in our home letters sent away on the “Elk,” and it
was a day of rejoicing for at least seven persons
(Miss L. was to go to the Home, but Mary was to
come to us from Nome), who already considered
themselves a “lucky number.”
CHAPTER XIV.
LIFE AT GOLOVIN.

UR first duty after arriving at Golovin
was to look up our freight, which
seemed to be in a general mix-up. Each
person was searching on the beach
and in the warehouse for something.
For my part, I was greatly concerned
over the probable loss of a case of
coal oil, and a box containing wool
blankets, feather pillow, and other
things too precious to lose after paying
freight, especially as some of the articles could
not be replaced, and all were useful and necessary.
The “Elk’s” crew had dumped the freight promiscuously
upon the frozen sands, considering
their duty at that point done, and no assurance was
given us that the freight was all there, or that it
was in good condition. The risk was all ours. We
could find it or lose it—that did not concern the
“Elk.” As we had no idea as to the honesty of
the community in which we had come to reside, and
little confidence in some of the “Elk’s” passengers
who were also receiving freight, we visited the
beach a number of times during the first two days.
While at Nome and packing up to leave I had
remembered the story of the person who, going to[Pg 185]
market, put all the eggs into one basket, and for
that reason, when an accident occurred, she lost
the whole lot; while, if she had placed them in two
baskets, one-half might have-been saved. For this
reason I then packed my blankets in two boxes,
and now as one was missing I was glad I had done
so, for to be entering upon a cold, long winter
without woolen blankets would be hard lines indeed.
The first day was spent by the boys in hauling
baggage and freight into the old school house,
near the mission, which was to be our store room
for a time. This building was made of logs, sod
and mud plaster, with small doors and windows,
and thatched roof, now overgrown with grass and
weeds.
It had long-been deserted, or given over to
storing purposes, as the new school and church
building was put up alongside, and was being used
at the present time. We would unpack as little as
possible, while the Mission family remained, as their
house was too small to accommodate comfortably
so many. Mr. H. was like the old woman who lived
in a shoe, for he really had such a family that he
was puzzled as to what disposition he should make
of them. However, the men were all lodged in the
new school building, as it was vacation time, and
no session; trunks and baggage, except bedding,
were put in the store house.
The Eskimo children and the women occupied[Pg 186]
the second floor of the mission. Mr. H. had his
room on the first floor, oftentimes shared with
some visiting missionary or friend, and I was the
best lodged of all. The big velvet couch in the sitting-room
by the fire was allotted to me, and I slept
luxuriously, as well as comfortably. The newest
and most modern article of furniture in the establishment,
this couch, was soft, wide, and in a warm,
cozy corner of the room.
From being lodged above a bar-room in Nome,
I had come to a parlor in the Mission, and I was
well pleased with the changed atmosphere, as well
as the reduction of charges; for, whereas I had paid
five dollars per week for my small, unfurnished
room there, I now paid nothing, except such help
as I could give the women in the house.
I felt, too, that I had earned, by my hard work
during the summer, all the rest and comfort I could
get, and I thoroughly enjoyed the change. Where
among the drones and laggards is one who can find
such sweets as well-earned rest and comfort after
labor? What satisfaction to feel the joy all one’s
own. None assisted in the earning, and consequently
none expected a division of reward. It was
all my own. If this is selfishness, it is surely a refined
sort, and excusable.
I was not, however, the only one in the Mission
who enjoyed a well-earned rest. Each one of our
party of seven had worked for months as hard
and harder than I, and all found a vacation as pleasing,[Pg 187]
while the Mission people had the same round
of work and as much as they could accomplish all
the year round.
The day after our arrival at Golovin was Sunday.
The weather was clear and sunny, but cold. We
were now not only to have a vacation ourselves, but
could give our working clothes a rest as well, and
I took great pleasure in unearthing a good black
dress which was not abbreviated as to length, surprising
my friends by my height, after being in
short skirts so long. It was really Sunday now,
and we wore our Sunday clothes for the first time
in months, not having had an opportunity for Sabbath
observance in the work we had done at Nome.
To complete our enjoyment of the good day,
there was the organ in the sitting-room, and upon
my first entering the room, and seeing the instrument
I had drawn a deep sigh of inward delight.
To find an organ, yes, two of them, for there was
also one standing in the schoolroom, or little
church, was to feel sure of many bright and happy
hours during the coming winter, and I felt more
than ever that for strangers in the Arctic world we
were, indeed, highly favored.
It was not long before I discovered that with at
least two of our party of seven music was a passion,
for Ricka, as well as Mr. B., could never have
enough, and it was a pleasure to see the real and
unaffected delight upon their faces when I played.
We were really quite well supplied with musical instruments,[Pg 188]
for there were now in the Mission two
guitars, one mandolin, a violin and a few harmonicas,
besides the two organs, while as for vocalists
everybody sang from Mr. H. down to the Eskimo
boys, girls and the baby.
But this day’s climax was the three o’clock dinner,
prepared by Miss E. Could anything be more
restful to three tired restaurant workers than to sit
quietly in easy chairs, allow others to prepare the
meal and invite them to partake, without having
given a thought to the preparation of the same,
gaining, as we did, a knowledge of what was coming
only by the pleasant odors proceeding from the
kitchen? Certainly not, and the increased appetite
that comes with this rest is only a part of the enjoyment.
So when we were seated at the table on
Sunday, the second day of our arrival at Golovin,
before us fresh roast mutton, baked potatoes,
stewed tomatoes, coffee, bread and butter, with
pickles, and a most delicious soup made of dried
prunes, apricots, raisins and tapioca for dessert, we
were about the happiest people in Alaska and appreciated
it immensely. What bread Miss E. did
make, with slices as large as saucers, not too thin,
snowy, but fresh and sweet. What coffee from the
big pot, with Eagle brand cream from the pint can
having two small holes in the top, one to admit air
and the other to let the cream out. Nothing had
tasted so good to us since we had come home, as
hungry children, from school. As then, we were[Pg 189]
care-free, if only for a little while, and we were a
jolly, happy crowd.
In the evening, when the children were once in
bed, we all gathered in the sitting-room for music,
stories and plans for the future, including the placing
of a few new strings on the musical instruments
and tuning of the same. Mr. H. had gone to the
Home the afternoon before, so there had been no
preaching service as ordinarily in the little schoolhouse
across the road. The boys were talking of
going to the Home across the bay next day in a
boat, but a wind came up which finally developed
into a stout southwester, and Monday was a most
disagreeable day. Alma worked on a fur cap, to
practise, she said, on some one before making her
own. Ricka mended mittens and other garments
for the boys, while I sewed on night clothes for
the little Eskimo baby.
The child was probably between three and four
years old, but nobody knew exactly, for she was
picked up on the beach, half dead, a year before,
by the missionary, where she was dying of neglect.
Her mother was dead, and her grandfather was
giving her the least attention possible, so that she
was sickly, dirty and starved. She had well repaid
the kind people who took her into the Mission,
being now fat and healthy, as well as quite intelligent.
She was a real pet with all the women immediately,
being the youngest of this brood of
twenty youngsters and having many cunning little[Pg 190]
ways. In appearance she looked like a Japanese,
as, in fact, all Eskimos do, having straight black
hair, and eyes shaped much like those of these people,
while all are short and thick of stature, with
few exceptions.
Among this score of little natives there were
some who were very bright. All were called by
English names, and Peter, John, Mary, Ellen and
Susan, as well as Garfield, Lincoln and George
Washington, with many others, became familiar
household words, though the two last named were
grown men, and now gone out from the Mission
into houses of their own.
As to the dressing of these children, it was also in
English fashion, except for boots, which were always
muckluks, and parkies of fur for outside garments,
including, perhaps, drill parkies for mild
weather, or to pull on over the furs, when it rained
or snowed, to keep out the water. As the weather
grew more severe, heavy cloth or fur mittens were
worn, and little calico and gingham waists and
dresses were discarded for flannel ones.
The children, for weeks after our arrival, ran out
often to play, bareheaded and without wraps, having
frequently to be reminded when the weather
was severe, to put them on. In the kitchen they
had their own table, where they were separately
served, though at the same time as their elders at
another table in the room. To preserve the health
of the little ones, not taking entirely away their native[Pg 191]
foods of seal meat and oil, tom-cod (small fish),
reindeer meat and wild game, these were fed to
them on certain days of the week, as well as other
native dishes dear to the Eskimo palate, but they
were well fed at all times, and grew fat and hearty
as well as happy.
As we sewed contentedly in the sitting-room on
Monday the storm continued, snowing and blowing
a gale from the southwest, which, though not disturbing
us even slightly, we felt sure would be bad
for those at sea and at Nome; our own experiences
at that place giving us always a large sympathy for
others in similar plight. Long afterwards we
learned that in this storm the “Elk” had been
blown ashore at Nome, and was pretty thoroughly
disabled, if not entirely wrecked, and we wondered
if poor cook Jim had “done been mighty busy, sah,
gittin’ tings fixed” ever since.
When evening came the children and Baby Bessie
were put to bed; work, indoors and out, was
finished for that day, and we were twelve in the
sitting-room, as merry a crowd as one could find
in all Alaska. Miss J. had taken a lesson on the
organ in the afternoon and was all interested in
making progress on that instrument, assuring her
friends who declared she would never practise her
lessons, that she certainly would do so, as they
would afterwards learn.
The winds might sigh and moan, and whirl the
falling snow in the darkness as they liked; waters[Pg 192]
congeal under the fingers of the frost king, closing
the mouth of innumerable creeks, rivers, and bays;
but here under cover we had light, health, warmth
and food, without a single care. In my cozy, soft
bed under the blankets, the firelight playing on the
walls, the fine organ open and ready for use, I lay
often with wide open eyes, wondering if I were myself
or another.
In one corner of the room stood a case containing
books enough to supply us with reading matter
for a year, those printed in Swedish being, of
course, of no use to me, but a variety of subjects
were here presented in English, ranging from
Drummond’s “Natural Law in the Spiritual
World” to nursery rhymes for the children. Volumes
on medicine, law, science, travels, stories,
ethics and religion—all were here for the instruction
and edification of inmates of the Mission. In
another corner there was a large case of medicines,
and here were remedies in powders, liquids, salves
and pills, drawers filled with lint, bandages, cotton,
and books of instruction teaching the uses of all.
Even surgical instruments were found here, as well
as appliances for emergencies, from broken and
frozen limbs, mad-dog bites, and “capital operations,”
to a scratched finger or the nose-bleed.
This outfit was for the use of any and all, without
charge, who should be so unfortunate as to
require assistance of this sort in this region. Without
money and without price, the only case of remedies[Pg 193]
for many miles around, this Mission provided
for all suffering ones who applied, and during the
winter many were relieved and assisted toward recovery.
In the third corner of this room stood the large
cabinet organ, nearly new, and in good condition.
Instruction books, hymnals, “Gospel Hymns,”
small collections of words without music, Swedish
songs—all were here in abundance.
The fourth corner contained my couch-bed. A
heating stove, made of sheet iron, a table with its
pretty spread, a large student lamp, easy chairs, a
pretty ingrain rug covering the floor, window
shades and lace curtains, with pictures and Scripture
texts upon the wall, completed the room furnishings,
making a homey place, which for years
had been a haven of refuge for the homeless Eskimo
children. Besides these, it had given food,
shelter and clothing to many a white-faced wanderer,
who came penniless, hungry and cold, perhaps
ill and starving.
About seven years before this unpretending, now
weather-beaten house had been erected, and the
kindly little dark-eyed man put in charge was at
once at home. He was blessed with rare versatility
and patience, as well as a great heart of love
for all mankind, including the dark-skinned, seal-eating
races of the Arctic.
From a door-latch to a baby’s cradle, from a log-house
to a sail-boat rigged with runners on the
ice, he planned, contrived and executed, principally[Pg 194]
for others, for years. Here we found, in one room,
from his hands a bedstead, a table, and a washstand
commode, all made in white wood, of regulation
size, shape and pattern, though without
paint or staining. Relegated now to an upper
room, since the velvet couch had arrived, was a
long, wooden settle, with back, ends and sliding
seat, the latter to be pushed forward upon legs and
made into double bed at night.
One day in the winter, when searching for open
places under the roof through which the snow was
sifting, wetting the ceiling of the room below, I
found in the attic a number of curious things, and
among them a child’s cradle. Not all the thought
of the good man had been given to the needs of
the “grown-ups,” but the small, weak and helpless
ones of his flock had received their equal share of
attention. The cradle was well made with solid
high sides and ends, and curved upper edges,
swinging low and easily upon its two strong rockers.
All was smooth, well finished, and rounded,
though there was no paint nor varnish, these articles
being doubtless unprocurable and not deemed
strictly essential. Near by were the remnants of a
white fox robe fitting the cradle. It was made of
baby fox skin, fine, soft and pretty. A flannel lining
with a pinked-out edge completed what had
once been a lovely cover for baby, whether with
white face or black, and I fell to wishing I might
have seen the complete outfit in its former days.[Pg 195]
From the rafters of the attic hung articles of
wearing apparel of curious make and pattern,
sometimes of skins of the wild reindeer or spotted
seal. Of old mittens and muckluks there were
numbers, still preserved for the good they had
done or might yet do at piecing out somewhere.
There were things for which I had not yet learned
the uses, but might do so before the cold winter
had passed. There were also many fur skins, and
new articles of value stored in the attic.
Tuesday, October twenty-third, the weather was
not cold, but snow fell part of the day, and it grew
dark about half-past four in the afternoon. The
gale of Monday had subsided, and the sky was
overcast. The steamer “Sadie” of the Alaska Commercial
Company surprised us by coming into
Golovin, and again suddenly we fell to letter writing
in order to send them out by her, remaining several
hours as she always did to unload freight and
baggage, for this would positively be our last
steamer. Outside the boys worked as industriously
as we women. In the old log-house, a hundred feet
from our door, was the building now used for a
woodshed. Here, upon a big “double-decker”
saw-buck, two of the boys, with the big saw between
them, worked away, hour after hour, at the
great logs of driftwood brought from the beach, as
this was the only kind of fuel here used, and much
was needed for the winter fires.
When I had finished my work of sewing, and it[Pg 196]
grew too dark to thread needles, between that hour
and the one for the lamp lighting, I was usually
seated at the organ, and our music was not all
Hymns from the Hymnals, certainly. There were
marches and polkas, and sprightly waltzes, too, and
nothing was ever tabooed, though these classic
selections were always omitted on Sunday. None
ever minded how long I sat at the organ, or how
many times a day a certain piece was played, and
a few could never be sated; but I took good care
that my work never lagged, and a duty was never
neglected for such pleasure, thereby making it always
the recreation and enjoyable exercise it was
intended to be and not tiresome.
Miss J. now took a lesson on the instrument
each day for a half hour after the lamps were lighted,
and as she had already had a few lessons, and
could play a few hymns, she was much interested
in acquiring a further knowledge which would be
helpful in church and Sunday school services. Miss
E., too, thought of beginning lessons if she could
find time from her manifold duties as house-mother
of the numerous flock, and did take a few lessons
before they moved away.
In the evening there was always singing, for
some were sure to be present then, who had been
absent during the day. Perhaps Mr. H. had arrived
with a Christian native from the Home, to
spend the night before going back on the morrow,
with supplies of some sort for the completion of[Pg 197]
his new house. He now headed the two establishments
and vibrated between them, simply camping
at the new place and enjoying everything of home
life possible in the Mission. At jokes and repartee
he was as good as the best of them, and always enjoyed
a laugh like the youngest.
A level head and firm hand had this Swedish missionary
of long experience. From a dozen or more
years at Yakutat, in southern Alaska, where he had
done invaluable work for that Mission, he had
come about two years before to Golovin Bay, and
now had, besides the Eskimo children in that place,
over four hundred government reindeer in charge.
For these he kept a number of experienced and
trusty native drivers, and these either lived in his
Mission or with their families near at hand, as a
few of them now were married.
This herd of animals was kept upon the hills
where the reindeer moss grew in plenty, for they
could not, and would not, eat anything else if they
literally starved to death, and they were now five
miles away. To remove this great family of a
score and more with their belongings over the ice,
a distance of twelve miles in winter by dog-team,
getting settled in a large frame building, unplastered,
and upon a bleak, unprotected shore,
was an undertaking which would have discouraged
most men; especially as a shipload of needed supplies
for their new Home, including furniture, had
been lost at sea, leaving them short of many such[Pg 198]
necessities. But this was not all. The whole reindeer
herd and their drivers, with their several families,
were also to be moved near the new Home,
and to fresh moss pastures.
Near the Home was a good-sized creek of fresh
and pure water, which ran singing along through
the hills to the ocean, and for this reason the site
had been selected and built upon.
CHAPTER XV.
WINTER IN THE MISSION.

HE first few garments I made for
Little Bessie were not a great success.
I had told Miss E. that I would be delighted
to assist her in any way that I
could, never dreaming what would
come; and she being more in need of
warm clothing for the children than
anything else, with rolls of uncut flannels,
and baskets piled high with materials
to be made into underwear, said
immediately that I might help with their sewing.
She then brought a piece of Canton flannel, and
the shears, and put them into my hands, saying that
I might make two pairs of night-trowsers for the
baby. My heart sank within me in a moment. I
made a desperate effort to collect myself, however,
and quietly asked if she had a pattern. No, she
had none. The child, she said, kicked the cover
off her in the night so often, and the weather was
growing so cold, that she and Miss J. thought a
garment of the trouser description, taking in the
feet at the same time, would very well answer her
needs, and this I was requested to originate, pattern
and all. Whatever should I do? I could
more easily have climbed Mt. McKinley! If she[Pg 200]
had told me to concoct a new pudding, write an
essay, or make a trip to Kotzebue, I should not
have been so much dismayed; but to make a garment
like that, out of “whole cloth,” so to speak,
from my own design—that was really an utter impossibility.
“O, well,” she said, “I am sure you can do this
well enough. It is not such a very particular job;
just make something in which to keep the child
warm nights, you know. That is all I care for,”
kindly added she, as she closed the door behind
her and went back to the kitchen.
Finally I appealed to Alma. She was busy.
She had never cut out anything of the sort, neither
had Ricka nor Miss L., but I being a married woman
was supposed to have a superior knowledge
of all such things. I admitted that I might have a
theory on the subject, but a “working hypothesis,”
alas, I had none.
Still I hung around Alma, who was an expert
dressmaker of years’ standing in San Francisco.
“No, I can’t cut them out, really; but why don’t
you make a pattern from some garment on hand?”
Here was an idea. Something to build upon.
“But there are the feet, and the waist?” I said
still anxiously.
“O, build them on to your pattern,” she said
carelessly; as if anyone with half an eye and one
hand could do that sort of building, and she left
the room for more important matters.
There was nothing else for me to do. I secured[Pg 201]
a suit of the baby’s clothing throughout, and, taking
the cloth, the shears, and an old newspaper,
I went upstairs to Miss J.’s room and closed the
door. I wanted to be alone. I longed to have
my dear old mother there for just one short hour,
for in that time I felt certain she would have cut
out these as well as other garments, enough to
keep us for weeks sewing, as her own babies had
kept her at one time.
However, there was no help for me, and I went
to work. For an hour I cut and whittled on that
old newspaper, along with a number of others, before
I got a pattern that I fancied might do.
Then I submitted it to Miss J. herself, who told me
to go ahead and cut it out. It appeared all right,
so far as she could see. Then I cut, and basted,
and tried the garment on Bessie. It was too wide
across the chest, too short in the legs, and the
feet were monstrosities. What was to be done,
I asked of the others?
“Make new feet, and sew them on around the
ankle,” said Miss J., thoughtfully, surveying her
little charge from all sides, as the child stood first
on one foot, then on the other, “then you can
lengthen the legs a little if you want to,” careful not
to offend by criticising abruptly, but still feeling
that the height of the gearing should be increased.
“Dear me, that’s easy enough,” suggested Alma,
“just put a wide box plait down the front, like that
in a shirtwaist, and it will be all right.”[Pg 202]
“The back can be taken out in the placket,” and
Ricka folded and lapped the cloth on the little
child’s shoulders, and then we called Miss E. from
the kitchen. After making a few suggestions in a
very conservative way, as if they did not come
readily because the garment was just about right;
she left the room hastily, saying her bread would
burn in the oven; and I thought I heard her giggling
with Miss L. in Swedish until she ran away
out into the woodshed, ostensibly for an armful of
wood; though if her bread were already burning I
wondered what she wanted of more fire.
I did not blame her; I laughed too. The
little child looked exceedingly funny as she stood
there in that wonderful garment, with black eyes
shining like beads, and face perfectly unsmiling, as
she nearly always looks, wondering why it was we
were laughing.
October twenty-fourth the boys worked all day at
making the house more comfortable for winter,
nailing tar paper upon the north side, where some
clapboards were missing, putting on storm or
double windows outside of the others, and filling
the cracks with putty. A couple of the boys also
worked at hauling supplies of apples and potatoes
from the warehouse by dog-team, putting the eatables
into the cellar under the kitchen, which was
well packed in with hay. This cellar was a rude
one, and in summer frequently filled with water
from the surface and the hill above the house,[Pg 203]
making it not altogether wholesome at times, but
by management, it was still being used for some
things, and of course, in cold weather, it made no
difference, for everything was solidly frozen.
Snow enough had fallen by this time, a little
coming quietly down every few hours, to make fair
roads for the sleds, the ground being quite hard;
while Fish River and adjoining creeks were fast
freezing over, as were also the waters of the bay.
In the evening Mr. H. came in, and we all
gathered in the sitting room, some sewing, some
mending, but all chatting pleasantly. The missionary
had just been informed, he told us, of a
gold strike on the Kuskokquim River, some one
having only recently returned from St. Michael,
and brought the report. From that place men
were leaving for the new diggings each day, and it
might or might not prove a bona fide strike. With
reindeer, on a good winter trail, this distance
would not be a formidable trip, Mr. H. told us.
This was the information we wanted to hear, and
it probably started a train of golden dreams that
night in more than one head, which was long in
stopping, especially when he informed us that
every acre of land around us was then staked out
in quartz claims, though no extensive prospecting
had yet been done, and we were pleased at finding
ourselves “so near” even though we were “yet
so far.”
Today was a birthday for Mr. G., and he was[Pg 204]
teased unmercifully for his age, but would not give
it, so those who had known him the longest tried
their best to figure it out from incidents in his life
and from narratives of his own, and made it out to
their satisfaction as about thirty-two years, though
he refused (like a woman) to the very last, to tell
them if they were guessing correctly.
The next day it still snowed a little at intervals
between clouds and sunshine, and all “tenderfeet”
were more comfortable indoors. Miss E. and
Ricka had gone the day before with the boys and
Mr. H. to the Home on a scow-load of lumber,
though we feared it was pretty cold for them without
shelter on the water; but with the wind in the
right direction, they wanted to attempt it, and so
started. They were to look the new building over
for the first time, Miss E. being much interested in
the inside arrangement of rooms, naturally, as it
was to be her home and field of labor, and rightly
thinking a womanly suggestion, perhaps, might
make the kitchens more handy.
In their absence the rest of us continued our
sewing, Miss L. taking Miss E.’s place in the
kitchen, with help from the larger Eskimo girls at
dish washing. The latter were docile and smiling,
and one little girl called Ellen was always exceedingly
careful to put each cup and saucer, spoon
and dish in its proper place after drying it, showing
a commendable systematic instinct, which Miss E.
was trying to foster.[Pg 205]
Between times, their school not yet being in session,
they played about, either up in their rooms if
it was too stormy outside, or out of doors if the
weather permitted; though, for that matter, they
seldom hesitated to do anything they wished on
account of the weather, as it was not so cold to
the natives as to us. They played with balls, both
large and small, and sleds of all descriptions; and
if the latter were not to be had, or all in use, a
barrel stave or board would be made to answer the
same purpose. It was a rush past the window
down the hill, first by a pair of muckluked feet,
then a barrel stave and a boy, sometimes little
Pete, and sometimes John. One barrel stave
would hold only one coaster, and there were usually
enough for the boys, but if by chance the little
girls laid hands upon the sleds before they did,
the staves were then their only resource. If a child
rolled, by accident, upon the ground, it never
seemed to matter, for in furs he was well protected.
The snow was soft, and he, being as much at home
there as anywhere, seemed rather to like it.
If he was seen to fall, it was the signal for some
other to roll and tumble him, keeping him under as
long as possible, and it was a frequent sight to see
three or four small boys tumbling about like kittens,
locked in each other’s arms, and all kicking
and shouting good-naturedly. Snowballing, too,
was their delight, and their balls were not always[Pg 206]
velvety, either, as the one stopping its course could
affirm.
These children did little quarreling. I cannot
remember seeing Eskimo boys angry or fighting,
a thing quite noticeable among them, for nowhere
in the world, perhaps, could the same number of
white children be found living so quietly and harmoniously
together as did these twelve little dark-faced
Eskimos in the Mission.
Our days were now growing much shorter, and
it was necessary to light the lamps at four o’clock
in the afternoon, the sun having set some time before.
The sunset skies were lovely in bright and
tender colors, reflecting themselves as they did in
the water of the bay, and tinting delicately all surrounding
hilltops. What a beautiful sight it was,
and how sadly we remembered that very soon the
water would have disappeared under the solid ice,
there to remain for long months imprisoned. Little
did we then know that the heavenly beauty of the
Arctic sky is never lacking, but close upon the departure
of one season, another, no less beautiful,
takes its place.
Diary of October twenty-sixth: Alma and I
called today upon two neighbors in the old schoolhouse
next the church, by name Dr. H. and wife.
They claim to have come from Dawson not very
long ago, being shipwrecked on the way, and losing
their outfit. She seems a chatty, pleasant little
body, and inclined to make the best of everything,[Pg 207]
her hard lot included, and she is baking and selling
bread to the miners. She is a brave little woman,
and could teach many a pampered and helpless
one lessons of great usefulness and patience. Miss
L. is ill with quincy and suffering very much, so
Alma makes the bread.
I have just made four large aprons for Miss J.,
cutting them out and making them, and they look
really well, so I am quite proud of myself, especially
as Ricka has “set up” my knitting on
needles for me, and I am going to make some
hose. I usually knit evenings, between times at
the organ, for my new yarn received from San
Francisco is very nice, and will make warm winter
stockings.
Saturday, October twenty-seventh: We have
four inches of snow on the ground, and more coming.
Miss L. is quite ill with her throat, and did
not get up today. Alma, too, is very pouty, with
a swollen, pudgy face, and feels badly. They both
say they think they took cold coming from Nome
on the “Elk,” and I don’t doubt it, for I would
have done so myself only for my great caution in
taking care of my newly shingled head and in applying
a thorough dose of fur muckluks to my feet,
but, thanks to them, I am the most “chipper” one
at present.
Miss J. had Dr. H. examine Bessie today, and he
says she has bronchitis, but told the teacher what
to do for her.[Pg 208]
The two girls came back from the Home with
Mr. H. and Mr. L. about four o’clock after we had
begun to be worried about them. They were hungry,
and Alma and I got dinner for them, when
Mr. H. started back immediately in a small boat
alone, after it had begun to grow dark. We begged
him not to attempt it, but he insisted on going, as
he must be there tomorrow to push the work on
the building, and the ice is floating, so he fears it
will freeze the bay over. The sun shone out beautifully
for three or four hours, and it is just one
week today since we landed in Golovin, a most
pleasant week to us all (pattern making not included).
Later.—I helped with the housework and made
two more aprons for Miss J. There is nothing like
feeling of some use in the world, is there?
Sunday, October twenty-eight: A clear, bright
morning, growing cloudy about noon, and dark at
four in the afternoon, when lamps were lighted.
We had a long, restful day indoors, both Miss E.
and Ricka being very lame from their long walk
of fifteen miles over the stony beach and tundra
covered hills from the Home, Mr. H.’s boat being
too small for four persons. By water the distance
is called a dozen miles, but by land and on foot it
is much farther, as the girls have found by sad
experience; and they were very glad it was Sunday,
and they could rest. Miss E. said laughingly that
we would play we were at home in the States again,[Pg 209]
and so she spread the breakfast table daintily in the
sitting-room, with white cover, pretty embroidered
centre-piece, and snowy napkins, bringing real
comfort to our hearts, accustomed as we had been
for so many months to bare necessities and none
of the luxuries. A fashionable breakfast hour for
Sunday in the States was also affected in order to
make the plan complete, and because the mornings,
growing darker as they are continually doing, nobody
felt in haste to leave their beds. Of course
every one wore his Sunday clothes and I put on
my very best waist of olive green satin with a good
black skirt, which had a little train, thereby effectively
hiding my uncouth feet, still clad as they are
in the ungainly muckluks.
The ice is moving in the bay, and we hear that
still another steamer may come in, so we can send
mail out to Nome, and write to have in readiness.
There have been no church services today, as Mr.
H. is away at the Home, but we had music and
singing frequently, and Swedish hymns all evening,
which I play, but do not understand.
Monday, October twenty-ninth: This has been
a bright, sunny morning until a little after noon,
when it grew cloudy, as it often does. Miss E. was
still very lame from her long tramp of last Saturday,
and Ricka and I assisted in the kitchen. Alma
has cut out a pretty brown cloth dress for Miss J.
and is making it. Miss L.’s throat is better, and
she is out of her room again, after a siege of severe[Pg 210]
suffering with quinsy, which caused a gathering.
About nine in the evening Mr. H. came in from
the Home, having walked the whole distance, a
boat being now unsafe in the floating ice. After
drinking some hot coffee, he related to us his adventure
of Friday night in the Peterborough canoe.
He had left us quite late in the afternoon of that
day to go to the Home, and it was already beginning
to grow dark. For a while, he said, he found
open water, and made good time at the paddle,
but presently found himself alongside of and soon
after crowded by floating ice.
It was young ice, and he did not have much fear
of it. He kept on paddling, but finally found himself
entirely surrounded, and manage as he would,
he could not free his canoe. A breeze came up
from the north, which pushed him along with the
ice out toward sea, for he was near the mouth of
the bay. There was nothing to do but wait. For
an hour he waited.
It was well on towards midnight, and he could
see no escape. The missionary, in relating the incident
to us, did not dwell upon this part of his
story, but he said he had given himself up for lost,
and only prayed and waited. By and by the breeze
died away, the ice quietly parted, and drifted away
from him, and he paddled safely ashore.
Tuesday, October thirty: A brand new experience
today—that of watching the natives and others
fish through the ice. Little holes are made in the[Pg 211]
ice, which is now quite strong in the north end of
the bay near the cliff, and the Eskimos sit there
patiently for hours, fishing for tom-cod. These are
small fish, but quite tasty, one of the principal
means of subsistence for the natives, and are also
much used by others. No pole is needed on the
line except a short one of three or four feet, and
when a bite is felt by the fisherman, the line is
quickly drawn out, given a sudden twitch, which
frees the tom-cod, and he is summarily dispatched
with a few raps from the fishing stick kept at hand
for the purpose.
Several river boats, including small steamers, are
laid up under the cliff for the winter, dismantled
of loose gear and light machinery, and I did get a
few views which should prove of some value. The
weather was good all day, the sun setting at three
in the afternoon, and it being nearly dark an hour
later. Mr. H. dressed himself from top to toe in
furs, hitched three dogs to a sled, took a lunch for
himself, a few supplies of eatables for the Home
camp to which he was going, and started out, on a
longer, but we trusted a less venturesome and dangerous
route than by Peterborough canoe. Our
evening was pleasantly, and at the same time more
or less profitably spent by our party in the sitting-room,
Alma sewing on Miss J.’s new dress, Ricka
and I knitting, and the others either mending or
busying themselves at something. This something
frequently covers a good deal of ground, for with[Pg 212]
one or two of the boys it means pranks or
roguishness of some sort, which really enlivens the
whole household and keeps our risibles from growing
rusty by disuse.
Wednesday, October thirty-one: I find no difficulty
in running the sewing machine here, which
is a new and good one, and I like to use it very
well. Just how they could get along without it is
more than I can tell, with so much sewing to do for
each of the children, not to mention the others who
are waiting to come into the Mission at the earliest
possible moment. During the day Mr. L. busied
himself usefully in several ways as he always does,
and finally mended Miss J.’s guitar. After supper
we counted ourselves and found six women and a
lot of children, but he was the only man in the
establishment, the others being at the Home, and
we hazed him considerably, all of which was taken
most good-naturedly. The bay is freezing more
and more each day, with an increasing depth of
snow upon the ground.
A very unpleasant day as to weather was Friday,
November second. Snow, high tide, and wind from
the south, which blew the water further yet upon
the beach; but we sewed all day, though I did not
get much accomplished. I gave Miss E. her first
lesson on the organ today. Alma is making herself
a new dress skirt, as she has Miss J.’s wool
dress nearly finished, and it looks exceedingly well,
fitting, as some one remarks, “like the paper on[Pg 213]
the wall.” Alma likes dressmaking, and does it
well, but draws the line at baby clothes.
Each day Miss J., the teacher, is now holding a
little prayer meeting in the kitchen for the natives.
When the supper is cleared away, one of the boys
goes out and rings the bell, which is only a big,
iron triangle hung under three posts in the ground.
A piece of iron is picked up and put through the
triangle, hitting it on both sides, and making a
ringing, vibrating sound which calls in the natives,
who come immediately, just as they are, and range
themselves on the benches along the walls. Those
who can sing sit at the long table upon which are
the lamps and English song books, those used being
principally Gospel songs. One of the grown
boys called Ivan is a very fair singer, and loves
music of all kinds. He is the interpreter for all
meetings, understanding English and speaking it
quite well. None of the Eskimos are taught Swedish—nothing
but English.
Miss J. reads a song which she wishes them to
learn, and Ivan interprets it into Eskimo, verse by
verse, afterwards singing it. Tunes are learned
more quickly than words, but they get the meaning
from Ivan. Then Miss J. reads the Scripture, Ivan
interpreting verse by verse. She next offers prayer
in English, and calls upon some older native Christian
to pray in his language, after which they sing
several songs with which they are familiar. Having
selected beforehand some passage from the[Pg 214]
Bible, she reads and expounds that, being interpreted
by Ivan; there is a short benediction and
the meeting is over. They seem to like very well
to come, and are never eager to go, but say little,
not being great talkers, even in their own tongue.
When the last Eskimo has departed, and the
children are settled in bed, the cozy hour of the
day has arrived. For a good, old-fashioned tale of
love, fright and adventure, there is no time like a
winter’s night, when the wind shrieks down the
chimney and whirling snow cuddles into corners
and crannies. When supper is over, and the
kitchen is well cleared, the women of the house
may take their yarn and bright needles, while the
men toast their feet at the fire and spin—other
yarns, without needles, which are, perhaps, not so
essential, but far more entertaining to listeners.
This is what we did that winter at Chinik, the
home of the Eskimo, in that far away spot near the
Arctic Sea. There were tales of the Norsemen
and Vikings, told by their hardy descendants sitting
beside us, as well as the stories of Ituk and
Moses, the aged, called “Uncle,” Punni Churah,
big Koki, and “Lowri.”
To the verity of the following narrative all these
and many others can willingly vouch.
CHAPTER XVI.
THE RETIRED SEA CAPTAIN.

ANY years ago, close under the
shadow of old Plymouth Rock, there
was born one day a fair-skinned, blue-eyed
baby. Whether from heredity, or
environment, or both, the reason of
his spirit will perhaps never plainly
appear, but as the child grew into
manhood he seemed filled with the
same adventurous aspirations which
had actuated his forefathers, causing
them to leave their homes in old England, and
come to foreign shores. Scarcely had he passed
into his teens before he was devouring tales of pirates,
and kindred old sea yarns, and his heart was
fired with ambition to own a vessel and sail the
high seas. Not that he thirsted for a pirate’s life,
but a seafaring man’s adventures he longed for
and decided he must have.
Under these conditions a close application at his
desk in the village school was an unheard-of consequence;
and, having repeatedly smarted under the
schoolmaster’s ferule, not to mention his good
mother’s switches plucked from the big lilac bush
by her door, he decided to run away to the great
harbor, and ship upon some vessel bound for a
foreign land.[Pg 216]
This he did. Then followed the usual hard,
rough life of a boy among sailors in distant ports;
the knotted rope’s end, the lip blackening language
and curses, storms, shipwrecks and misfortunes;
all followed as a part of the life so hastily chosen
by the adventurous young lad, until he acquired
familiarity with all that appertained thereto, and he
was a man.
Years passed. To say that fortune never came
to him would not be true, because she is always a
fickle dame, and cannot change her character for
sailor men. So it came about that he finally stood
on the captain’s bridge of different sorts of craft,
and gave orders to those beneath him.
And a typical sea captain was he. Gruff when
occasion required, rollicking as any when it
pleased him, he was generous to a fault, and a man
of naturally good impulses. If he drank, he was
never tipsy; if he swore, he always had reason;
and thus he excused himself when he thought of
his good old mother’s early Bible teaching.
From Montevideo to Canton, from Gibraltar to
San Francisco, from Cape of Good Hope to the
Arctic Ocean; thus ran his itinerary year after year.
Crossing Behring Strait from Siberia in the summer
of 18—, he landed, with his little crew, at Cape
Prince of Wales, for the purpose of trading with
the natives. The furs of the animals of this region
were found to be exceptionally fine, thick and
glossy, and the Eskimos easily parted with them.
For flour, tobacco and woolen cloth they willingly[Pg 217]
gave their furs to the sailors, who looked admiringly
upon the skins of the polar bear, sea otter,
beaver, silver, black and white fox, as well as those
of many other animals. These furs were sold in
San Francisco, and other trips were made to the
Arctic Northwest.
Along the south coast of the Seward Peninsula
there are few bays or natural harbors. Golovin
Bay is one of them. Here for many years the Eskimos
have subsisted upon the fine fish and game.
The flesh and oils of the white whale, seal and
walrus being principally sought for, the natives
came to this bay from all directions.
After many years of wandering, and when the
ambitions of the captain for a seafaring life had
been satisfied, an incident occurred which changed
the current of his life and decided him to settle permanently
at Golovin Bay.
During his visits on the peninsula his attention
had been directed to a bright and intelligent young
Eskimo woman, lithe and lively, a good swimmer,
trapper and hunter. Like a typical Indian, she
had a clear, keen eye, steady nerves and common
sense. She was a good gunner and seldom missed
her mark. She was fearless on land or sea, loved
her free out-door life, and was a true child of
nature. Her name was Mollie.
One day in the early springtime, nearly a dozen
years ago, when the winter’s ice was still imprisoned
in the bays and sounds of Behring Sea,[Pg 218]
though the warm sun had for weeks been shining
and already seams appeared upon the ice in many
places, the captain attempted the trip by dog-team
from St. Michael to Golovin Bay. With him were
four trusty natives, and three dog-teams, the animals
being of the hardy Eskimo breed, and well-nigh
impervious to cold, their long, thick hair
making an effective protection.
His men were experienced, knowing the country
perfectly, including a knowledge of winter trails
and methods of traveling such as all Eskimos possess,
and though the weather was not just what the
captain might have wished, he decided to make the
start, and left St. Michael in good shape for the
long trip. The strong sleds with high-back handle
bar and railed sides were firmly packed with
freight, which was securely lashed down. The dogs
were driven in pairs, eleven to a sled, the eleventh
being in each case a fine leader and called such, besides
having his own Eskimo name, as did also the
four men who were warmly dressed in furs from
head to foot. These natives were familiar with
little English, but as the captain had made himself
acquainted with their language they had no difficulty
in making each other understood.
Early in the evening of that day they reached
the Mission station of Unalaklik, on the mainland,
about fifty miles northeast of the island, where they
spent the night. In this settlement were white
traders, as well as missionaries and numbers of[Pg 219]
Eskimos, it being an old port of considerable importance.
In the cold grey morning light Punni Churah
and the men called to the malemutes, patting their
furry heads and talking kindly to them, for many
a weary, long mile of snow trail stretched northward
for them that day before they could rest and
eat. Only at night, when their day’s work was
done, were these faithful creatures ever fed on seal,
fish, whale, or walrus meat, for otherwise they
would be drowsy, and not willing to travel; so
they were called early from their snow beds in a
drift or hollow, where they liked best to sleep, and
made ready for the start.
Dressed in their squirrel skin parkies, with wide-bordered
hoods upon their heads, reindeer muckluks
on their feet and mittens of skin upon their
hands, stood Ah Chugor Ruk, Ung Kah Ah Ruk,
Iamkiluk and Punni Churah, long lashed whips in
hand, and waiting.
On one of the sleds, dressed and enveloped in
furs, sat the captain, before giving the order to
start. At the word from him, the dogs sprang to
their collars, the little bells jingled, and away they
all dashed. Team after team, over the well-trodden
trail they went, keeping up a continuous and
sprightly trot for hours, while behind at the handle
bars ran the natives, and rocks, hills and mountains
were passed all unnoticed.
That night another Eskimo village was reached,[Pg 220]
and sixty miles of snow trail were left behind.
Shaktolik lay on the shore southeast of a portage
which would have to be made over a small point
of land jutting out into Norton Bay.
During the night a storm came up which would
necessarily much impede their progress, being
called in the western world a “blizzard.” This
storm fiend, once met, is never forgotten. None
but the man in the Arctic has seen him. None
know so well how to elude him. Like a Peele, or a
“tremblor” this Arctic king gathers his forces,
more mighty than armies in battle, and sweeps all
opponents before him. To resist means death. To
crouch, cower or bow down to this implacable lord
of the polar world is the only way to evade his
wrath when he rides abroad, and woe to the man
who thinks otherwise.
Not long had the wind and snow been blowing
when the little train prepared to move. Ahead
they could see the sled tracks of other “mushers”
(travelers by dog-team), and the captain concluded
to hurry along, notwithstanding that Ah Chugor
Ruk shook his head, and spat tobacco juice upon
the ground, and Ung Kah Ah Ruk demurred stoutly
in few words. Punni Churah thought as the rest,
but would go ahead if the captain so ordered, and
they headed northwest for the portage.
On the dogs trotted for hours. The snow and
sleet were blinding, the wind had risen to a gale.
The dogs traveled less rapidly now, and their faces[Pg 221]
were covered with frost, the moisture freezing as
they breathed.
By this time the natives wanted to camp where
they were, or head about northeast for another
Eskimo village called Ungaliktulik, which would
make the journey longer by twenty-five miles, but
the captain decided to keep on as they were going.
By the middle of the afternoon the gale had increased
to fury, causing the thermometer to fall
with great rapidity, while the snow was blinding.
The dogs were curling up in the wind like leaves
before a blaze.
Ah Chugor Ruk was ahead with his team. His
leader suddenly halted.
“Muk-a-muk!” cried the Eskimo.
“Muk!” echoed Punni Churah, running up
alongside to look, and then back to the captain’s
sled, where he shouted something loudly in order
to be heard above the storm.
An ice crack crossed their trail. There was no
help for it. There it lay, dark and cold—the
dreaded water.
In the blinding blizzard they could not see the
width of the chasm. It was too wide for them to
bridge; it was death to remain where they were—they
must turn back, and they did so. The wind
was not now in their faces as before, which made
traveling some easier, but they had not gone far
when: “Muk-a-muk!” from Punni this time, who
was ahead.[Pg 222]
Again the dogs stopped. Again Punni Churah
came back, and reported.
They were adrift on a cake of ice. Wind from
the northeast was blowing a hurricane, carrying
them on their ice cake directly out to sea; but the
snow was drifting in hummocks, and in one of
them the natives began digging a hole for a hut.
When this was of sufficient size, they pitched a sled
cover of canvas over it, made the sleighs fast outside,
and crawled underneath. Once inside their
temporary igloo, they made a fire of white drilling
and bacon, taken from the sled loads of merchandise;
melted snow for water, and boiled coffee, being
nearly famished. Then for hours they all slept
heavily, the dogs being huddled together in the
snow, as is their habit, but the blizzard raged
frightfully, and drove the dogs nearer the men in
the hut.
Crawling upon the canvas for more warmth, the
poor, freezing creatures, struggling for shelter,
with the weight of their bodies caused the hut to
collapse, and all fell, in one writhing heap, upon
the heads of the unfortunates below. Howling,
barking, struggling to free themselves from the
tangle, the pack of brutes added torment to the lot
of the men; but the storm raged with such terrific
force that all lay as they fell, until morning, under
the snow.
None now disputed the storm king’s sway. All
were laid low before him. With the united fury of[Pg 223]
fiends of Hades, he laughed in demoniacal glee at
the desperation of the Arctic travelers under his
heel. The whole world was now his. Far from the
icy and unknown wastes of the interior, around
the great Circle and Rockies, riding above the
heads of rivers and mountains, he came from the
Koyuk and Koyukuk. Like a child at play, as if
weary of so long holding them in his cold embrace,
he drove the massive ice floes out into
ocean, only, perhaps, in childish fitfulness, to bring
them back directly, by gales quite contrary.
When morning dawned, the captain and his men
crawled out of the crushed snow hut, and, with
hard work, made a new cave in the snow drift,
burying the sleighs in the old one. The dogs were
starving, and, to appease their appetites, were
purloining bacon from the sled’s stores; but Providence,
for once, was kind to them, and a large, fat
seal of several hundred pounds weight was shot
that day on the edge of the ice cake upon which
they were camped, and this gave them food and
fuel. Dogs and natives were then well fed on the
fresh seal meat and blubber, their natural and
favorite viands. From tin dishes upon the sleds,
the natives made little stoves, or lamps, using drilling
for wicks, seal oil for fuel, and their coffee was
made. Among the stores on the sleds were canned
goods, beans, sausages, flour and other things,
and on these the captain subsisted.
Day after day passed. The storm gradually died[Pg 224]
away, and the sun came out. Then watches were
set to keep a lookout, and the captain took his
turn with his men. Walking about in the cold
morning air, he could see the mainland to the
northwest, many miles away, and his heart sank
within him. Would he ever put his foot upon that
shore again? How long could they live on the ice
cake if they floated far out in the Behring Sea? To
him the outlook was growing darker each day,
though the natives seemed not to be troubled.
Nearly two weeks passed. One night the captain
was awakened by a hand on his shoulder. It
was Ung Kah Ah Ruk. The wind, he said, was
blowing steadily from the southwest, and if it continued
they might be able to reach the shore ice
and the mainland. Anxiously together then they
watched and waited for long, weary hours, getting
the sleds loaded, and in readiness for a start; then,
with bitterest disappointment, they found the wind
again changed to the southwest, which would carry
them out to sea as before.
What were they to do? This might be their best
and only chance to escape. The shore ice lay near
them, but, as yet, beyond their reach. This treacherous
wind might continue for days and even
weeks. From experience they knew that the wind
blew where he listed, regardless of the forlorn creatures
under him, and with the thermometer at forty
degrees below zero, as it was, swimming was out
of the question. The crack appeared a dozen or so[Pg 225]
feet in width, and escape was only possible by
reaching the other side.
Their strait was a desperate one. The captain
decided to make the leap. Removing his furs, he
rolled them tightly, and threw them across the
chasm. It was now a positive dash for life, as
without his furs he would soon perish with the
cold.
He made the run and leaped. At that instant
one of the natives, from intense interest, or from
a desire to assist, gave a loud Eskimo whoop,
which startled the captain, and he missed his footing,
falling forward upon the ice, but with his
lower limbs in the water.
The natives now bestirred themselves and threw
to the captain a large hunting knife and rifle, attached
to their long sled lashings. With a good
deal of exertion, the captain crawled upon the ice,
and with the knife he chopped a hole, and inserted
the rifle barrel, fastening the lashings to it and
holding it firmly in place. The natives then pulled
with united strength on the line, bringing the ice
cake slowly up toward the captain until within a
few feet of the shore ice, when, using a sled for a
bridge, they and the dogs crossed safely over, without
so much as wetting their feet. To all, this was
a matter for great rejoicing, and no regretful farewells
were given to the ice floe which had been
their prison house so long. They were not yet out
of danger, however, for the shore ice upon which[Pg 226]
they stood might, in the gale, at any moment be
loosened and carry them, like the other, out into
the ocean. So with all haste possible, they proceeded
to get away. Punni Churah brought the
captain’s fur sleeping bag and robes, in which he
was stowed away in one of the sleds, though his
wet clothing was now frozen. There was no time
nor place to make a change, with the thermometer
nearly forty degrees below zero.
Hours afterward they reached the mainland.
How good once more to step foot on terra firma!
The dogs barked, and the natives hallooed cheerfully
to each other, for they were now going home.
A deserted native village was soon entered, an
igloo in passable condition taken possession of,
and the dogs tied up for the night.
The natives now worked rapidly and cheerfully,
two putting up their camp stove, another bringing
snow for water with which to make the coffee, and
Punni Churah looking after the captain, who tried
to remove his clothing, but to no purpose. Muckluks
and trousers were frozen together, and as fast
as the ice melted sufficiently they were cut away.
Contrary to his expectations, he was not severely
frozen, a white patch, the size of his hand, appearing
upon each limb above the knee. With these
they did the best they could, and dry clothing from
the sleds was put on.
Their supper that night was a feast of rejoicing.
They were now on the home trail, and would soon[Pg 227]
be among friends. One more day of travel and
their long, hazardous, and eventful trip of two hundred
miles over an Arctic waste would be successfully
accomplished. As they rolled themselves in
their furs at midnight for a few hours of needed
rest and sleep, they could almost fancy themselves
at home again and happy. The dogs huddled in
the snow outside, now and then barking in their
usual way, but the tired men in the igloo did not
hear them, for their sleep was oblivion, after the
strain of the last two weeks.
Next morning, after traveling for several hours,
a halt was made, and a lunch was taken in an Eskimo
camp; but the captain, by this time, was suffering
from exposure and frosted limbs, the trail
was bad, and he concluded to hurry on ahead of
the teams. The way was familiar, and only one
low mountain, called the Portage, was to be
crossed. It was early in the day, and his teams
would follow immediately; so on his snowshoes the
captain hastened toward home.
God help the man who travels alone in the Arctic
in winter! Little matters it if the sun shines brightly
at starting, and the sky appears clear as a summer
pool. In one short hour the aspect of all may
be changed, heavens overcast, snow flying, and
wind rapidly driving. Under the gathering darkness
and whirling snowflakes the narrow trail is
soon obscured, or entirely obliterated, the icy wind
congeals the traveler’s breath and courage simultaneously,[Pg 228]
he becomes confused and goes round and
round in a circle, until, benumbed by the frost, he
sinks down to die. This was what now happened
to the captain.
Another storm was upon him when he reached
the hill portage, and as he expected his natives momentarily,
and beyond this point the trail was
good, so that he could ride behind the dogs, he
waited until they should come up to him. Hour
after hour he waited. Night came on, and the blizzard
increased in severity. Hungry, cold and already
frost-bitten, he must spend the night on the
mountain alone. Still he listened for the bells on
the malemutes, and the calls of his Eskimo drivers.
They did not come. Nothing but snow, and the
shriek of that storm king whose rage he had so
recently encountered while drifting to sea on the
ice floe, and from whom only cruelty was ever
expected, now whistled in his ears.
He knew he must keep on walking, so removing
his snowshoes he stuck one in the snow drift and
fastened a seal rope at the top. Taking the end of
this in his hand, he circled round and round for
hours to keep himself moving. At last he grew
weary, and closed his eyes, still walking as before.
It was more pleasant to keep his eyes closed, for
then he saw visions of bright, warm rooms, blazing
fires and cozy couches, and smelled the odors
of appetizing foods. There were flowers, sweet
music and children, and he was again in far-off
sunny lands.[Pg 229]
He grew drowsy. He would only rest a little in
a soft white drift, and then go on again. Making
a place in the bank with the snowshoe, while the
wind whistled horribly and the whirling snow bewildered
him, he lay down to——
Some men, one night, drove their dog-teams into
Chinik. They had come from St. Michael, two
hundred miles over the trail. They said the captain
and his party left there many days before them,
and by this they were surely dead, unless drifted
out to sea, which really meant the same thing, as
no man could live upon the ice during the recent
great blizzard. An Eskimo woman heard what
they said. She was a cousin to Punni Churah, but
she said nothing.
An hour later, the woman and two men with
dogs and sleds left Chinik for the Portage, going
east. It was storming, but it was not dark, and
they knew each foot of the way. At first, on the
level, the woman rode in one of the sleds, but when
it grew hilly, she trudged behind. Her sharp eyes
now keenly searched every dark or obscure spot
along the hillside trail. The wind lessened somewhat,
and the moon came out behind the clouds.
The dogs finally stopped, throwing back their
heads and howling; then, in more excitement, gave
the short, quick bark of the chase.
The natives began poking about with sticks in
the drifts, and Mollie (for it was she) soon found
the unconscious man in the snow.[Pg 230]
Quick work then they made of the return trip.
They were only a few miles from home now, and
the malemutes seemed to comprehend. Every nerve
in their bodies tingled. Every tiny bell on their
harnesses jingled, and the fleet-footed natives sped
rapidly behind. The dogs needed no guidance, for
they were going home, and well knew it. The
voice of big Ituk, as he gave out his Eskimo calls,
the sleigh-bells, and the creak of the sled runners
over the frosty snow, were the only sounds heard
on the clear morning air.
The life of the captain was saved.
The sequel of his story is not long. With the
best care known to a native woman, brought up
near and inside a Mission station, the captain was
tended and brought back to life, though weeks
passed before he was well. In fact, he was never
strong again, and, needing a life-long nurse, decided,
with Mollie’s consent, to take her for his
wife, and so the missionary married them. Then
they settled permanently at Golovin Bay, where a
trading post was already established, and where
they are living happily to this day.
CHAPTER XVII.
HOW THE LONG DAYS PASSED.

N Saturday, November third, began a
great sewing of fur caps, children’s
clothes, and also garments for the
teacher. For the caps, a pattern had
to be made before beginning, but
Alma and not I did it. About four in
the afternoon Mr. H., Mr. G. and Mr.
B. came in from the Home, having
worked all day at collecting driftwood
as they came along, piling it upon end
so it will not be buried in the snow, for that is the
only fuel we will have this winter, and it must be
gathered and hauled by the boys.
While in the sitting room after supper three
gentlemen and the wife of one of them called to
spend the evening from the A. E. Company’s
establishment. One was the manager and head of
the company’s store here, another was his clerk,
and the man and his wife were neighbors.
We soon found out that the young clerk had
been up the Koyuk River prospecting, and wanted
to go again. The boys want to go there themselves,
and we gathered considerable information
from our callers regarding the country, manner of
getting there, the best route, etc., and spent a pleasant
evening, as they seemed also to do.[Pg 232]
Sunday, November fourth, was marked as the
first time of holding church service in the schoolhouse
since our arrival, and a good number were
present. Twenty-two Eskimos and ten white people
made a cozy little audience for Mr. H. and his
interpreter, Ivan. I played the organ, and they all
sang from Gospel songs. For some reason a
lump would come up in my throat when I played
the old home songs that I had so many times
played under widely differing circumstances, thousands
of miles away; but under the current of sadness
there was one also of thanksgiving for protection
and guidance all the way.
It was a motley crowd listening to the preacher
that day, from various and widely separated countries,
Sweden, Norway, Finland, United States,
Alaska and possibly some others, were represented
at this service as well as at the one of the evening
held in the Mission House which needed no extra
lights nor warming. A few more natives came in
at this time, and Mollie, the captain’s wife, was
there with her mother. Again I played the instrument,
while the rest sang. The little sitting-room
and hall were crowded, seats having been brought
in from the kitchen, and some were standing at
the doors. One old Eskimo woman seemed in
deep trouble, for she wiped her eyes a great deal,
and she, with some others, were very dirty, at least
if odors tell stories without lying.
Monday, November fifth: This has been a fine[Pg 233]
day, and brought with it a new lot of experiences.
I took a few kodak views of a dog-team and fur-dressed
people in front of the Mission. After supper
four neighbors came (the same who called on
us the other evening) with their horse to take us
out for a moonlight ride, and it proved a very novel
one. A big, grey horse, with long legs supporting
his great hulk, and carrying him away up above us
as we sat on the sled; the conveyance, a home-made
“bob” sled upon which had been placed
rough boards piled with hay and fur robes for the
comfort of passengers, and the harness home-made
like the “rig,” was ingeniously constructed of odds
and ends of old rope of different colors which the
men assured us, when interrogated upon the point,
were perfectly strong and secure.
In it were knots, loops, twists, and coils, with
traces spliced at great length in order to keep us
clear of the horse’s heels, but which frequently got
him entangled, so that he had to be released by the
footman (the clerk). When this occurred, the latter,
with an Indian war-whoop, leaped off the sledge,
flourished and cracked his big “black snake”
whip in air to encourage the animal to run faster,
and I, sitting with the driver on the front seat,
gripped for dear life the board upon which I sat.
No Jehu, I feel sure, ever drove as did our driver
tonight, assisted by the whooping footman with
his black snake. Through drifts and over the pond,
which was frozen, down steep banks to the beach,[Pg 234]
through snow deep and still deeper, helter-skelter
they drove, skurrying, shouting, urging the poor
beast on until he was wild of eye, short of breath,
weary in limb, and reeking.
Overhead the air was clear as crystal, stars
bright, and a perfect full moon shining with brilliant
whiteness over all. Only the jingle of the
bells upon the horse, the shrieks of our footman
and driver, and the laughter of the passengers on
the “bob” broke the stillness of the quiet, frosty
air, which, in its intense purity and lightness
seemed fairly to vibrate with electricity as we
breathed.
November sixth: I have spent the day at making
a warm winter hood for myself. Finding that
Mr. H. had grey squirrel skins, I bought six of
him for twenty-five cents apiece, for a lining for
hood and mittens. The hood I made pretty large
every way, sewing two red fox tails around the
face for a border to keep the wind off my face, as
is the Eskimo fashion.
During the day G. and B. went out over the
beach to collect driftwood for winter, and G. came
home finally without his companion. It was
thought that B. went on to the Home, as he found
himself not so far from that as from the Mission,
where he would probably remain all night, and
come over next day. Two natives, with as many
reindeer and sleds, came for flour and other things,
taking Mr. H.’s trunk of clothing with them for[Pg 235]
the missionary. The little Eskimos were delighted
to see the deer, and ran out to them, petting and
talking to them. Then they rattled on among
themselves about the animals, inspecting and feeling
of their horns, patting their fat sides, calling
their names, and showing their pleasure at seeing
the pretty creatures in various ways. I did not
know which were of most interest, the deer with
long, branching antlers, sleek spotted sides and
funny heads, or the group of odd little Eskimo
children, with their plump dark faces, dressed in
furry parkies and boots, tumbling gleefully around
in the snow.
Wednesday, November seventh: The weather
is beautifully clear and sunny today, with charming
sky effects at sunrise and sunset. Red, yellow and
crimson lines stretched far along the eastern horizon,
cut by vertical ones of lighter tints, until a
big golden ball climbed up higher, and by his increased
strength warmed the whole snowy landscape.
A few hours later, this great yellow ball,
looking bright and clear-cut, like copper, sank
gently beneath the long banks of purple-red clouds
massed in artistic and majestic confusion. Everything,
at this time, was enveloped in the cooler,
quieter tints of purple and blue, and hills, peaks,
and icy bay all lay bathed in exquisite color.
The two Eskimos brought the reindeer back
from the Home today, stopped for lunch, and then
went on their way to the herd again. Ricka, Alma[Pg 236]
and Miss J. went out as far as the cliff for a ride
on the sleds behind the deer, but I felt safer indoors.
Ricka says when the animals dashed over
the big bank, out upon the ice near the cliff, she
thought her last hour had come. At first the deer
trotted steadily along on the trail, but going faster
and faster they rushed headlong through the drifts,
dragging the sleds on one runner, and tearing up
the snow like a blizzard as they went, until it
seemed to the two girls, unused to such riding as
they were, that the animals were running away,
and they would be certainly killed.
Miss J. was quite used to this kind of traveling,
and made no outcry, but Alma and Ricka finally
got the natives to stop the deer and let them get
off and walk home, saying it might be great fun
when one was accustomed to it.
The sleds used by the natives are called reindeer
sleds because made especially for use when driving
deer. They are close to the ground, and very
strongly built, as they could not otherwise stand
the wear and tear of such “rapid transit.” Side
rails are put on, but no high handle-bar at the back,
and when a load is placed upon the sled it is lashed
securely on with ropes or thongs made of seal or
walrus hide; otherwise there would be no load before
the journey was completed.
Mr. H. says he has long experience with them,
but never feels quite sure that an animal will do
what is wanted of him, though when driven by natives
who are well used to their tricks and antics,[Pg 237]
especially if the animals have reached mature age,
they make good travelers, and get over the ground
very fast. A hundred miles a day is nothing to
them if the snow is not too deep and their load
reasonable.
Men and dog-teams are coming into camp from
Nome each day now, and say that the trails are in
first-class condition. We hope for mail soon from
Nome. Mr. H. came, bringing with him a Swedish
preacher who is wintering here, though not officially
connected with the Mission. He is a sweet
singer, liking well to accompany his Swedish songs
upon the guitar or organ, for he plays both instruments.
Mr. L. left at six in the morning for the Home,
walked there and back, and arrived at six in the
evening. He went to ask Mr. H. if he and the
others could have reindeer with which to go to
Koyuk River on a prospecting trip. He gave his
consent and they think of starting next week. They
think there may be some good creek up there that
would do to stake, and the clerk is going with
them.
We have jolly times each evening singing, visiting
and knitting. My black stocking grows under
my needles a few inches each day, and will be warm
and comfortable footwear under my muckluks
surely.
November eighth: Some ptarmigan were brought
in today, which are the first birds of the kind I have[Pg 238]
seen, and they are beautiful. They look like snow-white
doves, only larger, with silky feathers and
lovely wings. They are soon to be cooked, for
they are the Arctic winter birds and make good
eating. We are all blessed with ravenous appetites.
A man was killed with a club last night in a
drunken brawl, in a hotel near by. He only lived
a few hours after getting hurt, but it is said that
the other killed him in self defense. Both the
United States marshal and the commissioner were
away at the time. It is a pity they were not at
home, for the affair, perhaps, would then have been
prevented. There are probably not more than one
hundred white persons in the camp altogether, but
there must be fully half as many Eskimos, and they
are always coming and going. There are several
saloons (one kept by a woman), a large hotel and
one or two smaller ones, besides two or three company’s
stores and a few log cabins and native huts,
besides the Mission.
The boys want to get off as soon as possible for
Koyuk, but fear they will have to go to Nome for
camp stoves and pipe, as there are none to buy
here. They brought wood from the beach today
on the sleds, and there is no lack of fuel here, nor
of strong, willing arms to gather it. It seems a
long, long time to wait without hearing from the
home folks. I wonder how it seems to them. I
only wish they could see how comfortably and[Pg 239]
happily we are situated, and what jolly times we
have, for it would do their hearts good. Few are
so favored in all Alaska, of that I am certain.
Saturday, November tenth: I have sewed all
day on a canvas coat for Mr. B., Alma helping with
the cutting. He wants it to put on over his fur
parkie to keep the snow and rain off it, and has
himself made the loops and fastenings. He whittled
out the buttons from small pieces of wood,
twisted cord to loop over them, and put them all
firmly on the coat so that it looks well, and will
be serviceable. I put a good-sized hood of the
same, with a fur border around the face, on the
coat, and it will be a good garment to hunt ptarmigan
in, for it is the color of snow, and the birds
cannot see him.
The visiting preacher has had an experience in
being in the water, and from it has contracted
rheumatism in one limb, which he is nursing, so
he sits by the fire and plays and sings for us while
we sew. He is very pleasant, and all seem to like
him. The weather is not cold and Miss J. and Mr.
H. started out with reindeer for the Home at
seven in the morning. It was a singular sight to
see them when leaving. All the little natives in
fur parkies stood around, watching. The two
sleds were loaded with baggage, and Miss J. sat
on the top of one of them, holding the rope that
went under the body of the deer and around his
Head and horns for a harness. This deer was tied[Pg 240]
to the back of the sled in front of him, and Mr. H.
went ahead having hold of the rope that was fastened
to the first deer.
Sunday, November eleventh: We are having a
heavy and wet snow storm. All stayed in until
three in the afternoon, when we attended church
service in the schoolhouse. I played the organ,
the Swedish preacher read the Scriptures, and Ivan
interpreted. We sang hymns and songs, and the
hour was enjoyed by all, though the preacher did
not feel quite well enough acquainted with the English
to preach in that tongue, and Mr. H. was away.
There were about twenty natives present, and ten
or twelve white people, Miss E. remaining at home
to get the dinner. I went in thought over the great
waters to my southern home, where today the
churches are decorated with palms and floral beauties,
and I saw the friends in their accustomed
seats—but I was not there. Thousands of miles
away to the frozen north we have come, and little
do we know if we shall ever see home again. Tears
came to my eyes, but I kept them hidden, for none
shall say I am homesick; I am glad to be here. I
have faith to believe that the Father’s loving watch-care
will be still further extended, and I shall reach
my homeland and friends some time in the future.
November thirteenth: Weather is warm, wet,
and sunny. Water is running in the bay and snow
is soft under foot. I worked this afternoon on a
mitten pattern for myself, assisted by Alma. Evidently
pattern making was intended for others to[Pg 241]
do, for though my spirit is as willing as possible,
the flesh is very weak in that direction; but I did
finally get a mitten, thumb and all, that looks not
half bad. This was banner day for my laundry
work, and my handkerchiefs have been ironed for
the first time since I sailed from San Francisco.
Heretofore I was in luck to get a time and place
in which to wash them. At half-past four o’clock in
the afternoon, when it was too dark to sew longer,
Alma, Ricka and I went out upon the beach to
meet the boys who had been gathering wood, and
we walked a half mile over the rough trail of ice
blocks, drifts and hummocks.
We floundered on through all until we saw them
coming, and then sat resting on some logs until
they came up. Two of Mr. H.’s dogs, Fido and
Muckaleta, had followed us, and ran at our heels
playing in the snow, which was more than one
foot deep in places. The boys had found a long
ladder on the beach, probably from some wreck,
and they had brought it on the sled with the wood.
It was most difficult work hauling the sled over the
uneven trail, and all were puffing and perspiring
when they reached home.
A little prayer meeting was afterwards held in
the kitchen during which Mr. H. and Miss J.
came in from the Home with reindeer, tired and
hungry. We spent a pleasant evening visiting,
singing and knitting.
A man has come from Nome, and says that the[Pg 242]
steamer bringing Mission supplies from San Francisco
was obliged during the last hard storm to
throw some of its cargo overboard, and part of the
Mission’s stores were thus lost. All are sorry to
hear this, as it means a shortage of necessary
things, like furniture for the Home, where much is
needed.
November fourteenth: Miss J. has taken in two
more little Eskimos, a girl and a boy. First of all,
she cuts their hair close to their heads, then each
has a good bath in the tub, and they are dressed in
clean clothing from head to foot, and fed plentifully.
This was their program, and they look
very happy after it, and evidently feel as well and
look better. This boy seems to be about ten years
old, and the girl a little older, but it is not customary
among the Eskimos to keep account of
their ages, and so nobody really knows how old
any one is.
Alma has cut over a big reindeer skin parkie
for the visiting preacher, and a fur sleeping bag for
Miss J., while Ricka has made a fine cap for Mr.
H. of dog’s skin, lined with cloth. This morning
when the men went out to the hills where their two
reindeer had been tied in the moss, the animals
were gone, and Ivan returned fearing that they
had been stolen, but when Mr. H., G. and B.
went to look, they found no men’s footprints, and
concluded that they had broken away and gone
back to the herd, as their tracks went in that direction.[Pg 243]
Mr. H. went on after them, and the two
boys came home wet with perspiration from
floundering about in the deep, soft snow, and wearing
their heavy rubber boots. I gave them coffee
when they got back.
I have sewed on my new mittens, and done some
knitting, besides tending the baby, who runs
quickly from one thing to another like any other
mischievous child, getting into first one thing,
and then some other, which must be coaxed away
from her by management. I usually do this by
giving her some new plaything, if I can possibly
find any article she has never yet had. A box of
needles, buttons and thread she likes best of anything
I have yet found, and a grand reckoning
day will come before long when Alma finds the
little Eskimo has been amusing herself with her
property.
Mr. G. found a part of somebody’s outfit, consisting
of clothing and tin dishes, on the beach today.
Miss J. held a little meeting again in the
kitchen for the natives after supper, and is very
happy over having the two new little Eskimos.
This is our fourth week in the Mission, and pleasant
and happy ones they have been, at least, if
there have been vexations to some, they have succeeded
admirably in keeping them out of sight.
November fifteenth: The weather is still warm,
wet and slippery under foot. This morning a
young man called from Nome, with a letter from[Pg 244]
Mary, saying she is coming by dog-team as soon as
the trails are good.
The commissioner called today to get the
preacher to officiate at the funeral of the man who
was killed, but it was postponed until tomorrow,
because the grave could not be finished before
dark. The commissioner sat for half an hour,
and chatted in the sitting room.
November sixteenth: All hands are at work now
for the children, and overalls, waists and shirts for
the little boys as well as garments for the girls are
on the docket. The big boys fished, and got smelt
and tom-cod. B. sewed at mittens for himself,
and G. took the church organ to pieces to clean
and repair it. Mr. M., who has been at work on
the Home, has come here to spend the winter.
I wish he would set to work and catch some of the
mice which infest the house, and run over me
when I am asleep in the night time.
A meeting for the natives in the house again tonight,
and the doors had to be left open on account
of the pungent seal oil perfume from the
garments of the Eskimos.
The man who was killed was buried today in
the edge of the little graveyard on the hillside.
The Swedish preacher was asked to go to the
grave, and he did so, reading a Psalm, and offering
a prayer. Only four or five men were present.
It is a stony, lonely place, without a tree in
sight; the few scattering graves having only[Pg 245]
wooden slabs for head boards. Being just above
the beach, the spot commands a view of the bay
in front, but it is now all a snow and ice desert,
and the most dreary place imaginable. Very little
was known of the murdered man, and no good
could be said of him, but it is supposed that he
has a wife and children somewhere.
What a dreadful ending! Will his family ever
know what has become of him, and is his mother
still living? If so, I hope they may never learn
of his horrid death and worthless life in Alaska.
He was never conscious for a moment after being
hurt, so they know nothing as to where to write to
his relatives. It makes one shudder to think of it!
He may have been a good and bright child, beloved
by parents and brothers, but the drink curse
claimed him for its own.
The weather is clear, with sunshine and frost.
The visiting preacher has been making himself useful
for a few days by helping us in cutting out overalls
and blouses for the Eskimo boys. Down on
his knees upon the floor, with shears, rolls of
denim, and a pair of small trousers to pattern by,
he has wielded the little steel instrument to good
purpose, and encouraged and assisted us greatly.
With their new clothes, the children are all quite
well pleased, for they are fresh and sweet. The
missionaries are trying very hard to teach them
cleanliness among other things, and they sometimes
come and stand in the doorway and look at[Pg 246]
us sewing, their faces always good natured, and
showing more or less curiosity. When told to
run away to play, they obey quickly, and little Pete
and the others like to keep the wood boxes filled
to help us. The older girls being from ten to
twelve years of age, are often caring for and amusing
Bessie, and she is fond of them, until, like any
other child, she cannot have her own way, and
then she disapproves of them by kicking and
screaming till Miss J. comes to settle the business.
CHAPTER XVIII.
SWARMING.

RCTIC explorers have always found it
a difficult matter to keep pleasantly
and profitably employed during the
long winter months, and I have often
wondered how it would be with ourselves.
So far, there seems to be no
scarcity of employment for all hands,
neither is there any prospect of it.
For the men there is always the beach-wood
to collect, haul and saw up into
firewood, not to mention the splitting with an
axe, which is, I believe, as hard work as any of
it, and there is water to bring in barrels each day
or two from Chinik Creek, a mile away, for drinking
and cooking purposes. The barrels are put
upon sleds and hauled by the men themselves, or
by the dogs if they happen to be here, and are not
at work. As to the reindeer, of course there can
be no such thing as making them haul either wood
or water, for none could be found steady enough,
and should the experiment be tried, there are ten
chances to one that not a stick of wood would remain
upon the sleds, nor a drop of water in the
barrels, while the distance between creek and
Mission was being made.[Pg 248]
Of course there is always enough for women to
do if they are housekeeping, and with sewing, knitting
and what recreation we take out of doors, we
fill in the time very well. It is much better and
pleasanter to be employed, and the time passes
much more rapidly than when one is idle, and I
for one enjoy the change of work and the winter’s
outlook immensely. Compared to what we have
done in Nome during the summer, this is child’s
play, and the boys who have worked at real mining
say the same thing.
November seventeenth: We have had our first
lady visitor today who came from White Mountain
about fifteen miles away. She is the lady
doctor who brought Miss J. through typhoid fever
last fall, and is much at home here. She was sent
for by a sick woman in the hotel, and will spend the
night with Miss J., who is very kind to her. The
visiting preacher left for the Home this morning
very early, going with a native and reindeer. Mr.
L. and B. were called in to the jury trial of the
murderer who killed the man in the hotel the other
night, and they got home late. The girls were out
upon the ice in the evening for exercise, getting
tired of being indoors all day long, and needing
fresh air. When all were in at half-past eleven in
the evening, coffee and crackers were taken by all
but me, but I have had to leave off drinking coffee,
taking hot water with cream and sugar instead. B.
says he thinks the latter too stimulating.
This has been a bright and cold Sunday for
November eighteenth. Mr. H. walked in to nine
o’clock breakfast from the Home, coming by dog-team,
and looked well dressed and smiling. No
service was held until evening, so we went out for
a walk upon the hill behind the house. B. and L.
left us to go and examine some wood that natives
were hauling away from the beach, thinking it was
some of theirs, for each stick is marked, so they
know their own; but it proved not to be their wood,
and the two then came home another way.
While out, we walked through the small burial
ground, and saw the new-made grave of the murdered
man. O, how desolate was that spot! A
few mounds, stones, snow and bleak winds forever
blowing. Here we read a headboard, upon which
was the name and age of good old Dr. Bingham
of New England, who died here years ago, and
whose wife planted wild roses upon the grave. I
wonder if we will see them in bloom next summer,
or will we be under the snow ourselves like these
others.
For our dinner today we ate fried tom-cod,
baked potatoes, tomatoes, pickles, bread and butter,
and rice pudding. I feel positive that nothing
could have tasted better to our home folks in the
States who have more fruit and vegetables than
did this plain and homely meal to us, eaten with
the heartiest appetites gotten out of doors while
walking in the snow. The ice in the bay is getting[Pg 250]
firmer, and will continue to grow thicker all winter,
being in the spring at breaking-up time many feet
through, no doubt, as it was in Minnesota in the
Red River of the North when I lived there. I
am glad that I am a cold climate creature, and was
born in winter in a wintry state, for I will be
sure to endure Alaska weather better than I otherwise
would.
This evening we had service again in the church
or schoolhouse, and the room was quite filled.
The woman doctor was there, also the storekeeper
and the United States Marshal, besides our own
family, and a good many natives. Mr. H.
preached, and was interpreted in Eskimo as usual.
I wish some of my fastidious friends on the outside
could have seen the cosmopolitan company of
tonight.
The refined and serious face of the storekeeper,
the black-eyed doctor (woman), the fair-faced
Swedes, and the square-jawed, determined official,
made a striking contrast to the Eskimos dressed in
fur parkies, and smelling of seal oil. Many of the
latter continually carry small children on their
backs underneath their parkies, a heavy belt or
girdle of some sort keeping the youngster from
falling to the ground, but the smaller ones are seldom
brought out in the evening. These women
squat upon the floor as often as they sit upon a
chair, and when a baby cries from hunger he is
promptly fed on ahmahmuk, (mother’s milk,) regardless[Pg 251]
of the assembled company. With an
Eskimo mother nothing comes before the child’s
wishes, and if the latter only succeeds in making
his desires known to her, she will obey them to the
letter. That there are unruly Eskimo youngsters,
goes without saying, as a child does not need a
white skin to help him understand this, and arrange
his tactics accordingly.
The Mission is crowded to its utmost, but I believe
the hearts of the good missionaries are made
of elastic.
When we reached the house after service this
evening we heard that a mail was expected, and
would leave for Dawson tomorrow, so we set to
work to write letters, and then found it all a mistake,
for it is only going to Nome from Unalaklik,
and we were all disappointed.
The weather today, November seventeenth, is
a great surprise to us. It is raining, and so icy
underfoot as to be positively dangerous to life and
limb. I had occasion to go out for a while this
forenoon, and knew no better than to wear my
muckluks, which are smooth as glass on the
bottoms. To make things more lively, the wind
blew a gale from the northeast.
When I left the house, I was going in the same
direction as the wind, and though I nearly fell
many times I kept stubbornly on, determined not
to be vanquished. On my return—then came the
“tug of war.” Near the warehouse a gust of[Pg 252]
wind took me unawares, and, whisk! in a minute
I was sprawling flat upon the ice. I had gone out
with my Indian blanket over my head and shoulders,
and this blew out like a sail, upsetting my tall
and slippery footed craft, and bumping me ignominiously.
I now tried to rise, but could not. Turn as I
would, using my hands to steady me, I only made
a vain effort to get upon my feet, as I slipped
each time quite flat again. Thinking to turn
first, and get upon my knees, I tried that, but
rolled like a fuzzy caterpillar in a ball upon the
ice. Then, alas, I regret to relate it, but I really
began to feel a little vexed. I began calling loudly,
supposing that someone in the house would hear
me, and come to my assistance; but the wind carried
my voice away faster than I could throw it,
and that availed me nothing. At no other time
since my arrival at the Mission I felt certain had
there been so long a lull between the passing of its
inmates through its doors; but now, because of my
present strait, they all remained indoors.
In the meantime I had thrown my hands out
suddenly into water which stood in little pools in
depressions of the ice around me, and I lay there
getting more vexed than ever. Again I tried to
rise, but failed. A stranger would suppose me
tipsy, to be sure, and I glanced around to make
certain no one saw me. Finally the door opened,
and Miss L. came out.[Pg 253]
“What is the matter?” and she began laughing
at my predicament.
“Matter enough!” I shouted. “Can’t you see?
I can’t get up to save my life. Do come and help
me,” and I began struggling upon my slippery bed
again to convince her.
Still she only laughed, standing in the wind with
her hands upon her hips in order to keep her balance.
“Do come and help me,” I begged, “or go in
and send one of the boys, for I shall stay here all
day if you do not.”
When she had her laugh out, she came forward
and assisted me to my feet, and into the house,
where I finally smoothed my ruffled feathers, and
recovered my equanimity, telling Miss L. I would
pay her back in her own coin when I got the
opportunity.
A native has come with reindeer to carry a load
of goods to the Home, but cannot leave on account
of the icy trail until tomorrow, or whenever it
freezes again.
Today is November twenty-first, and the weather
is still soft and bad under foot, so the family cannot
move to the Home until the trail is in better
condition. B. shot more ptarmigan, and we had a
dinner of them, which was excellent. They almost
seem too pretty to kill, but fresh meat is
scarce nowadays, and we must take it when we can
get it.[Pg 254]
November twenty-second has come, and with
it colder weather. It is five degrees below zero,
and the sun shines. The doctor from White Mountain
has been helping Miss J. pack her large medicine
chest ready for moving, as many of these supplies
will be left in this house.
Since the days are colder we have most beautiful
skies at sunrise, though we now keep the lamps
burning until half-past eight in the morning.
We have heard that the Nome mail is in, but it
brought nothing to me. We are writing letters
to send out the first chance we get, whenever that
will be, but nobody knows so far.
The Commissioner called today and told us of a
new strike at the headwaters of Fish River; a
man and woman coming down to record a bunch of
twenty claims having given the information. The
woman runs a roadhouse on the Neukluk River,
and wants to take an Eskimo boy to raise, and
teach to work—probably it is mostly the latter,
though she seemed a kindly person. Miss J. told
her that she had no boy to give away.
The Marshal and the man in the old schoolhouse
started with dogs to Norton Bay today
for a short trip, so we hear. The wife of the man
went with small Eskimo boys to the bay to fish
for tom-cod.
Alma is making a fur sleeping bag of reindeer
skins for the teacher, so when she travels she can[Pg 255]
have it to sleep in nights. It is very heavy to
hold and handle while sewing.
Two men called who have been shipwrecked in
Norton Bay, and told of the H. family, consisting
of the father, mother, and little daughter whom
I have seen in Nome. They lost all their clothing,
but saved part of their “grub,” and we have made
up a package of clothing to send to the woman and
child by the men who are going back there. In
the darkness, one night, they say the schooner
“Lady George” went aground on the mud flats of
Norton Bay, the tide rising soon after, and all having
to flee for their lives to nearby ice, from which
they went ashore to a log hut long ago deserted.
The child, who is about twelve years old, is now
without clothing, and winter is coming on.
The fates are hard on some people, surely, and
this little girl lately from San Francisco, the public
school, and piano lessons, is left with her parents
in an Arctic wilderness in winter without clothing
or shelter, except a poor broken hut, and a few
men’s garments generously donated. The men
say that her mother is almost wild over it, and
they thought at first that she would go insane,
but the brave little child does all she can do to
comfort her mother, and the men begged us to
send them some things. Among the clothing we
sent I put in a few school books, a slate, some
pencils, and a Bible, which may be of use in lonely[Pg 256]
hours. They may read the good book now if they
never have before. They are Swedish people.
It is three degrees below zero today, November
twenty-fifth, clear, bright and cold. Mr. H. came
with a man and his dog-teams to move the whole
family tomorrow to the Home. All are delighted
to go there, as we are to remain here. The shipwrecked
men called again to tell us more fully
about their experiences, and are now going back
to their camp. They certainly had an awful time,
but they are glad and thankful to have come out
alive, and we are also glad for their sakes.
Two of the Commissioners have been here, one
from fifty miles away, wanting to buy a reindeer for
his Thanksgiving dinner, but Mr. H. would not
sell one. He has been very urgent, and called a
number of times, but Mr. H. is firm in refusing.
Our good dinner today was made up of mutton
stew with onions, baked potatoes, tomatoes, fruit
soup, bread, butter and coffee. I have taken a
few kodak views today of Miss J. and the Eskimo
baby, Bessie, and hope they will be good.
November twenty-sixth: It is ten degrees below
zero, but the whole household was up early this
morning to move over the ice to the new Home.
Four big dog sleds were piled high with household
things, the baby was tucked into a fur sleeping-bag
with only her head out, at which she howled lustily,
Miss J. running beside the team to comfort her,
while Mr. H., his assistant and Ivan, with Mr. G.[Pg 257]
of our party, ran ahead of the dogs. Breakfast
was eaten at eight o’clock in the morning, and all
was hurly burly and excitement till they had gone.
Ricka, Alma and I ran out to the beach to see them
off upon the ice, as then they would have fair
traveling, but we were afraid they would tip everything
over at the bank where the drifts are high,
and blocks of ice piled in places. Everything was
lashed tightly down, however, and no accident occurred.
All the children but Bessie ran alongside
the sleds to keep warm, and they had lunches with
them to eat when they were hungry. When the
smaller ones grew tired, I suppose they rode for a
while on the sleds. It was eleven o’clock in the
morning, and the bright sun shone directly in our
faces as we stood waving good-bye to them, really
sorry to see them leave us. The hills, almost bare
of snow, lay pink and lovely under the sunshine.
After lunch M. went out, slipped on the ice and
fractured his collar bone. The Dawson man in the
old schoolhouse, (who claims to be a doctor),
brought him indoors, but poor M. was pretty pale.
The man, with G.’s help, attended to his hurt, put
his arm in a sling, and he is lying on the lounge
looking serious, but not discontented nor suffering
severely.
We were not to have so small a family many
hours, as we found at about five o’clock in the afternoon
today, when there was a great commotion
at the door. There were men’s voices, a woman’s[Pg 258]
jolly laughter, and the quick barking of dogs, glad
to reach their journey’s end, and when we opened
the door to those knocking, there were Mary and
two friends from Nome with their dog-teams. In
they came, laughing, talking and brushing the frost
off their parkies, glad to get here, and hungry from
traveling, so we gave them a warm welcome, and
good hot coffee and supper.
Then Mary, (real Viking that she is, and from
Tromso, in Norway,) related the story of her journey
by dog-team. Eighty-five miles, they call it,
from Nome by water to Chinik, but overland it is
probably farther. Nights were spent in the roadhouses,
she said, but there was little sleep to be
had in them, for they were crowded and noisy,
and she was thankful the trip was now ended, and
she had safely arrived.
The two young men who came with her seem
nice, honest fellows, and I am acquainted with one
of them from seeing him at the “Star” many times,
where he often ground coffee to help evenings,
or chatted in the kitchen when we worked.
From Nome they had brought two sled loads,
on one of them a cook stove for the winter, as the
big range in use here now will go later to the
Home, besides which they had food supplies and
stove pipes.
At night Mr. L. came back from the reindeer
station, saying that they can have four reindeer[Pg 259]
for their prospecting trip to the Koyuk River, and
they are making up their party to go there.
November twenty-seventh: I was washing the
dishes this morning in the kitchen, when Mr. L.
came quietly to say he will take my attorney paper
and stake a gold claim for me. He will do his
best, he says, for me as well as the others, for
which I cordially thanked him, and flew on wings
to get the desired paper made out, as the others
were also doing.
At half-past three o’clock in the afternoon today
the lamps were lighted, and at four o’clock in
the afternoon a mail got in from Nome, but
brought no letters for me, as all steamers have long
since stopped running, and I am not corresponding
with any one at Nome. I wonder when I will
hear from my home folks?
Our legal documents cost us each $2.50.
November twenty-eighth: This has been a fine
day out of doors, and a busy one indoors. Mr.
H. with a man and two natives came with the dog-teams
to take what household stuff they could
carry, and they took the organ with the rest. I
hated to see it go, but we are to have the one in
the church, which G. has just cleaned and brought
into the house, as the frost in that building is bad
for it. They loaded their sleds, then ate a lunch at
half-past eleven o’clock in the morning, and
started. The two boys from Nome also left for
that place, they being quite rested, as well as their[Pg 260]
dogs. Drilling parkies they wore to “mush” in,
their furs and other traps being lashed to the sleds;
and bidding us good-bye, one ran ahead, and the
other behind the dogs.
CHAPTER XIX.
NEW QUARTERS.

FTER thinking for some time of doing
so, I finally decided to call at the hotel
and ask the captain and his wife if I
might not teach their little black-eyed
girl English, as Miss J.’s leaving deprives
her of a teacher. The woman
was not in when I called, but the child’s
father seemed to think favorably of my
plan, and said he would consult with
his wife, so I hope to get the child for
a pupil.
B. and G. have moved all their things into the
house from the schoolroom, and Ricka hung the
clothes she has been all day washing out there to
dry. There is a small stove in which a fire is often
made to dry them more quickly. It is most convenient
to have such a place for drying clothes, as
it is impossible to get them dry outside on the lines
in the frost and snow.
We spent the evening pleasantly together in the
sitting room, listening to B.’s jokes, and Mary’s
stories of Nome and the “trail.”
For our Thanksgiving dinner we had canned
turkey, potatoes, tomatoes, pickles, fruit, soup,
bread, butter, and coffee, trying hard not to think[Pg 262]
of our home friends and their roast turkeys and
cranberries. However, the dinner was a good one
for Alaska, eaten with relish, and all were jolly
and very thankful, even M., with his sore collar-bone,
laughing with the rest.
November thirtieth: Mr. H. came with a man,
two natives, seven reindeer and four sleds to take
more furniture away. They all ate dinner here,
and I took some kodak views of the animals with
Alma, Ricka, Mary, G. and a native driver in the
sunshine in front of the Mission. Mary goes up
to the animals and pets them, as does Ricka, but I
keep a good way off from their horns, as they look
ugly, and one old deer has lost his antlers, with
the exception of one bare, straight one a yard
long, which, with an angry beast behind it, would,
however, be strong enough to toss a person in mid-air
if the creature was so minded.
There has been some hitch in the arrangements
of the men going to the Koyuk River, and there is
a delay, but they will get off some day, because L.
never gives up anything he attempts to do, and I
like him for that. If more people were like this,
they being always certain that they were started
in the right direction, the world would be the
better for it.
December first: Mr. B. is making bunks in two
rooms upstairs, as the house is so full all the time.
This will give quite a little more lodging room,
for cots cannot be provided for all, neither is there[Pg 263]
room for so many, but with bunks, one above another,
it will furnish lodgings for all who come.
Our two fisher women went out again this afternoon,
and got tom-cod through the ice by the cliff,
near the snow-buried river steamers.
About four o’clock in the afternoon I called on
the captain’s wife, and found her sewing furs. For
her helper she had her cousin Alice, the coy, plump
Eskimo girl, who traveled to San Francisco with
her last year. Both women sat upon fur rugs on
the floor, as is their custom when sewing, and
they were sorting bright beads, and cutting moosehide
into moccasins and gauntlet gloves, to be
decorated with beads in the fashion of the Yukon
River Indians.
I had no difficulty in arranging for lessons with
the captain’s wife, who would also study with her
little girl, she said, and she showed me school
books, slates, etc., they had already been using.
If their piano were only here, the child, who is a
pretty little thing, with a sweet smile, might take
music lessons, but it cannot be brought over the
winter trail.
We had snow today, but no church service. We
rested, sang, read, ate and slept. A fine dinner of
reindeer roast, with good gravy, mashed potatoes,
etc., for our two o’clock meal, was eaten and well
relished; but in spite of all the day seemed a long
one for some reason. We wonder how things are
going on the outside and if the friends we love[Pg 264]
but cannot hear from are well, happy, and think
sometimes of us.
The Commissioner came to say that he would
bring the Recorder, or Commissioner, from the
Koyuk district with him to call this evening, and
he did so. The latter is a middle-aged man, whose
family lives in Minneapolis, Minnesota, he himself
being a native born Norwegian, but having lived
in the States for twenty years. They brought two
United States marshals with them, and one of them
played on the guitar quite well, though I thought
I detected a scent of the bottle when he sang his
songs. He has a good voice, but untrained.
Yesterday it was fifteen degrees below zero, but
grew warmer toward night, and began snowing.
Today it snowed quite hard until dark. Along the
shore huge blocks of ice lay heaped promiscuously,
and deep drifts rolled smoothly everywhere. When
I grew tired walking I stopped a moment and listened.
There was no sound but the beating of my
own heart. This then was our new Arctic world.
How wonderfully beautiful it was in its purity and
stillness. Look whichever way I would, all was
perfect whiteness and silence. When I walked the
snow scarcely creaked under my feet. Above, beneath,
around, it was everywhere the same. It was
a solemn stillness, but ineffably sweet and tender.
It was good to live. A feeling of sweetest peace
and happiness swept over me, and tears sprang to
my eyes. Was this heaven? It almost seemed like[Pg 265]
it, but glancing toward the grave of the murdered
man on the hillside I remembered that this could
not be. Farther down the shore line, when I
started to go home, I saw the smoke of the cabins,
through the veil of the snowflakes.
While giving Jennie her lessons this afternoon
the Commissioner came in to say that he would like
me to do some copying for him, for as yet he has
no clerk, and needs one. I told him I would do
the work if I might take it home, and could get a
quiet corner by myself. I hardly see how I am to
manage that while there are so many people in the
house, but I shall try it, for I would like to earn
the money.
This morning it was three degrees above zero;
yesterday it was fifteen below.
A full moon hung high in the sky this morning
until nine o’clock. Weather is warm and beautiful,
with rosy clouds at sunrise, but it grew colder by
noon.
Among other things Mary has brought from
Nome is her little hand sewing machine, which is
an old-fashioned thing, to be fastened to a table
and the wheel turned by hand. It was brought from
the old country, and looks quite well worn, but is
still useful and far better than no machine, if it
does have a chain stitch which is liable to rip easily.
We have a lot of amusement with this machine, for
when Alma is sewing and one of the boys happens
to be idle about her she makes him turn the wheel[Pg 266]
while she guides the cloth and watches the needle.
Others besides myself are wearing muckluks by
this time, though not all have come to them, the
felt shoes being worn in the house some by the girls
until severe cold forces them into the native boots
of reindeer skin.
In her rooms at the hotel Mollie sits with Alice
each day on the fur rugs, cutting, sewing and beading
moccasins and moosehide gloves. A regular
workshop it is. Boxes of thread, beads, scraps of
fur, whole otter skins, paper patterns, shears, bits
of hair and fur scattered upon the floor, and the
walls covered with hanging fur garments; this is
the sewing-room of the captain’s wife as it is now
each day when I go there. The room contains two
large windows, one on the north side and one on
the west, at which hang calico curtains tied back
with blue ribbons in daytime. These women work
very rapidly, with the thimble upon the first finger
and by pushing the three-cornered skin needle
deftly through skins they are sewing. The thread
they use for this work is made by them from the
sinews of reindeer, and takes hours of patient picking
and rolling between fingers and palms to get
spliced and properly twisted, but when finished is
very strong and lasting. Their sewing and bead
work is quite pretty and unique, and is done with
exceeding neatness and care, though not much attention
is bestowed upon colors.
Friday, December seventh, has been a busy day[Pg 267]
all round. L. and B. started off early after breakfast
on a prospecting trip, and the girls kept at
their sewing. Mr. H. came from the Home to get
the sewing machine and some lumber, and was
packing up nearly all day, so that we are still quite
unsettled, but it is much pleasanter for him to come
to a warm house and where he gets hot meals after
his twelve miles over the ice with the deer or dogs.
He left here at four in the afternoon and had
been gone only an hour when Mr. F. and another
man came from Nome, on the way to the Koyuk.
Getting well warmed and eating a hearty supper,
which was much enjoyed after some days on the
trail, they started with two reindeer and as many
sleds for the Home, which is on the way to Koyuk.
Another hour passed and two women and their
guide from White Mountain came in, these belonging
to the same party as the last men going to the
Koyuk, and these three had to remain over night
as it was too late to push on further. The men
brought their fur robes and blankets from their
sleds, threw them into the bunks in the west room,
and called it a good lodging place compared to the
cramped and disorderly roadhouses upon the
trails.
December eighth: We had a fire fright this
morning, which was not enjoyed by any one in the
Mission. Mary had gotten up early, and two fires
were already going, one in the kitchen range and
one in the sitting room heater near my bed. It was[Pg 268]
still dark at half-past seven and I was awake, thinking
seriously of dressing myself, though there was
no hurry, for Mary was the only one yet up, when
I saw a shower of large sparks of fire or burning
cinders falling to the ground outside the window.
I rushed into the kitchen telling Mary what I had
seen, and she ran outside and looked up toward the
chimney. Fire, smoke and cinders poured out in
a stream, but she satisfied herself it was soot burning
in the sitting-room chimney.
Coming in, she pulled most of the wood from the
heater, scattered salt upon the coals, and by this
time all in the house were down stairs, asking what
had happened.
M. says he will also take my attorney paper and
stake a claim for me, as he has decided to go to
the Koyuk with the men who came last night from
Nome. They have a horse, but as it is almost worn
to the bone and nearly starved, they hardly think
he can travel much farther. M. wants me to get
him some location notices from the Commissioner
when I see him. When coming home from Jennie’s
lesson this afternoon I was turning the corner of
the hotel when the wind took me backward toward
the bay for thirty feet or more, and deposited me
against an old wheelbarrow turned bottom upwards
in the snow. To this I clung desperately, keeping
my presence of mind enough to realize my danger
if blown out upon the ice fifty feet away and below
me, where I would be unable to make myself either[Pg 269]
seen or heard in the blinding storm and would
soon be buried in the snow drifts and frozen.
In my right hand I carried my small leather handbag
containing a dozen or more deeds and other
documents to be recorded for the Commissioner,
and if the wind blew this from my hand for an instant
I was surely undone, for it would never be
recovered. I now clung to the barrow until I had
regained my breath and then made a quick dash
for the lee or south side of the hotel out of the gale,
and into the living-room again. Here I sat down
to rest, trembling and breathless, to consider the
best way to get home. It was now dark, the snow
blinding, and the gale from the northeast fearful.
A stout young Eskimo sat near me, and I finally
asked him to take me home, to which he consented.
The Mission was only a few hundred feet away,
but to reach it we had to go directly into the teeth
of the storm, which was coming from the northeast.
Not six feet ahead of us could we see, but I
trusted to the sense of my Eskimo guide to lead
me safely home, and he did it. Motioning me to
follow him, he proceeded to pass through the building
and out the east end entrance, notwithstanding
that he led me directly through the bar-room of the
hotel, where the idlers stared wonderingly at me.
Once outside the door, he grasped my right arm
firmly and we started, but he kept his body a little[Pg 270]
ahead of me, and with side turned from the blizzard
instead of facing it.
In this sidelong way we struggled on with all
our strength, through snow drifts, against the elements
in the darkness, with breath blown from our
bodies, and eyes blinded by whirling snow. Now
and again I was forced to stop to gain breath for
a fresh struggle, and when we reached the Mission
we staggered into the door as if drunken. I now
found that all my clothing was blown so full of fine
snow that the latter seemed fairly a part of the
cloth, would not be shaken out, and only a thorough
drying would answer. A good, hot cup of
coffee was handed to each of us, and my Eskimo
guide sat until rested, but I think I shall take
Alma’s sage advice, and in future remain at home
during blizzards.
Of course M. and the other men could not leave
for the Koyuk as they intended, but they do not
appear to be discontented at having to remain under
our roof longer, as they seem to be enjoying
themselves very well, and say it is all really home-like
here in the Mission.
I am working on the Recorder’s books, and like
the work fairly well.
This is a stormy Sunday, December ninth, but
the weather is not so bad as yesterday, and B. and
L. came back from the Home. We have eight men
here today, including the two young fellows who
have been at work on the Home building, and who[Pg 271]
came over from Nome weeks before the rest of us.
This is the first time they have been here since we
arrived. They, too, are Swedes, as are all these
men but M., who is a Finlander.
For dinner we had reindeer roast with flour
gravy, potatoes, plum butter, rye and white bread
and butter, coffee and tapioca pudding. The potatoes
taste pretty sweet from being frozen, but are
better than none. We have had music from the
guitar, mandolin and organ, besides vocal exercise
without limit, and with all this I found time to do
some Sunday reading in Drummond’s Year Book,
and have well enjoyed the day.
The thermometer registers thirteen degrees below
zero, and at half-past eight in the evening the
wind was not blowing much; enough blizzard for
this time certainly.
While talking with one of the men from Nome
I asked if he supposed there was gold in the Koyuk
country, and he thought there was. As he was up
there all last summer, he ought to know the prospects.
It appears that there is a split in his party,
or a disagreement of some kind, as is quite the
fashion in Alaska, and some of the men are to remain
behind. As soon as the weather clears sufficiently
they will go to the Home, and from there
leave for Koyuk River.
Monday, December tenth: The Commissioner,
the Marshal, and three of their friends came in to
spend the evening with us, and one of the strangers[Pg 272]
sang well, accompanying himself on the organ. He
also belongs to a party made up to go to Koyuk,
but failed to reach that point, and they are staying
in Chinik.
I bought two red fox skins today for ten dollars,
but will have to pay five dollars more for their
cleaning by a native woman, to whom I have given
them for that purpose. It is the only kind of fur
I can find of which to make a coat, and I must
have one of skins, as the wind goes straight
through cloth, no matter how thick it is.
Six of our household went out today to get wood
with the old horse and sled, but the poor creature
would not go, probably because it could not. They
had to unload a good many times and were gone
five hours. Alma and Ricka went with the four
boys for an outing, but all came home tired and
voting the horse a great failure.
This morning our house was astir very early,
and the men were getting ready to “mush on”
towards the Koyuk. Mr. L. goes with the Marshal,
the clerk, and two others, taking seven dogs
and sleds loaded with provisions. It is a sight to
see the preparations. There are sacks of frozen
tom-cod for the dogs, tents, Yukon stoves, tin
dishes, snow shoes, sleeping bags and robes, coffee
pots, axes, picks, gold pans and boxes, cans and
bags of grub, ad infinitum.
G. and B. stay behind to make another camp[Pg 273]
stove but will leave soon for Nome. B. cleaned his
gun today, and looked after his ammunition.
Wednesday, December twelfth: Our sunset was
very lovely today at one in the afternoon, and at
three o’clock, when I began with little Jennie’s lessons,
we had to light the lamp. I usually go into
the sewing-room for a little while either before or
after the lesson to watch the women sew furs.
Alice, the younger, is as quiet as a mouse, but
the captain’s wife is a little more talkative, though
not particularly given to conversation. Now and
then, while she sews, something is said with which
she does not agree, and she bites her thread off
with a snap, with some terse remark offsetting the
other, or with a bit of cynicism, which, with a quick
glance of her black eyes and curl of the lip, is well
calculated to settle forever the offender; for the
captain’s wife is as keen as a briar, and reads human
nature quickly. I should say she is gifted
with wonderful intuitive powers, and these have
been sharpened by her constant effort to understand
the words and lives of those around her,
these being to such an extent English speaking
people, while she is an Eskimo. Let none flatter
themselves that they can deceive Mollie, for they
would better abandon that idea before they begin.
She impresses me as a thoroughly good and honest
woman, and I am getting to respect her greatly.
Two of the boys from the Home spent the night
in the Mission, and helped with sawing wood all[Pg 274]
forenoon today. They went from Nome to assist
at building the Home, and came over here for the
first time yesterday. They are jolly fellows, and
used often to assist us in the “Star” at Nome,
one always lightening our load of work by his
cheery voice and pleasant, hopeful smile. He, too,
is a sweet singer, and a great favorite with all.
After a lunch they started to mush back to the
Home over the ice, promising to come again at
Christmas. B. and G. finally got started on their
long, cold trip to Nome on business.
CHAPTER XX.
CHRISTMAS IN ALASKA.

HURSDAY, December thirteenth:
The old Eskimo whom I call “grandpa”
came from the Home with one of
Mr. H.’s assistants for a load of supplies
for the place, and arrived in time
for breakfast at half-past nine. They
loaded up the sleds, took hot coffee,
and started back at eleven in the morning.
Mr. M. came back alone before
noon, having given up his trip to the
Koyuk because his shoulder hurts him. The old
horse had finally to be killed, and Mr. M. decided
that he did not want to take his place at hauling,
so turned back after selling part of his supplies to
the others. The weather is fine indeed. A little
snow is falling this afternoon, but there was a beautiful
sky at sunrise and sunset, the latter at half-past
one o’clock.
While giving Jennie her lesson today I was introduced
for the first time to little Charlie, who spends
a good deal of time with Jennie. He is four years
old, and a bright and beautiful child. His papa is
an Englishman, and his Eskimo mother is dead.
After the lesson I read stories to the two children,
holding the little boy upon my lap, while Jennie sat[Pg 276]
beside us in the lamplight, her big black eyes shining
like stars. She wore a brown serge dress,
trimmed with narrow red trimming, her hair neatly
braided in two braids down her back, and tied with
red ribbons. Both children wore little reindeer
muckluks on their feet, the boy being dressed in
flannel blouse waist and knee pants. They are a
very pretty pair of children.
Such a charming, soft-tinted, red, purple and blue
sky today, stretching along in bars above the snow-topped
mountains. It makes one glad to be here,
and feel full of pity for those who cannot enjoy it
with us. It is good to enjoy everything possible
as one goes along, for nobody knows how long
anything will hold out and what will come next.
At noon two hungry Eskimo children came, dirty,
forlorn and cold, and we fed them.
Mr. H. came again toward evening with reindeer
to get a load of supplies, and the girls and M. went
fishing. They had great sport, all dressed in fur,
with short fish poles, hooks, bait and gunny sack
for the game, coming in frosty and rosy after dark,
and calling for hot coffee.
I am quite interested in getting the fox skins for
my coat. I have paid the Eskimo girl five dollars
for tanning my fur skins, and hope to have a warm
coat. My first three skins cost me twelve dollars,
the next two ten dollars, and now five dollars for
tanning, but I have a lining, and Mollie will make
it for me next week.[Pg 277]
After supper we had a caller who has been here
once before with others. He is a finely trained
baritone singer, and comes from one of the Southern
States. He sang and played entertainingly on
the organ for an hour, while we sewed and knitted
as we do each evening.
Saturday, December fifteenth: Eight weeks today
since we landed at Golovin Bay. Weather
good, skies beautiful, but days are short. Sunset
at half-past one in the afternoon; sunrise about ten
in the morning.
The Commissioner came with legal documents
and customary jokes, and I try to get the copying
done in between times. He is going to Nome for
Christmas, and wants the papers all finished before
he leaves. He is considered a very “rapid” young
man, and looks like it.
Sunday, December sixteenth: We had breakfast
today at sunrise (ten in the morning) and I
went for a walk alone upon the ice in a southerly
direction, where the natives were fishing. There
was a good trail which has been made by a horse-team
hauling wood from the other shore, and the
air was fine, so that I enjoyed it very much, though
my hood was soon frosty around my face. For a
while I watched the natives haul tom-cod up
through the ice holes, but having no place to sit
except upon the ice, as they did, I returned after
having been gone two hours, and was soon dressed
for dinner in Sunday suit.[Pg 278]
After dinner Mr. H. arrived with the teacher to
hold an evening service in the kitchen, the latter
taking Ricka and Mary with her to call upon some
native families, two of whose members were sick.
When they returned Ricka was full of laughter at
the way they had entered the native igloos, especially
Mary, who is a large woman and could
barely squeeze in through the small opening called
by courtesy a door. Ricka says it was more like
crawling through a hole than anything else, and at
one time Mary was so tightly jammed in that she
wondered seriously how she was ever to get out.
“Ugh!” said Ricka, when Mary related the incident,
“that was not the worst of it. I wanted to
keep the good dinner I had eaten, but the smell of
the igloo almost made me lose it then and there,
and as I was inside already, and Mary stuck fast
in the door so I could not get out, we were both
in a bad plight. When I tried to help her she
would not let me, but only laughed at me.”
“Next time we will send Mrs. Sullivan,” said
Alma, laughing.
“And you go along with me,” said I, knowing
that I could stand as long as Alma the smell of
the Eskimo huts and their seal oil. So that was
settled, Miss J., I presume, thinking us all very
foolish to make so much fuss over a little thing like
that in Alaska.
This evening, when the kitchen was filled with
natives, their service had begun, and while some of[Pg 279]
us sat in the sitting-room to leave more chairs for
the others, there came a knock at the door, and in
walked the Commissioner and the young baritone
singer, who was persuaded to sing a few solos after
the meeting was through in the kitchen.
Monday, December seventeenth: Mollie is cutting
my fur coat for me, but says I must have one
or two more skins to make it large enough. She
says she is too busy to study before Christmas, but
will afterwards. The Commissioner brought more
copying for me to do, and told me I could have the
money for my work at any time. Some tell me he
never pays anything he owes, and that I must look
sharp or I will not get anything. The other Commissioner
has invited me to go to a New Year’s
party at Council, fifty miles away, saying he will
take me there and back behind his best dogs, but I
refused, telling him that I never dance, and that I
am a married woman. At that he laughed, said he
was also married, with a wife in the States, but that
does not debar him from having a good time.
Word comes of a new gold strike not far away,
but I think we are not really sure that it is bona
fide, and must not put too much dependence on
what we hear. The Commissioner comes with his
copying, and is full of jokes.
Wednesday, December nineteenth: A man came
from the Home yesterday who has persuaded M. to
go with him on a short staking expedition. They
think they know of a new “find” very near home,[Pg 280]
and I ran over to the Recorder’s to get two attorney
papers made out for them to take as they say
they will stake for the girls and me. The Commissioner
paid me twenty dollars on copying, and
said he would settle the remainder when he got
back from Nome, as he and the other Commissioner
were just setting out with a dog-team for
that place. I have had to buy another fox skin for
my coat, making twenty-seven dollars paid out on
the garment thus far.
Right sorry I was today that Mr. H. carried
away the big velvet couch yesterday that I have
slept on nights since coming here, and I tried last
night the wooden settle brought down from upstairs
to the sitting-room. I found it a most uncomfortable
thing to sleep on, as my feet hung at
least six inches over the end of the lounge, and
they were icy when I wakened in the morning. I
then decided to go upstairs to one of the canvas
bunks in the northeast room, and I find it much
better every way. The bunk is long, wide and
warm enough with a reindeer skin under me, and
all my blankets and comforters over me, while I
have the room alone, temporarily, at least.
Saturday, December twenty-second: This is the
middle shortest day of winter, and a fine one, too,
though we had not more than three and a half
hours daylight. The skies are beautiful, with many
bright colors blended in a most wonderful way.
The girls are hard at work cooking for Christmas,[Pg 281]
and while the boys were all away today and
we needed wood brought into the house, I rigged
myself in rag-time costume and fetched several
loads in my arms. How the girls laughed when
they saw me, and declared they would fetch the
kodak, but I ran away again.
This afternoon M. and the other man returned
from their little trip, looking bright and happy
over having staked some claims for themselves and
us not very far away. These are our first claims
staked, and we naturally feel more than usually set
up, though the men say of course there may be
nothing of value in them.
When I went to give Jennie her lesson I heard
her father and another man talking of a party of
five persons who have been taken out to sea on the
ice, near Topkok. They started about three days
ago from here, and one was the sick woman who
has been at the hotel, all on their way to Nome by
dog-team.
There were two women and three men, two dog-teams
and sleds. They were crossing the ice between
two points of land while upon the winter trail
to Nome, the wind had loosened the ice, and when
they tried to get upon shore again they found it
impossible, and they were blown directly out to
sea. Without food or shelter, and with the nights
as cold as they are, how can they live on the ice
at sea? Some men have arrived bringing the news,
and say that two men went out in a boat to their[Pg 282]
rescue, but broke their oars, the ice closed in on
them, they were soaked through, and were obliged
to use their best efforts to save themselves.
The following night was very cold, and all think
the unfortunates must have perished. What a terrible
fate, and one that may happen to any one traveling
in this country, though it does seem as if this
ice should soon freeze solidly.
Sunday, December twenty-third: Soon after
breakfast today a man came to our door asking
for iodine, or remedies for a dog bite. A mad dog
had rushed upon a man sleeping in a tent in the
night and bitten him quite severely upon the hands
and leg. Mary and I put on our furs immediately
and started out with the man, who piloted us into a
small saloon, where the poor fellow sat by the stove
with a white and pinched face.
Several other men were standing about, after
having done all they could for the injured man, but
Mary washed the torn flesh in strong carbolic acid
water, and tied it up in sterilized bandages, for
which he seemed very thankful.
The little saloon was neat and clean, containing
a big stove, six or eight bunks across the back end,
and a long table, upon which were spread tin
plates, cups and spoons. A short bar ran along
one side by the door. The men said that the mad
dog had been shot immediately after the accident,
but there were others around in the camp, they
feared.[Pg 283]
I could easily see that the injured man was badly
frightened as to the after-effects of the dog bite, and
both Mary and I did all in our power to suggest
away his fear, knowing well that this was as harmful
as the injury. I told him that the missionary,
Mr. H., had had a great deal of experience with
such accidents, but never yet had seen a person
thus bitten suffer from hydrophobia, which appeared
to comfort him greatly.
When we left the place he seemed more cheerful,
though still very pale, and Mary promised to come
again to see him. He belongs to a party of three
men bound for Koyuk River. The young man who
sings so well sometimes at the Mission is one of the
three, but the other I have not yet seen.
Later on Mary and I called upon Alice, the Eskimo
girl, who lives with her mother, near the hotel,
and who is suffering with quinsy. I found Jennie
and Charlie there, and took them out for a walk
down on the beach, where the little girl’s aunt was
cutting ice. As we passed the A. E. Store I noticed
a dog lying on the porch having a bloody mouth,
but as he lay quietly I did not think much about it.
After we had passed down the trail for a block or
so, I heard a commotion behind us, and looking
back saw a young man rush out into the trail and
shoot a dog, the one, as I afterwards learned, that
I had seen on the porch. It had been mad, and
snapping around all day, but the men could not find
it earlier, and the two little children and I had[Pg 284]
passed within a few feet of it without being conscious
of danger.
Mr. H. came in to supper, also two others from
the camp of the shipwrecked people, thirty miles
away to the east of us. At supper one of the men
offered to stake some claims for us over near their
camp, where they think there is gold. They took
our names on paper, and said that after prospecting,
if they found gold, they would let us into the
strike before any others. They will remain over
night, and leave early in the morning. Mr. H. and
Mary called after supper to see the man who was
bitten by the mad dog, and found him looking better,
and not so worried as this morning. His friend
was playing on the banjo, and all were sitting quietly
around the fire.
Monday, December twenty-fourth: The two
boys, G. and B., came in late last evening, tired
and hungry, from the Nome trail, glad to arrive at
home in time for Christmas.
Early this morning Mary dressed herself up
hideously as Santa Claus, bringing a big box of
presents in while we sat at the breakfast table and
distributing them. Of course there were the regulation
number of fake packages, containing funny
things for the boys, but each one had a present of
something, and I had a souvenir spoon just from
Nome, an ivory paper knife of Eskimo make from
the girls, and later a white silk handkerchief.
Going into the sitting-room after breakfast, we[Pg 285]
were met by the fumes of burnt cork, hair or cotton,
and upon inquiry were told that Santa Claus
had had a little mishap; his whiskers had been
singed by coming into contact with the lamp chimney
and that it had delayed matters somewhat until
Ricka, his assistant, could find more cotton on the
medicine shelves; but the end of all was hearty
laughter and a jolly good time; an effort to forget,
for the present, the day in our own homes thousands
of miles away.
This morning, before noon, all in the Mission
went to the Home to the Christmas tree and exercises,
leaving me alone to keep house, the first time
this has happened in Alaska. Mr. H. had left the
dog-teams, two reindeer, and three sleds, with
which they were to drive over, and a merry party
they were. When they had gone I worked for some
time at getting the rooms in order, and making all
as tidy and snug as possible, but I had no holly
berries nor greens with which to decorate. All was
snowy and white out of doors, and a cheerful fire
inside was most to be desired. In the afternoon I
gave Jennie her lesson as usual. I am invited to
eat Christmas dinner tomorrow with Mollie, the
captain and little Jennie, and shall accept. A good
many in camp have been invited, I understand, and
I am wondering what kind of a gathering it will be.
Tuesday, December twenty-fifth: Christmas Day,
and I was alone in the Mission all night, so I had
to build my own fires this morning. I did not get[Pg 286]
up until ten o’clock, as it was cold and dark, and I
had nothing especial to do. There is plenty of
wood and water, and everything in the house, so I
do not have to go out of doors for anything.
By noon I had finished my work, put on my best
dress, and sat down at the organ to play. I went
over all the church music and voluntaries I could
find at hand, read a number of psalms aloud, and
as far as possible for one person I went through
my Christmas exercises.
If a certain longing for things and people far
away came near possessing me, I would not allow
it to make me miserable, for longing is not necessarily
unhappiness, and I had set my mind like a
flint against being dissatisfied with my present
state. With what knowledge I possess of the laws
of auto-suggestion, I have so far since my arrival
in Alaska managed the ego within most successfully,
and tears and discontent are not encouraged
nor allowed.
We are creatures of voluntary habits, as well as
involuntary ones, and habitual discontent and discouragement,
gnawing at one’s vitals are truly
death-dealing. The study of human nature is, in
Alaska, particularly interesting in these directions,
to the one with his mind’s eye open to such things,
and I am resolved, come what will, that I will keep
the upper hand of my spirit, that it shall do as I direct,
and not harbor “blues” nor discouragement.
About two in the afternoon in came M. and[Pg 287]
one of the visiting Swedes, after having walked
from the Home, where they had attended the
Christmas party, and they were well covered with
icicles. I prepared a hot lunch for them, and ate
something myself. Later a native was sent by
Mollie to fetch me over to the hotel to dinner, it
being dark, and as I was already dressed for the
occasion, I went with him.
When I arrived at the dining-room they were
just seated at table, and the waiters were bringing
in the first course. Twenty-five persons sat at the
Christmas board, at one end of which sat the captain
as host with his wife and little Jennie at his
left. At his right sat the young musician, who had
entertained us at the Mission several times with
his singing, and the storekeeper, but with a place
between them reserved for me.
After a quiet Christmas greeting to those around
me, I took my seat, and the dinner was then served.
A bottle of wine was ordered by the host for me,
and brought by the waiter, who placed it with a
glass beside my plate. At each plate there had already
been placed the same accompaniments to the
dinner, with which great care had been taken by
the two French cooks in the kitchen, and upon
which no expense had been spared by the captain,
who was host. While the waiters were serving the
courses, and conversation around the table near me
became quite general, on the aside I studied the
company. It was cosmopolitan to the last degree.[Pg 288]
Opposite me sat the hostess (Mollie) with her little
Jennie, dressed in their very best, the woman wearing
a fashionable trained skirt, pink silk waist and
diamond brooch, while the little child wore light
tan cloth in city fashion, and looked very pretty.
Below them sat the regular boarders at the hotel,
hotel clerk, the bartender, miners, traders and the
woman who kept the saloon. The latter appeared
about thirty years of age, dark, petite and pretty,
richly and becomingly gowned in garments which
might have come along with her native tongue
from Paris. On our side of the long table, and
opposite this woman, sat the only other white woman
besides myself present, and she, with her husband,
the two neighbors who had given us our first
sleigh ride behind the grey horse. On this side sat
more miners and the few travelers who happened
to be at the hotel at this time. The clerk, next his
employer, who sat at my right, and the musician
on my left, completed the number of guests, with
the exception of the one at the farther end of the
board, opposite the host. This was a young man
in a heavy fur coat, his head drooping low over his
plate.
“Don’t let H. fall upon the floor, boys,” said the
captain, as he saw the pitiable plight of the young
man. “Poor fellow, he has been celebrating Christmas
with a vengeance, and it was too much for
him, evidently. It don’t take much to knock him
out, though, and this wine,” taking up his wine[Pg 289]
glass and looking through the liquid it contained,
“won’t hurt a baby.”
“Do you never take wine?” politely inquired the
musician of me, as he noticed that my wine glass
remained untouched, and a glass of cold water was
my only beverage.
“I never do,” said I firmly, but with a smile, as
I noticed that both he and the gentleman at my
right barely touched theirs, while others drank
freely.
“Waiter, bring Mellie another bottle of that
wine,” called the bartender, from the other side of
the table, “those bottles don’t hold nothin’ anyway,
and a woman who can’t empty more’n one of
’em ain’t much,” and a second bottle was handed
the female dispenser of grog, a connoisseur of long
standing, and one who could “stand up” under as
much as the next person. By this time the woman
opposite her was considerably along the road to
hilarity, and shouts and laughter came from both,
called forth by the jests of their companions alongside.
Meanwhile the dinner progressed. The turkey
was bona fide bird, and not a few gull’s bones from
a tin quart can, while the cake and ice cream with
which my meal was ended, were all that could be
desired in Alaska. All voted that the cooks had
“done themselves proud,” and no one could say
that Christmas dinners could not be served in
Chinik.[Pg 290]
Before rising from the table, at the close of the
meal, toasts to the host and hostess were drunk
by those at the bottles, and Christmas presents
were distributed to many, principally to members
of the family and from boarders of the house. There
were silk handkerchiefs, red neckties, “boiled
shirts,” and mittens, and in some instances moosehide
gloves and moccasins, made by the Eskimo
hostess herself, while “Mellie” came in for a share,
including a large black bottle of “choice Burgundy.”
Upon leaving the dining table, the company separated,
most of the men going into the bar-room
and store, while the family and invited guests repaired
to the living-room. Here a good-sized
Christmas tree had been arranged for Jennie and
Charlie, and their presents were displayed and
talked over. In the meantime, the long dining table
was cleared and spread again for the Eskimos, who
soon flocked into the room in numbers.
Some one proposed that we go to the Mission
and have some songs by the musician, to which all
assented, and nine of us, including the captain, his
wife and Jennie, started over about half-past eight
o’clock. There we found the rooms bright and
warm, the two men keeping house in my absence
having escaped to the upper rooms on hearing the
party approaching. Here a pleasant hour or two
were passed in listening to the songs of the musician,
who always accompanies himself on his instrument,[Pg 291]
whether banjo or organ. He sang the
“Lost Chord,” “Old Kentucky Home,” and many
other dear old songs, closing with “God Be With
You Till We Meet Again,” and the doxology. After
that they pulled on their parkies and fur coats and
went out into the snow storm (for by this time the
snow was falling heavily), and to their homes,
while I sat down alone in the firelight to review
the events of the day—my first Christmas Day in
Alaska. How different from any other I have ever
spent. What a disclosure of the shady side of human
nature this is,—and yet there is some good
intermingled with it all.
Many here cannot endure the stress of the current,
nor pull against it, and so float easily on
towards the rapids and destruction. Here is a field
for the Christian worker, though Mr. H. says he
moved his little flock twelve miles across the bay
in order to get it farther away from this iniquitous
camp.
CHAPTER XXI.
MY FIRST GOLD CLAIMS.

HRISTMAS is over for another year,
and this is December twenty-sixth
with its daily winter routine. After I
had given the two men their breakfast,
I went out for a walk upon the
beach. A few snowflakes fell upon my
face as I walked, and it was not cold
but pleasant. There was a red and
glowing, eastern sky, but no sunshine,
and I looked out over the ice to see if
possibly the girls were returning. Seeing nothing
of them, I went home again. About two o’clock
M. came in, saying that they could be seen far out
upon the ice, and we must build the fires and get
dinner started, which we then did. Soon Alma
came riding on a reindeer sled, with a native driver,
getting in ahead of the others, who arrived half an
hour later.
Mr. H. has come with two of his assistants and
Miss E. by reindeer team from the Home on their
way to the station, where the animals are herded in
the hills, and all had a good lunch. After spending
two hours in packing, talking and resting, they left
again, Miss E. on a sled behind a reindeer, which
was driven by a native, and which tore up the snow[Pg 293]
in clouds as he dashed over the ice northward to
the hills. I ran out upon the cliff to see them on
their way, being quite contented that it was not
myself.
I have learned that the five persons who drifted
out to sea on the ice were brought back by the
wind and tide, and escaped safely to land, after being
at sea several days, but were unharmed, and
went on to Nome. I was very glad to hear this,
as they have had a narrow escape from death.
Friday, December twenty-eighth: The musician
and his friend who was bitten by the mad dog
called this forenoon at the Mission to get the man’s
wounds dressed by Mary, the nurse. His hands
are much better, but the wounded leg may yet give
him trouble. Mary did her best for the man, who
seems to be growing more cheerful, and we do all
possible to encourage and help him, lending him
reading matter of various kinds with which to pass
his time. A good many are going to the New
Year’s party at Council, among them the captain
and his wife, and the musician; but I shall not go,
though both commissioners have urged me to accept
their invitations, and did not enjoy overmuch
my refusals. I was playing ball with Jennie and
Charlie before our lessons today when the party
started out with the dog-teams, for the nights are
very moonlight and clear, and they can travel for
many hours. A cousin of Mollie’s, by name Ageetuk,
went with her. Jennie is to stay with her[Pg 294]
auntie until her mamma’s return, and I will give her
the afternoon lessons just the same, only at her
auntie’s house. When the lesson was finished I led
Charlie to Ageetuk’s house, where her mother cares
for him in the night time, and left Jennie with her
auntie, Apuk. This woman has a neat little cabin
of three small rooms, furnished in comfortable
fashion, with a pretty Brussels rug covering the
floor of her best room, in which is a white iron
bedstead, a good small table with a pretty cover,
a large lamp, white dimity curtains at the windows
over the shades, and in the next room there are
white dishes upon the shelves.
Sunday, December thirtieth: It is ten weeks yesterday
since we arrived at Golovin, or Chinik, as
is the Eskimo name for the settlement, and pronounced
Cheenik, a creek of the same name flowing
into the bay a mile east of this camp. During
the day I went to look after Jennie and brought
the child home with me, giving her candy and nuts,
and playing for her on the organ.
This evening we all went out upon the ice for a
walk. We took the trail to White Mountain, going
in a northwesterly direction, and enjoyed it very
much. We passed the cliff, and the boats, the snow
creaking at every step, and the moonlight clear
and beautiful. We were out for two hours, and felt
better for the fresh air and exercise. All old timers
say that it is bad for one’s health to remain indoors
too much in Alaska, and people should get[Pg 295]
out every day for exercise. There is far more danger
of getting scurvy by remaining in the house
too much than from any kinds of food we have to
eat, and none of us wish to be ill with that troublesome
disease.
About five o’clock Miss E. came in with a native
from the station where the reindeer are kept, having
grown tired of staying in a native hut with the
Eskimo women while the missionary was busy at
work. She started early this morning when the
weather was fine. Lincoln, the experienced native
who came with her, knew the way perfectly, and
they expected to make the twelve or fifteen miles
and get into the Mission early, but the weather
suddenly changed, as it knows so well how to do
in this country, the wind blew, snow fell and drifted
and though they came safely through the hills, they
lost their way upon the bay while crossing to
Chinik, and wandered for hours in the snow storm.
Having no lunch, tent, nor compass, and no
extra furs, they found themselves in a disagreeable
plight, especially as the snow was very soft and
wet. They kept on traveling, however, until they
were satisfied that they were going in circles, as do
all when lost in a snow storm, and were making no
progress; then they halted.
Here they were overtaken by two white men,
lost like themselves, who, when the matter had
been talked over, would not follow the native,
thinking they knew better than he the way to[Pg 296]
Chinik, and they went off by themselves. Miss E.
says that both she and Lincoln had given up hope
of getting here today, but she knelt upon the ice
and prayed that they might find their way safely,
then trusted that they would do so, and started.
After going on for a time in the storm, they saw a
small, deserted cabin not far from them which Lincoln
instantly recognized as one upon the point of
land only a quarter of a mile west of Chinik, and
they were happy.
They soon came into the Mission, full of gratitude,
though wet, tired and hungry, for it is so
warm that there is water on the ice in places, and
the snow is very heavy. They had only one deer
with them.
The two lost men came into camp an hour after
Miss E. arrived, having gone past the cabin and
camp, and southward too far in their reckoning. It
is never safe to travel without a compass of some
sort in this country. Mr. H. and his two men have,
besides attending to the herd, staked some gold
claims while away, not far from our claims. The
wind has died down, and there is no snow falling
tonight at half-past eight.
This is New Year’s Eve, and the girls and boys
are singing, and having a good time in the sitting-room
while I write. We are going to sit up to
watch the old year out and the new year in, and
have a little song service at midnight.
This is the last day of nineteen hundred, and a[Pg 297]
memorable year it has been. How many new
scenes and how great the changes through which
we have passed! What will the New Year bring?
Where will we be next year at this time? It is
probably better that we do not know the future.
New Year’s Day, nineteen hundred and one.
This has been a good day all around, after our midnight
watch meeting, when seven of the eight persons
present took a part, and we sang many songs
with the organ. At half-past twelve I retired, but
the others remained up until two o’clock.
This evening the storekeeper and two others
from White Mountain called to see if we did not
care to go out coasting on the hill behind the Mission,
and five or six of us went. When we got to
the top of the hill the wind was so strong that I
could hardly stand, and after a few trips down the
Hill we gave it up, part of our number going out to
walk upon the ice, and the rest of us going indoors.
The men were invited into the Mission,
and stayed for an hour, chatting pleasantly, as
there is no place for them to go except to the saloons.
It is a great pity that there is no reading
room with papers and books for the miners, with
the long winter before them, and nothing to do.
There is a crying need for something in this line,
and if they do not employ their time pleasantly and
profitably, they will spend it unprofitably in some
saloon or gambling place. I wish I had a thousand
good magazines to scatter, but I have none.[Pg 298]
I gave Jennie her lesson, and amused both children
for a time this afternoon. Yesterday the snow
drifted badly, and I fear the people who went to
Council will not have a good trail on the way
home.
January second: It is pleasant to have a corner
by myself in which to write and be sometimes
alone. The little northeast corner room where I
sleep has a tile pipe coming up from the kitchen,
making the room warm enough except in the coldest
weather. It has a north window with no double
one outside, and when the wind comes from the
north I expect it will be extremely cold. From this
window I can see (when the glass is free from frost)
out upon the trail to Nome and White Mountain.
Today there is water on the ice, and it has been
raining and blowing. Three of the boys returned
from a four days’ prospecting trip to the west, and
as two of them had been sick the whole time since
they left here, they came in wet, tired and hungry,
without having much good luck to relate. I told
them it was something to get back at all again,
and they agreed heartily, while eating a hot supper.
An hour later and Mr. H. with the visiting preacher
came in from the reindeer station, and their staking
trip, in the same condition as the three boys had
been; so a supper for them was also prepared.
Our kitchen looks like a junk shop these days,
and a wet one at that, for the numbers of muckluks,
fur parkies, mittens, and other garments hung[Pg 299]
around the stove to dry are almost past counting,
and the odor is stifling; but the clothing must be
dried somewhere, and there is no other place. An
engine room would be the very best spot I know
for drying so many wet furs, and I wish we had
one here.
In speaking to one of the men today about prospecting
my claim, I told him I would furnish the
grub, but he said very kindly, “I wouldn’t take any
grub from you. I’ve got enough, and shall be at
work there any way, so it won’t take long to sink
some holes in your claim,” which I thought was
very good of him. I hope they will “strike it”
rich.
January third: A wet, sloppy, snowy day, our
“January thaw,” Mr. H. says. I took the two children
out on the sled upon the ice and pushed at the
handle-bars until I was reeking with perspiration,
afterwards giving Jennie her lesson at her auntie’s.
There are twelve of us under the Mission roof
tonight, including Miss E. and the native.
January fourth: These are great days. We have
a houseful of men, nine in all, and some are getting
ready to leave tomorrow to do some staking of
claims up near the station. M. said if the musician
were only here, and they could get a dog-team, he
would like to get him to go with him on a staking
trip not far away. This man returned soon afterward,
and M. wanted me to ask him if he would go.
I did so, and he replied that he would go, and furnish[Pg 300]
dogs if possible; but the ones he tried to get
were engaged, and that plan fell through, much to
his discouragement. Learning this, I determined
to go to the captain at the hotel, and see if I could
procure dogs from him for the trip. He said yes,
I could have his best dogs, and that a mail carrier
is here resting who will lend us his dogs, so that
was all arranged.
Location papers then had to be written out, grub
boxes packed, a tent looked up, and many things
attended to before they left, so that others in camp
got an inkling of what was being done and wanted
to go along. Then M. and the musician decided to
put off going until midnight, when they would
sneak quietly out of camp with their dogs and
scamper away among the hills without the others
knowing it, but it could not be done, and two or
three sleds followed them at midnight in the moonlight,
as is the custom with Alaska “stampeders.”
January fifth: Mollie asked me today to go with
her to visit her fox traps, and I immediately decided
to go. We started about half-past one in the
afternoon, on foot past the cliff, but when we had
gone a short distance Mollie stopped to call back
to the house. Some native boys were cutting wood
at the north door, and she motioned one to come
to her. When he came, she spoke to him in Eskimo,
and he, assenting to what she said, ran back
again.
“I tell Muky to come with dog-team, bring us[Pg 301]
home, you get tired by and by,” she said thoughtfully,
as we trudged on again over and through the
snow. The woman wore a reindeer parkie, short
skirt, and muckluks, and carried a gun on her
shoulder. The snow was quite a foot deep, with
a crust on top which we broke at almost every
step, and which made it hard walking. On we
“mushed,” past the cliff, the boats, and out upon
the ice. The traps had been set by Mollie a week
before on the northeast shore of the bay among
a few low bushes, and this was our objective point.
When we reached the first trap, which was buried
in snow, but found by a certain shrub which Mollie
had in some way marked and now recognized, I
threw myself upon the snow to rest and watch her
movements.
Around us we saw plenty of ptarmigan tracks,
but no signs of foxes. A foot below the snow’s
surface, Mollie found her trap, and proceeded to
reset it. Carefully covering the trap with a very
little light snow and smoothing it nicely over, she
chipped off bits of reindeer meat from a scrap she
had brought with her, scattering them invitingly
around.
The scene about us was a very quiet one and
wintry in the extreme. Long, low hills stretched
out on every side of the bay, and the whole earth
was a great snow heap. The sky and cloud effects
were charming, fading sunshine on the hilltops
making them softly pink, and very lovely; but with[Pg 302]
deep reddish purple tints over all as the sun-ball
disappeared.
One after another, four fox traps in different
places were reset by Mollie, while I mushed on
behind her.
At last we saw the dog-team and Muky coming
on the bay. Five dogs he had hitched to his sled,
and each wore a tiny bell at its throat, making a
pretty din as they trotted. When the woman had
finished her trapping, we both climbed into the
sled, the native running and calling to the dogs,
and they started for home. It was not a long ride,
probably not more than a mile and a half as we
went, but while tramping through the snow crust
to the traps it seemed much longer.
I now thoroughly enjoyed the novel ride. In the
dusky twilight the dogs trotted cheerfully homeward,
obeying the musical calls of their driver, and
the little bells jingled merrily. Darker and more
purple grew the skies until they tinted the snow
over which we were passing, and by the time we
had halted before the hotel door it was really night.
By the clock it was fifteen minutes past four and
the thermometer registered fifteen degrees below
zero. Then we toasted our feet before the big
heater, removed and shook out our frosty furs, and
answered the two children’s questions. To these
Mollie gave her explanations in Eskimo, and I told
of the ptarmigan tracks I had seen on the snow
drifts.[Pg 303]
Sunday, January sixth: Yesterday I moved into
the little southeast room which was formerly Miss
J.’s. It has pretty paper on the walls, and a small
heater in one corner, besides a single cot, and I
soon settled quite comfortably. The room with
the bunks was needed for the men, of whom there
are so many most of the time. The room I now
have has a south window, but not a double one, and
gets heavy with frost, which remains on the panes;
but I can have a fire when I want one, as the stove
burns chips and short wood, of which there are
always quantities in the shed. B. tells me to use
all the wood I want, as there is no shortage of fuel,
nor men to haul and cut it, which I think is very
kind. A little fire while I am dressing nights and
mornings, however, is all I shall try to keep
burning.
Miss J. came with Ivan, bringing several native
children to visit their parents for a few hours, but
took them back with her after supper when the
meeting was over, which she had held in the
kitchen. We had sixteen to supper, including natives.
Afterward we went down to the beach to
see the party off for the Home. Ivan led the dogs,
five in number, hitched to the big sled. Miss J.
ran alongside, the visiting preacher at the handle
bar, and the little children on the sled. After watching
them off, we came home and then took a walk
of a mile out upon the ice on the White Mountain
trail, which was in fairly good condition. There[Pg 304]
were six of us. When we got back to the house,
I played by request on the organ, for the three
Swedish visitors from Council.
The weather is bright and beautiful, and sixteen
degrees below zero.
Monday, January seventh: The boys came in
from their stampede to the creeks, and M. says
they staked us all rich if there is anything good in
the ground. My claim is Number Ten, below Discovery,
on H. Creek, and sounds well, if nothing
more. Of course we women are all much elated,
and talk of “our claims” very glibly, but a few
sunken prospect holes will tell the story of success
or failure better than anything else.
This has been a busy day in the house until I
went at half-past two in the afternoon to Mollie’s
to find her ill in bed with a very bad throat. I gave
Jennie and Charlie two hours of my time, and went
home, to return in the evening at Mollie’s request.
The poor woman was suffering severely, and I did
what I could for her, rubbing her throat with camphorated
oil and turpentine and wrapping it in
thick, hot flannels. Then I assisted her to bed,
rubbing her aching bones, and left her less feverish
than when I went in. The thermometer is above
zero, and the weather is pleasant.
Two men from Topkok came in to see the Recorder’s
books, and searched all through them
without finding what they wanted and expected to
find, and then went away with sober and disappointed[Pg 305]
faces. “Curses not loud but deep” come
to our ears each day about the Commissioner’s
work of recording, and many say he is now deep
in dissipation at Nome, instead of attending here
to his business as he should. Miners declare him
unfitted in every way for his position, and affirm
that they will depose him from office.
I went out this morning and bought a student
lamp at the store, paying six dollars and a half
for it. This, with my case of coal oil, will light
my room nicely, besides giving a good deal of heat.
The Marshal and men are home from the Koyuk
River, after four weeks of winter “mushing,” and
say nothing about their trip. They did not manage
to pull harmoniously together, and Mr. L. returned
before them.
January ninth: When I went today to the hotel
to teach my pupils, I found the men in the room
cleaning the big heater, and ashes and dirt drove us
out of the place, so we went upstairs to another
room in which Mollie sometimes sews, and where
we found her at work on a white parkie for the musician.
I played with Jennie for a time before the
lesson, and Ageetuk came in on an errand, while
Polly, the Eskimo servant, jabbered in a funny way
and wabbled over the floor like a duck, as is her
habit when walking. This girl is short, fat and
shapeless, with beady black eyes, and a crafty expression,
certainly not to be relied on if there is
truth in physiognomy.[Pg 306]
At the hotel all is excitement and bustle, getting
the men off for the Kuskokquim River, where the
new strikes are reported. Strong new sleds have
been made by the natives, grub is being packed and
dogs gotten into condition, besides a thousand
other things which must be done before the expedition
is ready to start. Seeing them make such extensive
preparations reminded me that perhaps I
might get the men to carry my paper and stake
something for me, so, plucking up my courage, I
asked the promoter of the expedition, whom I
know, if I could do this, and was readily given permission.
In a few minutes paper, pen and ink were
brought in, a clerk was instructed to draw up the
paper in proper shape, which he did, and it was
signed and witnessed in due form, Mollie subscribing
her name as one of the witnesses. For this I
tendered my heartiest thanks, and ran home with a
light heart, already imagining myself a lucky claim
owner in a new and rich gold section on the Kuskokquim.
The party of five men are to leave tomorrow
morning for the long trip of several hundred
miles over the ice and snow.
Mollie advises me to have another pair of muckluks
made smaller, and to keep these I am wearing
for traveling, when I will wear more inside them,
so I will take my materials over tomorrow and she
will have Alice cut and sew them for me. I hope
they will not make my feet look so clumsy as do
these, my first ones.[Pg 307]
January tenth: This was a cold and windy morning,
so the men at the hotel could not start out for
the Kuskokquim as they intended. Some men
came to the Mission to see if they could rent the
old schoolhouse to live in, the doctor and his
plucky little wife having left some weeks ago for a
camp many miles east of Chinik. After looking it
over, the men have concluded to take it, and move
in soon. There are no buildings to buy or rent in
this camp, nor anything with which to build, so it
is hard lines for strangers coming to Chinik. This
afternoon Alma went over with me to the hotel to
stitch on Mollie’s sewing machine, and I carried
the deerskin for my new footgear which Alice will
make acceptably, no doubt, as she is very expert.
Mr. H., two natives and two white men, were
here to supper tonight on their way to Nome
by dog-team, and are wishing to start at three in
the morning in order to make the trip in two days.
M. and L. are also here, so we had seven men to
supper. We had fried ham, beans, stewed prunes,
tea, and bread and butter.
This morning it was two degrees below zero,
with a strong, cold wind; tonight it is fourteen degrees
below zero with no wind, and is warmer now
than then. No moonlight till nearly morning, but
the stars shine brightly.
January eleventh: Mary sat up all night baking
bread, and starting the men off for Nome between
three and four in the morning. I got up at nine[Pg 308]
o’clock and enjoyed the magnificent sunrise. I
went out with Ricka while she tried at the three
stores to find a lining for her fur coat, but one clerk
told us that no provision for women was made by
the companies, and they had nothing on their
shelves she wanted. At the hotel store she found
some dark green calico at twenty-five cents a yard,
which she was obliged to take for her lining.
While I gave Jennie her lesson her mother came
from her hunting, and had shot six ptarmigan, having
hurt her finger on the trigger of the gun.
Mollie studies a little while each day, when Jennie
has finished her lesson.
There is a sick Eskimo woman here now who
was brought in from the reindeer camp yesterday,
and Mollie has her upstairs in the sewing room on
a cot. Mary, the nurse, went over with me to see
her, and says she has rheumatic fever. She seems
to be suffering very much, and cannot move her
hands or limbs.
January twelfth: At eight o’clock today the thermometer
stood at forty-one degrees below zero,
but registered thirty-two degrees during the middle
of the day, and the houses are not so warm as they
have been.
When I called for Jennie at the hotel today I
found her crying with pain in her leg, so she could
not take a lesson, but I sent out for little Charlie
who came running to me with outstretched arms.
He is a dear little child, and I am getting very fond[Pg 309]
of him. It is some weeks since Jennie first began
crying occasionally with pain, and her parents cannot
understand it, unless it is caused by a fall she
had on the steamer coming from San Francisco
last summer, and of which they thought nothing at
the time. I sincerely hope she is not going to be
very ill, with no doctor nearer than White Mountain.
The sick woman still suffers, though they
are doing what they can for her. The captain requested
me to bring our medical books over, or
send them, that he can look up remedies and treatment
of rheumatic fever, for that is what she no
doubt has.
While seated at the organ an hour later, in came
the storekeeper and his clerk, followed soon after
by the captain and musician. Then we had music
and solos by the last named gentleman, and the
knitting needles kept rapidly flying. At eleven
o’clock they went out into the intense cold, which
sparkled like diamonds, but which pinched like nippers
the exposed faces and hands.
Here is another cold, quiet day, with the thermometer
at thirty-five degrees below zero, and it
is a first class one to spend by the fire. We have
read, slept, eaten, and fed the fires; with only one
man, three girls and myself in the house. At ten
in the evening G. and B. came in from a five days
“mushing” trip on the trails, being nearly starved
and frozen. They were covered with snow and
icicles, their shirts and coats stiff with frost from[Pg 310]
steam of their bodies, as they ran behind the sled
to keep warm. A hot supper of chicken (canned),
coffee, and bread and butter was prepared in haste
for them, and they toasted themselves until bedtime.
CHAPTER XXII.
THE LITTLE SICK CHILD.

HE winter is rapidly passing, and so
far without monotony, though what it
will bring to us before spring remains
to be seen. Little Jennie has been suffering
more and more with her leg of
late, and her papa sent for the doctor
at White Mountain, who came today
by dog-team. The child’s mother has
had a spring cot made for her, and
she was put to bed by the doctor, who
says the knee trouble is a very serious one, and she
must have good nursing, attention being also paid
to her diet. The Eskimos are all exceedingly fond of
seal and reindeer meat, and Jennie’s Auntie Apuk
or grandmother will often bring choice tidbits to
the child at bedtime, or between meals, when she
ought not to eat anything, much less such hearty
food. When the little child sees the good things,
she, of course, wants them, and having been humored
in every whim, she must still be, she thinks,
especially when she is ill. A problem then is here
presented which I may help to solve for them.
Jennie and I are growing very fond of each other,
and she will do some things for me which she will
not do for others who have obeyed her wishes so[Pg 312]
long. I begin by round-about coaxing and reasoning,
and get some other idea into her mind, until
the plate of seal meat is partially forgotten, and
does not seem so attractive at nine in the evening
as when presented with loving smiles by her old
grandmother, who does sometimes resent the alternative,
but is still exceedingly solicitous that the
little girl should recover. As grandmother understands
English imperfectly, Mollie is obliged to reiterate
the doctor’s orders in Eskimo, making them
as imperative as possible, and the poor old Eskimo
woman goes home with the promise that Jennie
shall have some of the dainties at meal-time on the
morrow.
In appearance grandmother is still somewhat
rugged, being a large woman, with an intelligent
face, which expresses very forcibly her inner feelings,
and being, probably, somewhere between
sixty and seventy years of age. Her husband, who
has been dead only a year or two, was much beloved
by her, and no reference to him is ever made
in her presence, without a flow of tears from her
eyes. Her love of home and kindred seems very
strong, and her devotion to little Jennie amounts
almost to idolatry, so the solicitude expressed by
the good woman is only a part of what she really
feels, but which is shown in hundreds of ways.
When the doctor settled the little girl in her bed
she adjusted a heavy weight to the foot on the
limb which has given her so much trouble, and now[Pg 313]
the grief of Mollie and her mother is unbounded.
Poor old grandmother wipes her eyes continually,
leaving the house quickly at times to rush home
and mourn alone, as she is so constrained to do,
her sorrow for her darling’s sufferings being very
sincere. Later she comes in after doing her best
at courage building, tiptoes her way in to see if her
pet is sleeping or awake, and bringing something if
possible, with which to amuse or interest the invalid.
However great is the grief of the women,
that of the child’s papa is equally sad to see, and
he, poor man, is forced to face the probability of a
long and dreary winter, if not a lifetime of suffering
for his darling child. One cannot help seeing his
misery, though he tries like a Trojan to hide it,
and keeps as cheerful as possible to encourage
others. He is always an invalid himself.
The main topic of interest to Jennie now is the
little stranger who has come to live with her Auntie
Apuk, and whom she is so desirous of seeing that
she almost forgets her trouble and suffering, asking
constantly about its size, color, eyes, hair,
hands and feet. She counts the days before she
can see it, and puzzles greatly over the fact of its
not possessing a name, her big black eyes getting
larger and blacker as she wonders where one will
be found. Little Charlie is allowed in to see Jennie
at times, and wonders greatly to find her always
in bed, asking many questions in his childish Eskimo[Pg 314]
treble, and patting her hand sympathetically
while standing at her side.
“Mamma,” said he the other day to Mollie in
Eskimo, with a pleased smile on his face, and when
the two were alone, “the ladie loves me.”
“How do you know?” asked Mollie.
“Because,” he said shyly, putting his little arms
about her neck, “because she kissed me.” Whereupon
Mollie did the same, and assured him of her
own love, always providing, of course, that he was
a good boy, and did what papa and mamma told
him to do.
This conversation Mollie reported to me a few
days after it took place, and I assured her with
tears welling up in my eyes that the little child had
made no mistake. Strange action of the subjective
mind of one person over another, even to the understanding
by this Eskimo baby of a stranger heart,
and that one so unresponsive as mine. The child,
deprived as he was of an own mother’s love, still
hungered and thirsted for it, and he was quick to
discern in my eyes and voice the secret for which
he was looking. How I should enjoy giving my
whole time to these two children, and they really
do need me to teach and care for them; but I am
dividing myself between them and the Mission, and
the winter days are very short.
The thermometer today registered fourteen degrees
below zero, against twenty-eight yesterday
and thirty below the day before that.[Pg 315]
Mr. H. has returned from Nome, bringing me a
package of kodak films sent from Oakland, Cal.,
last August, and which I never expected to receive
after so long a time. I was delighted to get them,
and now I can kodak this whole district, above and
below.
Mollie is trying to study English a little, but
with many interruptions on every hand. The big
living room is light and warm, our only study place,
and yet the rendezvous of all who care to drop in,
regardless of invitations, making it somewhat difficult
for us to concentrate our attention on the lessons.
The Marshal, the bartender, the clerks,
cooks, miners, natives, strangers and all come into
this room to chat, see and inquire for Jennie, play
with Charlie, and get warm by the fire. Here is an
opportunity of a lifetime to study human nature,
and I am glad, for it is a subject always full of interest
to me, though I frequently feel literally
choked with tobacco smoke, and wish often for a
private sitting-room.
Sunday, January twentieth: We are snuggled indoors
by the fires under the most terrible blizzard
of the season so far, with furious gales, falling and
drifting snow, and intense cold. It is impossible
to keep the house as warm as usual, and I have
eaten my meals today dressed in my fur coat, my
seat at table being at the end with my back close to
the frosty north window. Though this is the place
of honor at the board, and the missionary’s seat[Pg 316]
when he eats in the Mission, still it is a chilly berth
on occasions, and this is decidedly one.
The dining-room contains, besides the north
window, one on the south side as well, and though
both are covered with storm windows, the frost and
ice is several inches thick upon the panes, precluding
any possibility of receiving light from either
quarter unless the sun shines very brightly indeed,
and then only a subdued light is admitted. During
the night the house shook constantly in the terrific
gale, rattling loose boards and shingles, and I was
kept awake for several hours.
At night I am in the habit of tossing my fur coat
upon my bed for the warmth there is in it, as I am
not the possessor of a fur robe, as all persons
should be who winter here. Furs are the only things
to keep the intense cold out in such weather as we
are now having, but with some management I get
along fairly well.
A reindeer skin not in use from the attic makes
my bed soft and warm underneath, my coat over
my blankets answers the same purpose, and the
white fox baby robe from the old wooden cradle
upstairs makes a soft, warm rug on the floor upon
which to step out in the morning. Wool slippers
are never off my feet when my muckluks are resting,
and I manage by keeping a supply of kindlings
and small wood in my box by the stove, to have
a warm fire by which to dress.
These days we do not often rise early, and ten[Pg 317]
o’clock frequently finds us at breakfast, but we
retire correspondingly late, and midnight is quite
a customary hour lately. Today we passed the time
in eating, sleeping, singing, and reading. A visiting
Swedish preacher came over a few days ago
from the Home, and is storm-bound in the Mission.
He is a large, heavy man, with a hearty voice and
hand grip, and is a graduate of Yale College, using
the best of English, having filled one of the vacant
Nome pulpits for several weeks last fall before
coming to Golovin.
Today he has read one of Talmage’s sermons to
us, and we have sung Gospel songs galore, in both
Swedish and English, with myself as organist.
When this is tired of, the smaller instruments are
taken out, and Ricka has the greatest difficulty in
preventing Alma from amusing the assembled company
with her mandolin solo, “Johnny Get Your
Hair Cut,” the young lady’s red lips growing quite
prominent while she insists upon playing it.
“Good music is always acceptable, Ricka, and
on Sunday as well as on any other day, so I cannot
see why you will not let me play as I want to. I
do not think it a sin to play on the mandolin on
Sunday. Do you, Pastor F.?” asked Alma of the
preacher, appealingly, and in all innocence.
What could he say to her? He laughed.
“O, no,” said Ricka, “I do not say that mandolin
music is sinful on Sunday, and if you would play
‘Nearer My God to Thee,’ or some such piece,[Pg 318]
and not play ‘Johnny,’ I should not object.” And
she now looked at the preacher and me for reinforcements.
Alma is not, however, easily put down, and the
contest usually winds up with Ricka going into
the kitchen where she cannot hear the silly strains
of “Johnny,” which Alma is picking abstractedly
from the strings of the instrument, while the
preacher continues his reading, and I go off to my
room.
Mr. Q., a Swedish missionary, and his native
preacher called Rock, have arrived from Unalaklik,
with the two visiting preachers at the Home, and
they held an evening service in the schoolhouse,
which was fairly well attended. There were seven
white men, the three women in this house and myself,
besides many natives of both sexes. Grandmother
was there with Alice, Ageetuk and others,
and the missionary spoke well and feelingly in English,
interpreted by Rock into Eskimo. One of the
preachers sang a solo, and presided at the organ.
Some of the native women present had with them
their babies, and these, away from home in the
evening, contrary to their usual habit, cried and
nestled around a good deal, and had to be comforted
in various ways, both substantial and otherwise,
during the evening; but the speakers were
accustomed to all that, and were thankful to have
as listeners the poor mothers, who probably could
not have come without the youngsters.[Pg 319]
Considerable will power and auto-suggestion is
needed to enable me to endure the fumes of seal
oil along with other smells which are constantly
arising from the furs and bodies of the Eskimos,
made damp, perhaps, by the snow which has lodged
upon them before entering the room. Fire we
must have. Those who are continually with the
natives in these gatherings do get “acclimated,”
but I am having a hard struggle along these lines.
The three Swedish and one Eskimo preacher left
today for the Home, after I had taken a kodak
view of them, and their dog-team. As the wind
blew cold and stiffly from the northwest, they
hoisted a sail made of an old blanket upon their
sled.
There are many who are ingenious, and who are
glad to help the sick child, Jennie, pass her time
pleasantly, and among them is the musician. Being
a clever artist as well as musician, he goes often to
sit beside Jennie, and then slate and pencils are
brought out, and the drawing begins. Indian
heads, Eskimo children in fur parkies, summer
landscapes, anything and everything takes its turn
upon the slate, which appears a real kaleidoscope
under the artist’s hands. Jennie often laughs till
the tears run down her face at some comical drawing
or story, or the musician’s efforts to speak
Eskimo as she does, and both enjoy themselves immensely.
Yesterday Mollie went out to hunt for ptarmigan.[Pg 320]
She is exceedingly fond of gunning, has
great success, and she and the child relish these
tasty birds better than anything else at this season.
Ageetuk also is a good hunter and trapper,
and brought in two red foxes from her traps yesterday,
when she came home from her outing with
Mollie. Little Charlie ran up to Mollie on her return
from her hunt, and cried in a mixture of Eskimo
and English:
“Foxes peeluk, Mamma?” meaning to ask if she
did not secure any animals, appearing disappointed
when told by his mamma (for such she calls herself
to the child) that she did not find anything today
but ptarmigan.
It was twenty degrees below zero this morning,
and the sun was beautifully bright. The days are
growing longer, and it is quite light at eight o’clock
in the morning. The short days have never been
tiresome to me because we have not lacked for fuel
and lights, and have kept occupied.
One of the Commissioners and two or three
other men have been trying for a long time to get
their meals here, but the girls have pleaded too
little room, and other excuses, until now the Commissioner
has returned, and renewed his requests.
Today he came over and left word that he and
two others would be here to six o’clock supper, at
which the girls were wrathy.
“I guess he will wait a long time before I cook
his meals for him,” sputtered Alma, who disliked[Pg 321]
the coming of the official to the house, and under
no consideration would she consent to board him.
“My time is too short to cook for a man like
that,” declared Mary, with a toss of her head, as
she settled herself in the big arm chair in the sitting
room, and poor Ricka, whose turn it was this
week to prepare the meals, found herself in the embarrassing
position of compulsory cook for at
least two of the men she most heartily despised in
the camp, and this too under the displeasure of
both Alma and Mary.
“What shall I do?” groaned Ricka, appealing to
me in her extremity. “Will you sit at table with
them tonight, Mrs. Sullivan? because Alma and
Mary will not, and I must pour the coffee. O,
dear, what shall I have for supper?” and the poor
girl looked fairly bowed down with anxiety.
“O, never mind them, Ricka,” said I, “just give
them what you had intended to give the rest of us.
I suppose they think this is a roadhouse, and, if so,
they can as well board here as others; but if Alma
refuses to take them, I do not see what they can
do but keep away,” argued I, knowing both Alma
and Mary too well by this time to expect them to
change their verdict, as, indeed, I had no desire for
them to do.
“I’m sure it is not a roadhouse for men of their
class,” growled Alma, biting her thread off with a
snap, for she was sewing on Mollie’s dress, and
did not wish to be hindered. “I’ll not eat my supper[Pg 322]
tonight till they have eaten; will you, Mary?”
“Indeed, I will not,” was the reply from a pair
of very set lips, at which Ricka and I retired to the
kitchen to consult together, and prepare the much-talked-of
meal.
Then I proceeded to spread the table with a white
cloth and napkins, arrange the best chairs, and
make the kitchen as presentable as I could with
lamps, while Ricka went to work at the range. We
had a passable supper, but not nearly so good as we
usually have, for the official had not only taken us
by surprise, but had come unbidden, and was not,
(by the express orders of the business head of the
restaurant firm), to be made welcome.
At any rate, Ricka and I did the best we could
under the circumstances, the meal passed in some
way, and the official then renewed his request to be
allowed to take all his meals in the Mission, meeting
with nothing but an unqualified refusal, much
to his evident disappointment.
I doubt very much now the probability of my
getting any more copying to do for him, as he
says I could have persuaded Alma to board him if I
had been so inclined; but then I never was so inclined,
and have about decided that I do not want
his work at any price.
January twenty-fifth: This has been a very cold,
windy day, but three of the men came in from prospecting
on the creeks, and have little to report.
To think of living in tents, or even native igloos,[Pg 323]
in such weather for any length of time whatever,
is enough to freeze one’s marrow, and I think the
men deserve to “strike it rich” to repay them for
so much discomfort and suffering. Mr. L. and B.
walked to the Home and back today—twenty-four
miles in the cold. I bought two more fox skins of
the storekeeper with which to make my coat
longer.
Mr. H. and Miss J. came to hold a meeting in
the kitchen for the natives, and Mollie interpreted
for them, as Ivan was not present. They all enjoy
singing very much, and are trying to learn
some new songs. Contrary to my expectations,
they learn the tunes before they do the words,
which are English, of course.
Later the musician came over and sang and
played for an hour and a half at the organ, which
all in the house enjoyed; but he is worried about
his friend, who was bitten by the mad-dog, and is
in poor health, he told us tonight. They have lately
moved into the old schoolhouse, and like there
better than their former lodgings, which were very
cold. There are three of them in the schoolhouse,
or rather cabin, for it is an old log building, with
dirt roof, upon which the grass and weeds grow tall
in summer, and under the eaves of the new schoolhouse,
a frame structure with a small pointed tower.
Sunday, January twenty-seventh: The missionaries
held a meeting in the sitting room this forenoon
at which the Commissioner was present, not[Pg 324]
because he was interested in the service, Alma says.
I suppose he had nothing else to do, and happened
to get up earlier than usual. I presided at the
organ, and Miss J. led the singing. The day was
a very bright one, but the thermometer registered
thirty degrees below zero.
The missionaries have taken Alma with them
to visit for a few days, and do some sewing at the
Home. We all ran out upon the ice with them, but
did not go far, as it was very cold. For a low
mercury these people do not stay indoors, but go
about as they like dressed from top to toe in furs,
and do not suffer; but let the wind blow a stiff gale,
and it is not the same proposition.
Four men came from the camp of the shipwrecked
people, the father of Freda, the little girl,
being one. They say the child and her mother are
well, and as comfortable as they can be made for
the present, but in the spring they will go back to
Nome.
CHAPTER XXIII.
LIGHTS AND SHADOWS OF THE
MINING CAMP.

GAIN the boys are starting for the
Koyuk River country. Although it is
the twenty-eighth of January, and between
twenty-five and thirty degrees
below zero, nothing can deter Mr. L.,
who has made up his mind to go to the
headwaters of the big river regardless
of weather. L., B. and a native
are to compose the party, and this time
they are going with reindeer. They
will take with them a tent, stove, fur sleeping bags,
matches, “grub,” guns and ammunition, not to
mention fry pans and a few tins for cooking purposes.
Then they must each take a change of
wearing apparel in case of accident, and make the
loads as light as possible. B. has made it a point
to look well at his guns and cartridges, and has
been for days cleaning, rubbing and polishing, while
hunting knives have also received attention. The
party may have, in some way, to depend upon these
weapons for their lives before their return.
January twenty-ninth: Twenty-five degrees below
zero, but without wind, and the boys have
started off on their long trip up the Koyuk. The
reindeer were fresh and lively, and when everything[Pg 326]
was loaded and lashed upon the three sleds, the
animals were hitched to them, when, presto! the
scene was changed in a moment. Each deer ran in
several directions at the same time as if demented,
overturning sleds and men, tossing up the snow
like dust under their hoofs, and flinging their antlers
about like implements of battle. Now each
man was put to his wit’s end to keep hold of the
rope attached to the horns of the deer he was
driving, and we who had gone out upon the ice to
watch the departure feared greatly for the lives
of the men interested.
At one time Mr. H., who was kindly assisting,
was flung upon the ground, while a rearing, plunging
animal was poised in mid-air above him; and I
uttered a shriek of terror at the sight, thinking
he would be instantly killed. However, he was
upon his feet in an instant, and pursuing the animals,
still clinging to the rope, as the deer must
never, under any consideration, be allowed to get
away with the loaded sleds.
When one of the boys attempted to sit upon a
load, holding the rope as a guide in his hands,
there would be a whisk, a whirl, and quicker than
a flash over would go the load, sled and man, rolling
over and over like a football on a college
campus.
At this time the sun shone out brightly, tinting
rosily the distant hills, and spreading a carpet of
light under our feet upon the ice-covered surface of[Pg 327]
the bay. The clear, cold air we breathed was fairly
exhilarating, sparkling like diamonds in the sun-beams,
and causing the feathery snowflakes under
our feet to crackle with a delightful crispness.
When the elasticity of the reindeer’s spirits had
been somewhat lessened by exercise, a real start
was made, and we watched them until only small
dots on the distant trail could be distinguished.
Something unpleasant has happened. M., the
Finlander, told me this morning that he wants the
room I occupy upstairs, and, of course, I will have
to give it up. As the other rooms upstairs must
be left for the men, of whom there are such numbers,
there is no place for me except on the old
wooden settle in the sitting room. To be sure,
this is in a warm corner, but there are many and
serious inconveniences, one being that I must of
necessity be the last one to retire, and this is
usually midnight.
For some time past I have been turning over in
my mind the advisability of asking for the situation
of nurse and teacher to Jennie and Charlie,
and living in the hotel. Supplies are growing
shorter in the Mission as the weeks go by, and my
own are about exhausted, as is also my money.
The children need me, and there is plenty of room
in the hotel, though I am not fond of living in one.
I have consulted Mr. H., who sees no harm in my
doing this if I want to. Meals are one dollar each
everywhere in Chinik, and most kinds of “grub”[Pg 328]
one dollar a pound, while for a lodging the same
is charged. To earn my board and room in the
hotel by teaching and taking care of the two children
I should be making an equivalent to four dollars
a day, and I could have a room, at last, to myself.
This is the way I have figured it out; whether
Mollie and the Captain will see it in the same light
remains to be seen.
Later: I ran over to see Mollie and her husband,
and to present my plan to them. They both assented
quickly, the Captain saying he does not
want Jennie to stop her studies, and she is fond of
having me with her. Besides, her mother wants
to spend a good deal of time out hunting and trapping,
as she thinks it better for Jennie, Charlie and
herself to have fresh game, of which they are so
fond, than to eat canned meats. I think it is better
for them, and shall not object to some of the
same fare myself when it is plenty. I am very
glad, indeed, of the opportunity to earn my board
and room in this way, for my work will only be with
and for the two children, and I love them very
much.
January thirtieth: A bad storm came up this
afternoon with wind and snow. At the Mission
one of the newcomers is making two strong reindeer
sleds. He says he is used to Alaska winters,
has been up into the Kotzebue Sound country, and
is now going again with reindeer as soon as his
sleds are finished. He is exceedingly fond of music,[Pg 329]
and enjoys my playing. I wonder if he will
offer to stake a claim for me! I will not ask
him.
January thirty-first: This terrible storm continues
with snow drifting badly, and with wind
most bitter cold. What about the boys on the
Koyuk trail? I fear they will freeze to death. I
have finished six drill parkies for the storekeeper,
but cannot get them to him in the blizzard.
February first: I found when calling upon Jennie
today that her mother was sick in bed with a
very bad throat, so I spent most of the day and
evening there. I did all I could for Jennie as well
as Mollie, doing my best to amuse the child, who is
still strapped down on her bed, and must find the
day long, though she has a good deal of company.
I had a first-class six o’clock dinner at the hotel
tonight,—that is, for Alaska, at this season of the
year.
February second: This is my birthday, and I
have been thinking of my dear old mother so far
away, who never forgets the date of her only
daughter’s birth, even if I do. I should like to
see her, or, at least, have her know how well I am
situated, and how contented I am, with a prospect
before me which is as bright as that of most persons
in this vicinity. If I could send my mother a
telegram of a dozen words, I think they would read
like this: “I am well and happy, with fair prospects.[Pg 330]
God is good.” I think that would cheer
her considerably.
It is beginning to seem a little like spring, and
the water is running down the walls and off the windows
in rivers upon the floors of the Mission, which
we are glad are bare of carpets; the snow having
sifted into the attic and melted. The warm rain
comes down at intervals, and we are hoping for an
early spring.
Mollie is really very sick, and must have a doctor,
her throat being terribly swollen on one side.
The pain and fever is intense, and though we are
doing all we know how to do, she gets no better.
Some men started out for the doctor at White
Mountain, but there was too much water on the
ice, and they returned.
February sixth: The man who made the two
reindeer sleds for his Kotzebue trip has gone at
last with two loads and three reindeer. He wanted
his drill parkie hood bordered with fur, as I had
done some belonging to others, and I furnished
the fox tails, and sewed them on for him.
“Shall I stake a claim for you?” asked the man
with a smile the day before he left the Mission.
“O, I would like it so much!” said I, really delighted.
“I did not wish to ask you, because I
thought you had promised so many.”
“So I have,” he replied, “but I guess I can stake
for one more, and if I find anything good I will remember
you.”[Pg 331]
“Shall I have a paper made out?” I inquired,
feeling it would be safer and better from a business
point of view to do so.
“You may if you like. I will take it,” said he;
and I thanked him very cordially, and hastened to
the Commissioner to have the paper drawn up.
It did not take long, and the man has taken it, and
gone. Being an old mail carrier and stampeder
of experience in this country, he ought to know
how to travel, and, being a Norwegian, he is well
used to the snow and the cold. He says he always
travels alone, though I told him he might sometime
get lost in a storm and freeze to death, at
which he only laughed, and said he was not at all
afraid. Two years afterwards he was frozen to
death on the trail near Teller City, northwest of
Nome. He was an expert on snowshoes or ski,
both of which he learned to use when a boy in
Norway.
February tenth: The two young men, B. and L.,
have returned from the Koyuk trip, having been
able to travel only three days of the eleven since
they left here on account of blizzards, but they will
not give it up in this way.
Mollie and Jennie are better, the doctor having
been here two days. For the little invalid there is
nothing of such interest as Apuk’s baby, and as the
child is well wrapped and brought in often to see
her, she is highly delighted. She holds the baby in
her arms, and hushes it to sleep as any old woman[Pg 332]
might, lifting a warning finger if one enters the
room with noise, for fear of waking it. Little Charlie
cries with whooping cough a great deal and is
taken to Ageetuk’s house when he gets troublesome,
as he worries both Mollie and Jennie. Under
no consideration is Charlie to come near enough to
Jennie to give her the whooping-cough, for she
coughs badly already. She and I make paper dolls
by the dozen, and cloth dresses for her real dolls,
which, so late in the season, are getting quite dilapidated
and look as though they had been in the
wars.
Many natives are now bringing beautiful furs
into camp for sale, and among others one man
brought a cross fox which was black, tipped with
yellow, another which was a lovely brown, and a
black fox valued at two hundred dollars which the
owner refused to sell for less, though offered one
hundred for it. I have never seen more lovely furs
anywhere, and I longed to possess them.
It seems almost like having a hospital here now,
for we have another patient added to our sick list.
Joe, the cook, is ill, and thinks he will die, though
the doctor smiles quizzically as she doses him,
thinking as she does so that a few days in bed and
away from the saloons will be as beneficial as her
prescriptions.
Today the hills surrounding the bay were lovely
in the warm sunshine both morning and evening,[Pg 333]
pink tinted in the sunrise and purple as night approached.
Mail came in by dog-team from Nome, going to
Dawson and the outside, so I mailed several letters.
I wonder if they will be carried two thousand
miles by dogs—the whole length of the Yukon, and
finally reach Skagway and Seattle.
What a wicked world this is anyway! My two
fox skins were stolen from the living room of the
hotel last night, where I hung them, not far from
the stove, after having had them tanned, and forgetting
to take them to my room. I can get no
trace of them, and am exceedingly sorry to lose
them. The captain thinks the skins will be returned,
but I do not.
The Commissioner from Council came into the
hotel, and he, with the resident official, proceeded
to celebrate the occasion by getting uproariously
drunk, or going, as it is here called, “on a toot,”
which is very truthfully expressive, to say the least.
February eighteenth: The doctor went home
several days ago. Mollie is better, and wore, at
the Sunday dinner yesterday, her new grey plaid
dress made by Alma, which fits well and looks
quite stylish. I sat with her at the long table which
was filled with guests, employees and boarders—a
public place for me, which I do not like over much,
but what can I do? The two Commissioners are
sobered, look sickly, and more or less repentant;
the resident official declaring to me he would now[Pg 334]
quit drinking entirely, and buy me a new silk dress
if he is ever seen to take liquor again.
I had nothing to say to him, except to look disgusted,
and he took that as a rebuke. The other
Commissioner was exceedingly polite to me when
he came into the living room to bid all good-bye,
and said if, at any time, there was anything in the
way of business transactions he could do for me,
to let him know; he would be delighted—as if I
would ever ask any favor of him!
The weather is blustery, like March in Wisconsin.
Mollie asked me to go upstairs with her, look
at rooms, and select one for myself, which I did,
deciding to take a small unfurnished one (except
for a spring cot, mirror, and granite wash bowl and
pitcher), as this will be easily warmed by my big
lamp, and it has a west window, through which I
will get the afternoon sun.
I cleaned the floor, and tacked up a white tablecloth
which I had in my trunk, for a curtain; spread
my one deer skin rug upon the floor, made up the
cot bed with my blankets, opened my trunk, hung
up a few garments, and was settled. This is the
first spring bed I have slept upon since Mr. H. took
the velvet couch away from the Mission. I found
the boarded walls very damp, as was also the floor
after cleaning, but my large lamp, kept burning
for two hours, dried them sufficiently, and I am
quite well satisfied.
Ageetuk has been papering the sewing-room[Pg 335]
with fresh wall paper, and it looks better, but it
has made a good deal of confusion all round, and
there are numbers of people, both native and white,
coming and going all day long.
February twenty-third: Yesterday was Washington’s
Birthday, but quiet here. Today Mollie and
I took Jennie and Charlie out on a sled with Muky
to push behind at the handle-bar through the soft,
deep snow. Mollie sat upon the sled, and rode
down hill twice with the children, Muky hopping
on behind; but I took a few kodak views of them,
which I hope will be good. I also received some
mail from the outside which was written last November.
Some of the men in the hotel have tried to play
what they call “a joke” on me. The steward of
the house has a key which unfastens the lock on my
door, as well as others; so they went into my room
and tied a string to the foot of my bed, first boring
a hole through the boards into the hall, and running
the string through it. This string, I suppose,
they intended to pull in the night and frighten me;
but Mollie and I happened to go up there for something
and found it.
I was indignant, but everybody of whom Mollie
inquired denied knowing anything of it, and I said
very little. Going to my trunk afterwards, I found
that the lock had been picked and broken,—a
pretty severe “joke,” and one I do not relish, as
now I have no place in which to keep anything[Pg 336]
from these men. If they enter my room whenever
they choose in the daytime, what is to prevent
them when I am asleep? I took Mollie upstairs
and showed her the broken lock, and she stooped
to brush some white hairs from her dark wool
skirt.
“Where they come from?” she asked suddenly.
Then, picking at the reindeer skin upon the floor
under her feet, she said, nodding her head decidedly,
“I know. He—Sim—come to me in sewing-room,—hair
all same this on two knees of
blank pants. I say, ‘Where you get white reindeer
hair on you, Sim?’ He say, ‘I don’t know.’ Sim
make hole in wall, and string on bed for you, Mrs.
Sullivan. He make lock peeluk, too,” and Mollie’s
face wore a serious and worried expression.
“O, well, Mollie,” said I, “don’t worry. I shall
say nothing to any of the men as they are mad at
me now.”
Mollie nodded significantly and said: “Your fox
skins peeluk, Mrs. Sullivan. Sim knows where—he
never tell—sell for whiskey, maybe,” and Mollie
turned to go, as though he were a hopeless case,
and beyond her government.
“Yes, Mollie, I think so; but you can not help
what these bad men do. I know that, and do not
blame you.”
“My husband very sorry ’bout fox skins. He
cannot find—he no blame,” and she seemed to
fear that I would attach some blame to the captain.[Pg 337]
“No, indeed, Mollie, I don’t think your husband
can help what they do. I should not have left my
fox skins hanging in that room, and will be careful
in future, but if they come into my room they may
steal other things, and I do not like it.”
“I know, I know,—Sim no good—Joe no good—Bub
no good,” and she went away in a very depressed
state of mind to Jennie and Apuk’s baby.
Of course Mollie told all to the captain, who immediately
accused the men in the bar-room, and
they all swore vengeance upon me from that on, so
I suppose they will do all they can to torment me.
We are having a sensation in Chinik. The
“bloomin’ Commissioner” is about to be deposed
from office, for unfitness, neglect of duty, and dissipation;
and a petition is being handed around
the camp by the Marshal, praying the Nome authorities
that he be retained. The honest storekeeper
refused to sign it, as have many of the
Swedes. The Commissioner swears by all that is
good and great to quit drinking, and be decent.
Time will tell—but I have no faith in him.
Mollie goes often these days to look for foxes
and to shoot ptarmigan, taking with her a dog-team,
and a native boy or two with their guns.
When it is bright and sunny, I take the two little
children out in the fur robes on the sled, with a
native to push the latter, and I enjoy the outing
fully as well as they. Jennie is put to bed again on
her return, and the weight—a sand bag—attached[Pg 338]
to her foot, according to the doctor’s orders.
The weather is very springlike, and we have
wind “emeliktuk,” as little Charlie says when he
has a plenty of anything. Snow storms are sandwiched
nicely in between, but many “mushers” are
on the trails. Mollie gets now and then a fox,
either white or crossed, and one day she brought
in a black one.
Liquor is doing its fiendish work in camp each
hour of the twenty-four. Some are going rapidly
down the broad road to destruction; a few turn
their backs upon it, and seek the straighter way.
Some half dozen of the men headed by Sim and
Bub are drinking heavily most of the time, gambling
between spells for the money with which to
buy the poison.
Very late one night a party of drunken men
pounded with their fists upon my door.
“She’s in—hic—there, boys,” said one of the
men in a halting way customary with tipplers.
“Bust in the door!” blurted another.
“Drive her out’n here, Bub, ye fool!” yawned
another, almost too sleepy for utterance.
In the meantime I lay perfectly still. Not a
sound escaped me, for although my heart beat like
a sledge hammer, and I was trembling all over,
I knew it was best not to speak. After a little more
parleying they all went off to finish their “spree”
elsewhere. Next day I reported the affair to the
captain, who, with his wife, in their ground floor[Pg 339]
apartments in the farther end of the building, had
not heard the noise of the night before. Of course
the men were now furious, denying everything, calling
me a “liar,” ad infinitum.
A fine-looking young man, a dentist and doctor,
claiming to come from an eastern city, while sitting
at the table last evening, after much insane gibberish,
fell back intoxicated upon the floor, and lay
insensible for some time. He was finally, when the
others had finished eating, dragged off to bed in a
most inglorious condition, to suffer later for his
dissipation. O, how my heart ached for his dear
old mother so far away! If she had seen him as
I saw him, I think she would have died. It is better
for her to believe him dead than to know the truth.
CHAPTER XXIV.
AN UNPLEASANT ADVENTURE.

HEN Sunday comes, Jennie and I always
wear our best clothes, neither
sewing, studying, nor doing any
work, but we read Bible stories, learn
verses, look at pictures, and keep the
big music box going a good share of
the time. Sometimes if it is bright
and warm, I take the two children out
for a ride, and Jennie likes to call
upon her grandmother.
The long front porch of the hotel has been
opened again, the sides having been taken off, and
the ice and snow cut away from the steps, so the
little ones often play upon the porch in the sun
for an hour or two. There are now a number of
little puppies to be fed and brought up, some of
them of pure Eskimo breed, and Charlie likes to
frolic with them by the hour. They are very cunning,
especially when Mollie puts a little harness
which she has made upon each one, making them
pull the sticks of wood she fastens behind in order
to teach them to haul a load. Mollie is frequently
gone for two days hunting, and if she does not find
what she looks for the first day she sleeps upon[Pg 341]
her sled a few hours rolled in her furs, then rises
and “mushes” on again.
Far and near she is known and respected, and
the name of “Mollie” in this country is the
synonym of all that is brave, true and womanly;
hunting and trapping being for an Eskimo woman
some of the most legitimate of pursuits. The name
of Angahsheock, which means a leader of women
in her native tongue, was given her by her parents,
as those who know her acknowledge.
In severe contrast to the character of Mollie is
Polly, who has developed an insane jealousy of
me on the children’s account, and who never loses
an opportunity to annoy and insult me, much to
my surprise. One day she will hide my books,
pour soup over my dress in the kitchen, slam the
door in my face, and make jeering remarks in Eskimo,
causing the native boys to giggle; and worst
of all, telling Charlie in her language that I will
kill and eat him, thus making him scream when I
attempt to wash or dress him.
However, there is another and principal reason
for her ill treatment of me, which is far reaching,
for Polly and Sim are cronies, and the girl does
what he tells her to do, and that is to torment me
as much as possible.
For these reasons and others I decided some
time ago to carry my meals into the living room on
a tray when I give the children theirs; especially
when Mollie is away, and the rough element does[Pg 342]
not feel the restraint of her presence at table.
There are no other white women in the house, unless,
perhaps, one comes in from the trail with the
men for a day, and these are, as a rule, not the kind
of women to inspire the respect of any one. So I
spread Charlie’s and my food upon a small table,
and Jennie’s on her own tray, for after each little
outing she is strapped and weighted down in bed
as before, and we would be very happy if it were
not for Polly, Sim, and a few other “toughs” in
the hotel and vicinity.
Each day I manage, when Jennie is busy with
Apuk’s baby, O Duk Dok, the deaf girl, grandmother,
and her other numerous Eskimo friends,
to slip away and run out for a little fresh air, and
into the Mission for a few minutes. Then I sit
down at the organ for a while, or hear of those
coming and going on the trails, perhaps climbing
the hill behind the Mission for more exercise before
going back to Jennie.
The first week in April has been pleasant, and
sunny for the most of the time, but last night the
eighth of the month, the thermometer, with a high
wind, fell to thirty degrees below zero, and froze
ice two inches thick in my room upstairs.
Mr. L. and B. have returned from their Koyuk
trip, having staked one creek upon which they
found colors, and which they were informed by natives
was a gold bearing creek. Their supply of
grub would not allow them to remain longer. They[Pg 343]
have staked a claim for me, with the others. Number
Fourteen, above Discovery, is mine, but they
do not give out the name of the creek until they
have been up there and staked another stream near
the first one. When I get my papers recorded I
shall feel quite proud of this, my best claim, perhaps,
so far; and I am thankful and quite happy,
except for the disagreeable features of hotel life,
which I am always hoping will be soon changed.
So long, however, as the deadly liquor is sold in
almost every store and cabin, the cause of disturbances
will remain, and men’s active brains, continually
fired with poison as they are, will concoct
schemes diabolical enough to shame a Mephistopheles.
Today, after due deliberation regarding the matter,
I asked B., on the aside, if he would lend me a
revolver. He gave me a quick and searching look.
“Do you want it loaded?” he asked.
“Yes, please, and I will call after supper for it,”
said I, in a low tone, while going out the door.
Early this morning, putting on my furs and carrying
a small shoe box under my arm, I ran over
to the Mission. In the hall I was met by B., to
whom I handed the box. He took it quietly and
went directly to his room, reappearing in a moment
and handing it back to me, saying significantly as
he did so: “Three doses of that are better than
one, if any are needed,” which remark I understood
without further explanation.[Pg 344]
I have brought the box to my room and have
placed it under the head of my cot upon the floor,
where, in case of emergency, it may be of service.
It is not a pretty plaything, and will not be used as
such by me, but I shall feel safer to know it is
near at hand.
Little did I know when I selected my room the
day Mollie brought me upstairs that on the other
side of the board partition slept the man who had
killed another in the early winter; and, though the
murderer has so far never molested me in any way,
still he sometimes gets what they call “crazy
drunk,” and is as liable to kill some other as he
was to kill the first; then, too, thin board walls
have ears, and I have heard the mutterings and
threats of these wretches for a number of weeks.
I have been exceedingly sorry for a month past
to see the preparations my friends, the Swedish
women in the Mission, are making to go to Nome,
and now they expect to start tomorrow. They
must be in town to put everything in readiness for
the opening of the “Star” when the first steamers
arrive from the outside. The weather is bright
and pretty cold today, making the trails good, but
in a thaw they are bad and are now liable to break
up at any time. Quite a party will go to Nome,
Mr. L., M. and others, and they will travel with
dogs. I dread to see my Swedish friends, the only
white women in this camp with whom I can be
friendly, leave Chinik, for I shall then be more[Pg 345]
alone than ever. If this tiresome ice in the bay
would only move out so the boats could get in, we
should have others, but there is no telling when
that will be. Many are now betting on the breaking
up of the ice, and all hope it will be very soon.
May second: My Swedish friends left very early
today for Nome, and only Miss L. from the Home
is there, sweeping out the place; but B. and the
visiting preacher will go with her to the Home today,
closing the hospitable doors of the Mission
for a time. This evening they held a meeting for
the natives in camp, and I attended, but it seemed
like a funeral without the friends now “mushing”
on the Nome trail.
A woman has come to live at Mellie’s, and is a
study in beaver coat, dyed brown hair (which
should be grey, according to her age), and with,
it is reported, a bank account of one hundred and
fifty thousand dollars, after having lived in Alaska
nearly five years. She is called a good “stampeder,”
has a pleasant, smiling face, but is usually
designated “notorious.”
May tenth: Mollie went out early with Muky,
her dog-team and guns, to escort Ageetuk, Alice
and Punni Churah, with their mother, who is Mollie’s
aunt, to their new hunting camp in the mountains.
At seven in the evening Mollie returned
with wet feet. Tomorrow she will take a net, and
some other things they have forgotten. They have
gone to take their annual spring vacation and[Pg 346]
hunt grey squirrels for a month, living in a hut in
the meantime. The weather is warm and springlike.
May thirteenth: The captain has been obliged to
go to Nome on business, weak and ill though he
is, and has been for months. It did not seem to me
that he could live through the winter, and he is far
too weak to take this long trip over the trail, but
he says he is obliged to go, and will return at the
earliest possible moment. He has taken Fred, the
Russian boy, and a team of nine dogs, leaving after
supper, and intending to travel night and day, as
we now have no darkness.
The dissipated men around camp, idle and
drunken most of the time, with nothing to occupy
their attention after the long, tedious winter, still
spend their hours in gossiping, swearing, drinking,
and gambling, knowing no day and no night, but
making both hideous to those around them. As a
destroyer of man’s self-respect, independence, and
dignity, there is nothing to compare with the accursed
liquor. There are numbers of instances in
camp proving the truth of this statement. There is
the English clergyman’s tall and handsome son,
well educated, musical and of agreeable manners—fitted
to grace the best society, but—liquor is
to blame for his present condition, which is about
as low as man can sink.
It is ten in the evening and I am in my little
room upstairs, the only white woman in the camp[Pg 347]
except Mellie and two like her. Down stairs in the
bar-room the men are singing, first coon songs and
then church hymns, with all the drunken energy
they can muster. The crash of broken glass, angry
oaths, and the slamming of doors reaches my ears
so frequently as to cause little surprise, the French
cooks in the kitchen adding their share to the disturbance.
In a distant part of the hotel lies the
little sick girl, her cot rolled each night close to
the bedside of her mother, who tries to soothe her
in her pain, Mollie and the wicked little Eskimo
servant being the only women besides myself in
the house. The noise and confusion increases
down stairs, and I shall sleep little tonight. I will
look at my revolver and see that its contents have
not been removed.
May fifteenth: Here I am alone with the little
children, a bad native girl, and a gang of the worst
men in Alaska, Mollie having gone out hunting.
At midnight Sim, Mellie and several others left for
a dance at White Mountain, but it was two o’clock
in the morning before the house was quiet. While
I lay perfectly still, and trying to sleep, a man’s
stealthy footstep passed my door. He walked in
his stocking feet—bare floors and walls echo the
slightest sound, and my ears are keen. Was it a
friend or foe? What was his object? My heart
beat with a heavy thud, but I remembered the loaded
revolver under my bed, and thanked God for it.
After a long time I slept a fitful, uneasy sleep[Pg 348]
for an hour, and dressed myself as usual at half-past
six o’clock, feeling badly for want of needed
sleep. Afterwards I washed, dressed and fed the
children, amusing and entertaining them in my accustomed
way. Ageetuk’s house being closed,
little Charlie is kept here all the time, Polly looking
after him nights. A saloon keeper named Fitts,
villainous in reality as well as in looks, is hanging
around continually, wearing the blackest of looks
at every one, having been in trouble nearly all winter,
and closing out his saloon a few weeks ago.
A big Dutchman, burly as a blacksmith and well
soaked in whiskey, lounges about in blue denim
and skull cap, winking his bleared eyes at Polly
and swearing soundly at his native wife when she
steps inside the doors to look after him.
All went well for a while today after Mollie’s
leaving, Jennie coaxing to be carried to her grandmother’s
for a visit, to which I consented, until
Charlie and I sat down to supper, which I had
spread, as is my habit, in the living room. During
the day I had turned matters well over in mind,
and decided, with Mollie’s advice, to sleep in her
bed alongside of Jennie’s cot, and to have grandmother
stay with us, locking the doors of the
rooms, as they should be. To my consternation,
when I chanced to look for the keys in the doors,
there were none, showing plainly that they had
been removed.
This looked like a trap. There was nothing to[Pg 349]
do, much as I disliked it, but to ask for the keys,
as I would never spend the night in the house
without them. Soon afterward the steward entered,
and I very calmly and politely asked for the
door keys of the two rooms, saying that I would
spend the night with Jennie. With cool insolence
he replied that he would lock them himself.
Again the trap. I made no reply. I saw that he
had been drinking—that he was not himself, and
that it was useless to argue with him.
After waiting for an answer, and getting none,
the man went out carelessly, leaving the door ajar
behind him. At that moment the supper bell rang
and he, with others, sat down to the table.
“She wants the keys to the doors, she says,”
drawled the man I had spoken with regarding
them.
“What did ye tell her?” demanded one of the
ruffians.
“I told her I would lock the doors myself,” said
the fellow.
“What does she want of keys? Who is she
afraid of? It must be you, Bub; ’tain’t me,” said
one.
“You’re a liar!” shouted Bub. “It’s the genial
dispenser of booze here beside me she’s afraid of.”
“I’ll see to her after supper, you bet!” shouted
an official voice, at which I shuddered. A general
hubbub now ensued; among others I could distinguish[Pg 350]
the word “black-snake whip,” but I had
heard enough.
I was planning as I listened. Leaning forward
I kissed the little child beside me, and said softly,
“Eat all your supper, dear, and then go to Polly.
‘Sully’ is going to grandma’s.”
Throwing a light wrap over my head, I ran out
of the front door, and around the west end of the
house, careful not to pass the dining-room windows,
where the men would see me, and hastened
to grandmother’s cabin, knowing that I should
there find Jennie. Grandmother lived alone except
for O Duk Dok, the deaf girl, and they must
give me shelter for the night.
Here I found Jennie quite happy, with her deaf
friend sitting on the edge of the bed beside her,
while her grandmother was busy with her work.
In a few words I explained to the old woman
the situation, and I was made welcome, Jennie being
pleased to remain in the cabin all night. I
knew Polly would put Charlie to bed when the time
came, and the boy was safe enough where he was.
I did not believe the gang would disturb me in
grandmothers’ cabin, but I feared they would loot
my room in my absence.
Here Jennie could assist me. I now asked her
to have O Duk Dok go out for the native named
Koki, and bring him to me, which she did, the deaf
girl understanding by the motion of the child’s lips
what was being said.[Pg 351]
O Duk Dok then drew on her parkie, and went
out.
“Koki,” said I, when the native had entered the
room a few minutes later, and closed the door behind
him, “will you go to my room—Number
three—in the hotel, and get some things for me?”
“Yes,” was the laconic reply of the man.
“Here is the key of the door. Between the mattresses
of the bed you will find two books, and in
the shoe box on the floor there is a revolver. Bring
them to me under your parkie so no one shall see
what you have. Take this little key, lock my trunk
and be sure you fasten the door behind you. You
won’t forget?”
“All right. I no forget,” and Koki grinned, and
went out.
He did not forget. In about twenty minutes he
returned, bringing the keys, revolver, and diaries
which I had kept hidden for fear the lawless fellows
might find and destroy them.
I now felt much relieved. I did not think the
gang would come to the cabin, but in case they did
there was the revolver, and grandmother’s two
doors had locks, which if not the very strongest,
were better than none, and I fastened them immediately
after Koki’s departure.
May eighteenth: The night I slept in grandmother’s
cabin with Jennie passed quietly for us.
I slept in my clothes and muckluks, an old quilt and
fur parkie on some boards being my bed, though[Pg 352]
grandmother finally gave me a double blanket for
covering when I asked for it.
It was long past midnight before we slept. The
child was restless, and urged her grandmother to
tell her Eskimo stories. O Duk Dok slept heavily,
unconscious of all around her. My own senses
were on the alert. I listened intently to catch
every sound, but we were too far away from the
hotel to hear the carousal that I well knew was
there in progress. The mushers from the dance
were hourly expected home, and would then add
their part to the midnight orgies. The low droning
of the old Eskimo woman, telling her tales of the
Innuits, of the Polar bear, the seal and the walrus,
of the birds, their habits and nestlings; this
was the only sound I heard.
After a time the others slept and I went to the
window and looked out. At my right, only a stone’s
throw away, was the Mission, its windows and
doors all fastened, and its occupants gone. I felt
a heart-sinking sensation as I thought of the
friends who were there lately. Across the way was
the old schoolhouse, in which were the musician,
his partner and the deaf man, who had been bitten
by the mad dog. They were within calling distance,
and for that I felt thankful. I had dreaded
the night in the cabin for fear that I should suffer
for fresh air, but seeing a broken pane of glass
into which some cloth had been stuffed, I removed
the latter, and allowed the pure air to enter. Of[Pg 353]
course the place was scented with seal oil, but
grandmother’s cabin was comparatively tidy and
clean.
Next morning, when we knew that breakfast was
over, we went in a body to the hotel, grandmother
carrying Jennie on her back, according to Eskimo
custom. Some of the men were still sleeping off
their dissipation of the night before. Nothing was
said about our remaining away, and the Eskimo
women spent the day with us. Others also came,
called quietly in to see Jennie, and remained to the
meals I was glad to give them for their company.
When six o’clock arrived, and still we saw nothing
of Mollie, I felt anxious. If she did not return
it meant another night in the native hut for us.
Eight, nine, ten o’clock—thank God! She had
come at last. I could have hugged her for joy. She
had nearly one hundred ptarmigan, enough to last
till the captain came home, and would not leave
us again alone.
Later: The captain returned from Nome, having
made the trip of eighty-five miles and back by dog-team
in four days and nights, a very quick trip indeed.
The “toughs” have subsided, and are on
their good behavior for the present, at least, fearing
what the captain will say and do when their last
doings are reported, but I understand that most of
them are mortally offended at my remaining at
grandmother’s, as no one takes offense so easily
as a rogue when his honesty is doubted.
CHAPTER XXV.
STONES AND DYNAMITE.

HE last week of May has finally come,
and with it real spring weather. The
children play out in the sand heap on
the south side of the house for hours
together, enjoying the warm sunshine
and pleasant air, the little girl
clothed from head to foot in furs.
Never has a springtime been so welcome
to me, perhaps because in striking
contrast to the long, cold winter
through which we have just passed. From the
hillside behind the Mission, the snow is slowly disappearing,
first from the most exposed spots and
rocks, the gullies keeping their drifts and ice
longer. Mosses are everywhere peeping cheerfully
up at me in all their tints of gorgeous green, some
that I found recently being tipped with the daintiest
of little red cups. This, with other treasures, I
brought in my basket to Jennie when I returned
from my daily walk upon the hill, and together we
studied them closely under the magnifying glass.
To examine the treasures brought in by Mollie,
however, we needed no glass. They are sand-pipers,
ptarmigan, squirrels, and occasionally a wild
goose, shot, perhaps, in the act of flying over the[Pg 355]
hunter’s head, as these birds are now often seen
and heard going north. In the evening I see from
my window the neighboring Eskimo children playing
with their sleds, and sometimes they light a
bonfire, shouting and chattering in their own
unique way. All “mushers” now travel at night
when the trail is frozen, as it is too soft in the daytime,
and the glare of the sun often causes snow-blindness.
Then, too, there is water on the ice in
places, which we are glad to see, and pools of the
same are standing around the Mission and schoolhouse.
I can no longer go out in my muckluks,
but must wear my long rubber boots and short
skirts.
Today I went out for an hour, walking to Chinik
Creek over the tundra, from which the snow has
almost disappeared, and returned by the hill-top
path. The tundra was beautiful with mosses,
birds were singing, and the rushing and roaring
of the creek waters fairly made my head swim, they
were such unusual sounds. The water was cutting
a channel in the sands where it empties into the
bay. Here it was flowing over the ice, helping to
loosen the edge and allow it to drift out to sea.
There is little change in the manners and dispositions
of the rough men in camp. There are the
same things with which to contend day after day,
the same annoyances and trials to endure, with
new ones in addition quite frequently.
June has come at last, and all the world should[Pg 356]
be happy, but, alas, there is always some worm in
the bud to do the blasting. This morning about
three o’clock I was wakened by the sound of
drunken voices outside my window, followed by
stones hurled against the side of the house. Quickly
rising, I cautiously peeped out from behind the
curtain, but was not surprised at what I saw.
There, about a hundred feet away, were four men,
all well known to me as members of the gang, and
all in the most advanced stages of intoxication.
On the step of a neighboring cabin sat the murderer,
Ford, hugging in a maudlin way a big black
bottle.
On the ground, in the dirt, there rolled two
young men, the Englishman underneath, and Big
Bub over him. Sim, the leader, had aimed four
stones at my window, but missed it, and felt the
need of more stimulant, so he took the bottle from
Ford, carried it to the lumber pile, a few feet away,
sat down, put it to his lips and drank heavily.
Again and again he tipped up the bottle while he
drank, but finally threw it away empty. Then,
with much exertion, he stooped to pick up a stone.
He was aiming at my window. I dodged into
a corner, but the box washstand stood partly in
my way. Would he hit his mark? I did not believe
it. He was too drunk. Crack! came the stone
against the house.
I waited. Another followed. In the meantime
the other men had paid no attention to him, as[Pg 357]
Ford was watching the two tumblers, the lumber
pile being between them and Sim; and the three
started for the front door around the south side
of the house. Sim followed them. I now hoped
he would forget his stone throwing. When they
were all out of sight I breathed more freely. Surely
now the trouble was over, I thought, and I threw
off my fur coat which I had hastily pulled on over
my wrapper, crept into bed and covered my head
with the blankets.
I now thought quickly. Even if Sim should forget
to throw more stones, would he not soon come
upstairs and perhaps give me more trouble? Would
it not be better to dress myself and be prepared
for any emergency? I was hurriedly deliberating
upon the matter—my head still covered with the
blankets—when there was a loud crash and shivered
glass covered the floor and the bed clothes.
Instantly throwing the latter back, I looked around
me. I could see no stone, and I had heard none
fall upon the floor, but it must be there somewhere.
I now stepped carefully out of bed, in order to
avoid the glass, my feet being already in knit, wool
slippers, with thick, warm soles—and again
looked out.
There was no one to be seen. Sim had done
his dastardly work, and gone indoors. Would this
end it? My teeth shattered, and I felt cold. I
must keep my nerve, however, and I did so, dressing
myself carefully even to my stout shoes which[Pg 358]
I laced up in front and tied. Then I drew on my
fur coat and sat down to wait.
Below the four men were poking around in the
kitchen, trying to find something to eat or drink.
It was not long before I heard them coming upstairs,
and all tumbled into the next room, which
was occupied by Ford.
If they came to molest me further there was yet
one way of escape which I would try before using
my revolver. The weapon I did not want to use
unless driven to it. There was the staging outside
my window which had never been removed since
the house was built, the year before. I could very
easily step out upon it, and walk to the end of the
house, but then I must either jump or remain, for
there was no ladder. This staging was, perhaps,
twenty feet from the ground, and the latter frozen.
To slide down a post would tear my hands fearfully.
I had not long to wait. To go peaceably to bed
seemed to be the last thing these men thought of,
and one picked up a gun, which, for hunting purposes,
every man in the house kept close at hand.
“I zay, now, Bub, put up zat gun. Zis ain’t no
place for shootin’,” drawled a thick, sleepy voice
which I recognized instantly.
“Shut yer gab! Who’s hurtin’ you?” answered
Bub, the biggest of the four, and one of the ugliest
when intoxicated.
“Mrs. Sullivan’s in the next room. You wouldn’t[Pg 359]
shoot her, would you?” asked Sim sneeringly in a
loud tone, for he could stand up under great quantities
of liquor.
“Sh! Keep still a minute, you fool!” in a harsh
whisper from Bub.
I was now thankful that I was dressed. I waited
no longer. Opening the door I ran down stairs to
Mollie and the captain, knocking loudly upon their
door.
“Hang those brutes!” exclaimed the captain
angrily, when I had finished telling him what had
happened. “What is the matter with them, any
way?”
“Whiskey,” said I. “They are all as drunk as
pirates.”
“Show me your room and window,” demanded
the captain, who by this time had gotten into some
of his clothing, and stepped into the living room
where I was.
I then led the way upstairs, and threw open my
door. What a sight! Broken glass covered the
floor and bed, the cool morning air pouring in
through the broken pane of which there was little
left in the sash.
That was enough for the captain. He made
straight for the next room, where all was now perfectly
still, only Ford remaining in it, the others
having had sense enough to sneak off to their own
places, after hearing me run down stairs to report.
Seizing my blankets I closed and locked the door[Pg 360]
and made my way down stairs to Mollie. Above
we could hear the captain’s voice in angry altercation
with the men, they denying everything, of
course, even the stone throwing, with the window
as evidence against them. It was half-past four and
I had slept little. There was no fire in the house,
and I was cold; so, throwing down a few skins in
a corner of the sewing-room, with my blankets
upon them, I covered myself to get warm.
At last the house was once more quiet, and I
slept for an hour, only to meet black and angry
looks from the men all day, accompanied by threats
and curses, though I said nothing to them. I
picked up the stone from my reindeer rug, where it
had fallen after shattering the window pane, and it
lay only two feet from my head. It was about the
size of an egg.
Of course it is impossible for me to leave Chinik,
as the winter trails are broken up, the ice has not
left the bay, and no steamers can enter; so we are
practically prisoners. O, how I long to get away
from this terrible place! Never since I came to
Chinik have I given these men one cross word, and
yet they hate me with a bitter, jealous hatred, such
as I have never before seen. Some weeks ago I
pinned a slip of paper into my Bible, upon which
I have written the address of my parents, in case
anything should happen to me. O, to be once
more safe at home with them! God grant that I
may be before many months shall have passed.[Pg 361]
A splendid warm, bright day, June thirteenth,
the most of which the children and I have spent
upon the sandy beach in front of the hotel. Little
Jennie lies and plays on the warm, dry sand,
though, of course, she does not stand on her feet
nor walk. Other small Eskimos come to play
with them, for Charlie is always on hand for a
play spell on the sand, and I doze and read under
my umbrella in the meantime, with an eye always
upon them. They make sand pies, native igloos,
and many imaginary things and places, but more
than any other thing is my mind upon the coming
of the steamers, when I hope to get away.
Mollie came in last night from a seal hunt upon
the ice, and she, with the three native boys, secured
a white seal, and eight others, but did not bring
all with them. There is a great deal of water on
the ice at this time, and none but natives like to
travel upon it. Ducks and geese are flying northward
in flocks above our heads, and we feast daily
upon them. They are very large and tasty, and
the cook knows well how to serve them.
We now see a line of blue water out beyond the
ice, and even distinguish white breakers in the distance.
Today I took a field glass, and climbing the
hill behind the Mission to look as far out as possible,
strained my eyes to see a steamer. As I
stood upon the point to get a better view, the whole
world around seemed waking from a long, long
sleep.[Pg 362]
At my left was Chinik Creek, pouring its rushing
waters out over the bay ice with a cheerful,
rapid roaring. Farther away south stretched the
Darby Cape into blue water which looked like indigo,
surmounted by long rolling breakers with
combs of white, all being fully fourteen miles away.
To the northwest of the sand-spit upon which
Chinik is built, and which cuts Golovin Bay almost
in two, the Fish River is also emptying itself, as is
Keechawik Creek and other smaller streams. Over
all the welcome sunshine is flooded, warming the
buds and roots on the hillside, and making all
beautiful.
June seventeenth: This is Bunker Hill Day in
New England, and the men have been celebrating
on their own account, setting off a fifty pounds
box of dynamite in the neighborhood to frighten
the women, I suppose. The shock was terrific,
breaking windows, lamp shades, and jarring
bottles and other articles off the shelves. Jennie
was dreadfully frightened, and screamed for a few
minutes, while the living room soon filled with
men inquiring the cause of the explosion. By and
by a man came in saying that another box of giant
powder would be set off, but with that the Marshal
left the room with a determined face, and we heard
no more dynamiting. The men, as usual, were intoxicated.
I have just had a pleasant little outing at the
Home, going with Mollie, who invited me to go[Pg 363]
with her. She was going out seal hunting on the
ice, would leave me at the Home for a short visit,
and pick me up on her return. Ageetuk and
grandmother would take good care of Jennie for
so short a time, and I needed the change, so I
ran up to my room, threw some things hastily into
a small bag to take with me, locked my trunk, (I
had long ago put a package consisting of papers
and diaries into the safe in the kind storekeeper’s
care), dressed myself in my shortest skirts and
longest rubber boots, and we started. The weather
was too warm for furs in sunshine, or while running
behind a sled, so I wore a thick jacket, black
straw hat with thick veil, and kid gloves.
We left the hotel about half-past seven o’clock
in the evening, but with the sun still high and
warm. Mollie had her small sled and three dogs,
with Muky and Punni Churah and their guns. The
other sled was a large one, and to it were hitched
seven good dogs, accompanied by Ituk and Koki.
Upon the sleds were furs, guns, bags and fishing
tackle. Along shore there was considerable water
on the ice, in a few spots the latter had disappeared,
and we could see the sandy beach, but
farther east the ice was firmer, and Mollie, who
made for the best looking places, led the way, I
running closely in her footsteps.
Behind us came the men and teams, the calls of
the Eskimos to their dogs sounding musically on
the quiet evening air. Mollie and I were now[Pg 364]
leaping over water-filled cracks or lanes in the
ice, she having assured me that after getting away
from the shore it would be better traveling, and we
could ride on the sleds when we were tired, but
I felt considerable pride in keeping up with her, and
soon grew very warm from the stiff exercise, unaccustomed
as I was, while she was well used to it.
After we had left the shore some distance behind
us we halted for the sleds to come up, Mollie seating
herself upon the small one, I waiting for the
other a little later. There I ran at the handle-bars
for a time, but at last I threw myself upon the
sled among the furs, and pulled a parkie over me.
We were now in the water a foot deep most of the
time, the dogs picking their way along over the
narrowest water lanes, Ituk and Koki shouting to
them to gee and haw, and with Eskimo calls and
whip-snapping, urging them on continually.
Soon we left the smaller sled behind; Mollie,
Muky and Punni making the air ring with laughter
and Eskimo songs. As we started out from home
the sun shone brightly upon us, but as we left the
land at our backs, and made our way farther out
upon the bay, the sun dropped lower and lower, the
sky became a mass of crimson and yellow, and
the whole world seemed modestly blushing.
Along the east shore the rolling hills lay almost
bare of snow, the brown tundra appearing softly
and most artistically colored. To the north the
mountains were still tipped with snow, as was[Pg 365]
also the promontory—Cape Darby, at the extreme
southeast point. This was spotted and
streaked with white, its rocky cliff black in shadow
by contrast. Our eyes eagerly scanned the horizon
for steamers, and a schooner had been reported
off Darby loaded with fresh fruits and vegetables,
but we could not see it.
By and by we were past most of the water lanes,
and the ice was better. At half-past nine o’clock in
the evening the sky was exceedingly grand, and a
song of gratitude welled up in my heart, for this
was another world from the one we had just left,
and I no longer wondered at Mollie’s love of hunting
in the fresh air, under the beautiful skies, and
with her freedom to travel wherever she liked.
With her I felt perfectly safe. No harm could
come to me when Mollie led the way, and my confidence
in the native men was equally strong; for
were they not as familiar with ice and water as
with land? I soon saw that we were headed toward
the island, though I did not know why, and by this
time Mollie was far ahead, also that we were being
followed by a dog-team from Chinik, which puzzled
me, for I had not heard that others were going
out hunting for seal, or starting for the Home,
which was my destination.
When we reached the north end of the small island
Mollie ran up the path like a deer, I following,
as did the natives, leaving the dogs to rest upon
the ice. From a hole in the rocks Koki now hauled[Pg 366]
his kyak or small skin boat, where he had left it
from a former trip, and dragging it down upon the
ice, he lashed it upon the small sled to be carried
still farther.
The dog-team, which I had seen following in the
distance, had now come up with us, and I heard
one man say to the other: “There is Mrs. Sullivan,”
but I did not recognize the voice. When
they came nearer, we found it to be two men from
camp who were going out to the schooners to buy
fruit and vegetables, and they wanted to get a dog
belonging to them which Mollie had borrowed and
had hitched into her team. A change of dogs was
then made, and we started—Mollie and I on her
big sled, the other two following.
We now skirted the rocky cliffs, and found the ice
hummocky between great, deep cracks where the
water was no longer white, but dark and forbidding.
Sometimes Koki suddenly started the dogs to one
side to avoid dark-looking holes in the ice, the
dogs leaping over seams which quickly lay beneath
us as the fore and hinder parts of our sled
bridged the crevasse of ugly water.
Now the sled swayed from side to side as the
dogs made sudden curves or dashes, then a big
hummock of ice and snow had to be crossed, and
one end of the sled went up while the other went
down. I was holding to the side rails with both
hands, and knowing that the sled was a good,
strong one, I had no fear of its breaking, but my[Pg 367]
feet were cold in my rubber boots, and I had drawn
some furs over me.
Mollie is not a great talker, she seldom explains
anything, and one has only to wait and see
the outcome of her movements, and this I did,
when she suddenly with Ituk left the sleds and
climbed the rocks of the island again on the south
side. Then I saw them gathering sticks and small
driftwood, and knew that they would make a fire
upon the ice at midnight, while preparing to hunt
for seals.
Coming to a rough place, with high-piled ice between
great, ugly seams over which the sagacious
dogs dragged the sleds always in a straight line,
not slantwise, I climbed out, and Mollie and Ituk
came with their driftwood, which they threw upon
the sled; the two men making for the schooner
forging ahead in the direction of Cape Darby.
Ituk and Muky now made ready to go with
me to the Home, a half mile away to the east where
they were also to get some bread, this important
item having been forgotten in the hurry of departure
from Chinik. In the meantime Mollie, not
to lose a moment of time, as is her method, had
gotten out her fishing tackle and was already fishing
for tom-cod through a hole in the ice. Bidding
her Beoqua (good-bye), we started for the
Home, Ituk politely taking my little bag, and
Muky leaping lightly over the rocks toward the
mainland. Along the shore of the island I was[Pg 368]
fearful of cutting my boots on the jagged rocks
and rubble thickly strewn over the sands, and had
to proceed cautiously for a time, but Ituk, perceiving
my difficulty, led to a smoother path, and we
were soon on the mainland, and upon the soft
tundra, when it was only a few minutes walk to
the Home.
It was eleven o’clock in the evening, and we
found the missionaries just returned from a trip to
the schooner, where they had secured fresh potatoes
and onions. The smell and taste of an
onion was never so good to me before, and the potatoes
were the first we had seen in six months.
I had been in the Home in the early spring for a
day, and now, as then, met with a warm welcome
from the missionaries. They now had double the
number of native children they had in Chinik, and
their house is large and commodious, though unfinished.
I was assigned the velvet couch upon which I
had spent a good many nights, and the two natives
returned to Mollie after securing some bread from
Miss E. for their lunches.
Next day we visited, and I rested considerably,
finding again how good it was to be in a safe and
quiet place with no fear of stone throwers or giant
powder.
About half-past ten o’clock in the evening, just
after the sun had set, we started on our return trip,
Mollie having arrived with her dog-teams and[Pg 369]
natives. The sunset sky was exceedingly beautiful,
but beneath our feet we had only very bad ice
and water. Near the island great ice cakes were
floating, interspersed with dark seams and lanes
wider than we had before seen. Sometimes I rode
on one of the sleds or walked, ran or leaped over
the water holes to keep up with the rest until too
tired and heated, when I threw myself upon a sled
again; but as we proceeded we found firmer ice and
less water. Mollie and I had both to ride upon
one sled now, for Ituk had lashed the kyak upon
the little one, and they were one dog short, as an
animal had run away while they were eating supper
at the Home. Finally, pitying the dogs upon the
large sled, who seemed to have a heavy load (although
only one seal, as they had met with little
success in hunting), I motioned to Ituk to wait for
me, which he did.
“Ituk,” I called, as I came nearer, “let me ride
in the kyak, will you?”
“You ride in kyak?” asked the man in surprise.
“Yes, let me get in, I will hold on tight,” and,
as he made no objection, I climbed upon the boat,
crept into the hole made for that purpose and sat
down.
“All right, Ituk; I am ready,” I said.
The man laughed, cracked his whip, and the dogs
started.
I had not before realized that I would be sitting
so high up, and that at each dip in a crack or depression[Pg 370]
of the ice, when the sled runner ran a little
higher than the other, I should stand a grand
chance of being spilled into the water, but my feet
were so cold in my rubber boots that I was thinking
to get them under cover would be agreeable,
and though Ituk probably well knew what the outcome
of my ride would be, he very patiently agreed
to allow me to try it.
We had not gone far when our dogs made a
sudden dash or turn, the right-hand runner slipped
lengthwise into a seam, and over we went, sled,
kyak, woman and all upon the ice in a sorry heap.
The dogs halted instantly, and Ituk, who had been
running on the left-hand side of them, came back at
my call.
“O, Ituk, come here and help me! I cannot
get out of the kyak,” I cried lustily. “I will not
get into it again,” and I rubbed my wrist upon
which the skin had been slightly bruised, and he
assisted me to my feet.
The native laughed.
“Kyak no good—riding—heap better run,” he
said.
“That’s so, Ituk, but my feet are very cold.”
“Get warm quick—you running,” was his reply,
and we started on again.
When five or six miles from Chinik the water became
more troublesome, and our progress was
slow. We were wading through holes, leaping over
seams, and treading through slush and water. It[Pg 371]
was colder than the night before, a thin skin of ice
was forming, but not firm enough to hold one up.
I was cold and cuddled into the sled with Mollie,
but the two natives running alongside were continually
sitting upon the rail to get a short ride
instead of walking, thus loading the sled too heavily
upon one side, and we were soon all tumbled into
water a foot deep.
As I went over I threw out my arm to save myself,
and my sleeve was soaked through in an instant.
Koki and Muky thought it great fun, and
laughed and shouted in glee, but to me it was a
little too serious. My clothes were wet through
on my right side, and I was now obliged to run
whether I wanted to do so or not, for we were fully
a mile from home. My gloves and handkerchief
were soaked with water, and I threw them away,
thrusting my hands into my jacket pockets and
running to keep up with the others.
We were now wading and leaping across frequent
lanes, and were more in the water than upon
the ice. The sharp eyes of the natives had discerned
the shore line well bordered by open water,
and they were wondering how they would get
across. Finally we could get no farther, and were
a hundred feet from the beach.
“Dogs can swim,” said Mollie, sententiously,
as was her habit.
“How will you and I get on shore, Mollie?” I
asked anxiously.[Pg 372]
“Ituk, big man,—he carry you, may be,” answered
Mollie, roguishly, with a twinkle.
“But,” I continued seriously, “how deep is the
water, anyway, Koki?” seeing that he had been
wading in to find out.
“Him not much deep. We walk all right,—’bout
up here,” and the native placed his hand half
way between his knee and thigh to show the depth,
then walking a little farther down towards the hotel
he seemed to find a better place, and called for all
to follow, which we did.
The men waded across to the shore, stepping
upon stones which now and then, at this point,
were embedded in the sand, Mollie boldly following
their example. All wore high-skin boots,
coming far above their knees, and water-tight, but
my rubber-boots had never been put to a test like
this, only coming a little above my knees, where the
soft tops were confined by a drawstring, and this
water was very cold, as I had good reason to
know.
However, there was nothing to do but go on,
first watching the others, and then plunging boldly
in. I drew my boot-tops higher, fastened the
strings securely, picked up my short skirts and
wound them closely about me, but not in a manner
to impede my progress, and stepped in.
By this time the dogs and men were upon the
sands, and making for home, only a few rods away,
but I took my time, walking slowly in order that[Pg 373]
the water should not slop over the tops of my
boots, and we finally reached the beach and the
house safely.
CHAPTER XXVI.
GOOD-BYE TO GOLOVIN BAY.

N the morning of the twenty-sixth of
June I awoke to find that the ice had
drifted out to sea in the night, eight
days after Mollie and I had taken our
twelve miles trip across the bay and
return. Then came hard rain and
wind, that, for several days, blew the
ice back into the bay, first to one side,
and then to the other, so that the
steamers waiting to come in could not
do so for fear of the drifting floes. By the thirtieth
of June schooners were coming into the bay with
passengers and freight, and the coast steamers,
“Elmore” and “Dora,” had begun to make regular
trips to and from Nome.
With them came mails from the outside, with
newspapers and tidings of friends in the States.
Then our fingers trembled at opening our letters
until we found that all our dear ones were well,
and we heartily thanked the Lord. There were
other white women in camp by this time, and many
strangers at the hotel, among others, officials, and
those in authority.
Since the stone-throwing episode the Marshal
had been doing duty as watchman, sleeping during[Pg 375]
the day and guarding the house nights, the heavy
iron “bracelets” in his inner coat pocket weighing
scarcely more than the loaded revolver in his
belt.
Our little sick girl being obliged now to keep her
bed continually, with no more playing in the sand
and sunshine, although her cough had left her, was
still the same sweet, patient child she had been
through all her illness, and my whole time was
given to her. Before one of the sunny south windows
of the living room we placed her cot each
morning, and here she received her numerous
friends, both Eskimo and white, and their names
were legion. They came from the east, west,
north and south, all sorry to know of her illness,
and bringing presents with them.
Sometimes it was a little live bird or squirrel,
a delicious salmon trout or wild fowl for her supper;
sometimes it was candy, nuts, or fresh fruit
from Nome, and with everything she was well
pleased and joyous. Friends soon came in from
the outside, bringing city dolls dressed in ribbons
and laces; there were tiny dishes, chairs, tables,—a
hundred things dear to a little girl’s heart, and
all pleased her immensely, but all were laid quickly
aside for a basket of wild flowers or mosses, for a
fish, bird, animal or baby, showing plainly her taste
for the things of nature in preference to art. Her
love for her birthplace, with its hills, streams and
ocean is a sincere one, and, young as she is, and[Pg 376]
having seen the great city by the Golden Gate,
with many of its wonders, she is happiest in Chinik.
Here lives her dear, old grandmother, her cousins
and aunts, not to mention the little calico-capped
baby belonging to Apuk, for which she has a whole
heartful of love, and the sight of which is better to
her than medicine.
During the month of July we eagerly watched
the incoming steamers, and welcomed all new comers
who landed in Chinik. Many were simply passing
through on their way up Fish River to the
mines, and praise of the land of the “Ophir” gold
was sung on all sides. A few remained for the
summer. Here men built boats, and rowed away
to Keechawik and Neukluk, carrying supplies for
hunting or prospecting.
The captain’s vegetable garden in the sand was
growing rapidly, and was watched with eager eyes
by everyone. We ate lettuce and radishes, picked
fresh from the garden beds where they had been
sown by the captain’s own hands, and we found
Ageetuk and Mollie to be quite famous cooks.
Nothing so delicious as their salads (for the French
cooks had long ago gone, the hotel management
being changed, and Mollie had a nice little kitchen
of her own), and with fresh salmon trout, wild fowl,
fresh meats and vegetables, we made up for many
months of winter dieting.
All this time I longed to get away. I was going
each day to the hill-top to watch for the steamers[Pg 377]
which would bring the letters for which I waited.
Affairs connected with my gold claims were, with
much anxiety and trouble, arranged as well as possible,
and when I boarded the steamer, I would
carry with me, at least, three deeds to as many
claims, with a fair prospect of others; but I could
not decide to remain another winter. I was determined
to go to St. Michael, up the Yukon to
Dawson, and “outside,” and laid my plans accordingly.
Letters from my father and brother in Dawson
had been received.
How my heart ached when I thought of leaving
the little sick girl and Charlie, the latter now grown
wilful, but still so bright and pretty. I wanted
to take both with me, but, no, I could not.
The little girl’s work was not ended. Hers is a
wonderful mission, and she is surely about to fulfill
it. Born as she was in a rough mining camp
at the foot of the barren hills, she was given the
Eskimo name of Yahkuk, meaning a little hill,
and she, like an oasis in a desert place, is left here
to cheer, love, and help others.
Many times I have seen evidence of the sweet
and gentle influences going out from the life of
little Yahkuk as she lies upon her cot of pain. A
tall, brown miner enters the living room, goes to
the little bed by the window, speaks softly, and,
bending over the tiny girl, kisses her. Then her
big, black eyes glance brightly into blue ones
looking down from above, full red lips part in a[Pg 378]
cordial smile, while the one solitary dimple in the
smooth, round cheek pricks its way still deeper,
and small arms go up around his neck. When the
man turns, his face wears a soft and tender expression
as though he were looking at some beautiful
sight far away, and, perhaps, he is. God
grant that the sweet memory of that little child’s
kiss may be so lasting that all their lives, he and
others, may be purer and better men.
When August came I sailed away. The “Dora”
had entered the bay in the morning and found my
trunk packed and waiting; it was then only the
work of a little time to make ready to leave. To
my good missionary friends I had already said
good-bye, and the captain and Mollie were kindly
regretful. With tears in my eyes, but with real
pain in my heart I bade Jennie good-bye, and
stepped into the little boat which was to carry me
to the “Dora.”
Farewell, then, to Chinik, the home of the north
wind and blizzard. Farewell to the ice fields of
Golovin, so tardy in leaving in summer, and to
Keechawik and Chinik, whose clear rushing waters
so cheered us in spring time. Farewell to the
moss-covered hills and paths thickly bordered with
blossoms. Farewell to my white-faced friends, and
to the dark-skinned ones, “Beoqua.”
CHAPTER XXVII.
GOING OUTSIDE.
Do I wonder and doubt?
Are things what they seem?
Or are visions about?”

was now actually on my way home.
It was not a dream, for here I was on
board the snug little ocean steamer
“Dora,” belonging to the Alaska
Commercial Company, and I was on
my way to St. Michael and Dawson.
For ocean travel our steamer was a
perfect one in all its appointments, being
staunch and reliable, with accommodating
officers. After taking a last
look at Chinik, I went to my stateroom. Only one
stop was made before we reached St. Michael, that
being at Port Denbeigh, a new mining camp where
for some hours freight was unloaded. In about
twenty-two hours from the time we left Chinik we
were in St. Michael harbor, climbing down upon
a covered barge which took us ashore.
It was nearly two years since I had first landed
at this dock,—then in a snow storm, now in the
rain,—then with my brother, now alone. Not at
all like Nome is this quiet little hamlet of St.[Pg 380]
Michael by the sea. Neither saloons nor disorderly
places are allowed upon the island. What was formerly
a canteen for soldiers was now a small but
tidy restaurant, where I ate a good dinner of beef-steak
with an appetite allowable in Alaska.
Upon the streets and about the barracks were
many boys in blue, while the hotel parlors swarmed
at dinner time with officers and their wives and
daughters, all richly and fashionably attired. At
the parlor piano two ladies performed a duet, while
the silken skirts of others rustled in an aristocratic
manner over the thick carpet, and gentlemen in
dress suits and gold-laced uniforms gracefully
posed and chatted.
For my own part, a little homesick feeling had
to be resolutely put down as I pulled on my old
rain coat, and with umbrella and handbag trudged
out in the darkness and rain to look for my baggage.
I had already secured my transportation at
the steamship office, where, at the hands of the
kindly manager of the Alaska Commercial Company’s
affairs in this country I had received the
most courteous treatment I could desire. With
little delay I found my trunk and went on board the
Yukon steamer T. C. Power.
Some months before a consolidation of the three
largest transportation companies in Alaska had
been effected, including the Alaska Commercial
Company, and I was now traveling with the latter
under the name of the Northern Commercial Company,[Pg 381]
but I felt a security like that of being in
charge of an old and trustworthy friend, and was
quite content.
I had a long journey before me. We should
reach Dawson in fourteen days unless we met with
delays, but a fast rising wind warned us that we
might encounter something of the sort where we
were, and we did. For two days and nights our
steamer lay under the lee of the island, not daring
to venture out in the teeth of the gale which buffeted
us. Straining, creaking, swaying, first one
way and then the other, we lay waiting for the
storm to abate. No river steamer with stern wheel
and of shallow draught, could safely weather the
rough sea for sixty miles to the Yukon’s mouth,
and we tried to be patient.
Early on the morning of the third day we started,
and for twelve hours we ploughed our way through
the waters with bow now deep in the trough of the
sea, now lifted high in mid-air, to be met the next
moment by an uprising roller, which, with a boom
and a jar, sent a quiver through the whole vessel.
When at last the Yukon was reached, another
obstacle appeared and we stuck fast on a sand bar.
Soon two other steamers lay alongside, waiting, as
did we, for a high tide to float us.
By night we lay in a dead calm. Indians in
canoes came with fish and curios to sell, and we
watched the lights of the other steamers.
When the high tide came, we floated off the bar,[Pg 382]
but the scene was one of dull monotony, and it was
not until the day following that we came into the
hill country, and I was permitted to again see the
dear trees I loved so well, not one of which I had
seen since leaving California.
At Anvik there came on board a little missionary
teacher bound for Philadelphia, who had spent
seven years with the natives in this Episcopal Mission
without a vacation, and her stories were interesting
in the extreme.
Our days were uneventful. A broken stern
wheel, enforced rests upon sand bars, frequent
stops at wood yards with a few moments run upon
shore in which to gather autumn leaves, and get a
sniff of the woods, this was our life upon the Yukon
steamer for many days. After a while the nights
grew too dark for safe progress, and the boat was
tied up until daylight.
Russian Mission, Tanana, Rampart, Fort Yukon
and the Flats were passed, and the days wore
tediously on. We were literally worming our way
up stream, with low water and dark nights to contend
with, but a second summer was upon us with
warm, bright sunshine, and the hills were brilliantly
colored.
One morning we approached the towering
Roquett Rock, so named by Lieutenant Frederick
Schwatka in his explorations down the Yukon
years before, and connected with which is an Indian
legend of some interest.[Pg 383]
This immense rock (so the story runs) once
formed a part of the western shore of the Yukon,
and was one of a pair of towering cliffs of about
the same size, and with similar characteristics. Here
the two huge cliffs lived for many geological periods
in wedded bliss as man and wife, until finally
family dissensions invaded the rocky household,
and ended by the stony-hearted husband kicking
his wrangling wife into the distant plain, and
changing the course of the great river so that it
flowed between them, to emphasize the perpetual
divorce. The cliff and the rock are still known as
“the old man” and “the old woman,” the latter
standing in isolation upon a low, flat island with the
muddy Yukon flowing on both sides.
At this time of the year the days in Alaska grow
perceptibly shorter, and we were not surprised to
find dusky twilight at five in the afternoon, and to
notice the eerie loneliness of the dark, sweet scented
woods a few hours later, when the steamer lay
tied to the river’s bank.
One night after dinner a number of passengers
sat idly about in the saloon of our steamer. Many
had grown tired of cards, or had lost their money,
and, finding themselves pitted against more lucky
players, had called a halt and looked for other occupation.
Miners lounged about, chatting of the
gold mines, their summer’s work and experiences.
Big Curly and his little black-eyed wife listened
attentively for a time.[Pg 384]
The old miner was a born story teller, and knew
a good yarn when he heard it. The boat was tied
up for the night, and all was quiet around us. It
was the time and place for a story.
At last Big Curly hitched his chair out farther
from the wall, and placed his feet comfortably upon
the rungs; then, shifting his tobacco from one
cheek to the other, he asked if any one present had
heard the story of Nelson and the ghost. No one
had heard it, and, after some coaxing, this is the
tale he told.
The Ghost of Forty Mile.
Alaska has long smiled over old Indian legends,
but Yukon men are still puzzling over the nocturnal
rambles of the ghost of a murdered man in
the Forty Mile District. Following the excitement
of the discovery of Bonanza Bar and the sensational
riches of Franklin Gulch came the murder of
an old Frenchman named La Salle. Tanana Indians
committed the crime in 1886. They crossed
the mountains to Forty Mile, and killed La Salle
in his cabin at the mouth of O’Brian Creek. With
axes and bludgeons the old Frenchman’s head
was crushed beyond recognition.
Three months later the snow lay thick upon the
ground. Upon the branches of trees it persistently
hung, each added layer clinging tenaciously because
there was no breath of wind to send it to the
ground. Occasionally a dead twig, weighted too[Pg 385]
heavily by the increasing fall of snow, broke suddenly
and dropped noiselessly into a bed of feathery
flakes, thus joining its sleeping companions, the
leaves.
It was in January that two men might have been
seen following their dog-teams down a frozen
stream emptying into Forty Mile River. They
wished to reach the mouth of the creek before they
halted for the night. They had heard of a cabin in
which they planned to spend the night, although it
was a deserted one, and they were almost at the
desired point.
The men were Swedes. They were strong and
hardy fellows, and although frost covered their
clothing and hung in icicles about their faces, they
ran contentedly behind the dog-teams in the semi-darkness,
as only the snow-light remained.
“Hello!” called out Swanson finally to his companion.
“Is that the place, do you think?” pointing
to the dim shape of a log cabin a little ahead.
“Guess it is, but we’ll find out. I’m nearly
starved, and must stop soon, any way,” said Nelson
decidedly. “It’s no use for us to travel further tonight.”
“So I think,” was the reply, as the dogs halted
before the door, and the men entered the cabin.
Here they found a good-sized room, containing
one window. There was evidently a room on the
other side, but with no connecting door, the two[Pg 386]
cabins having been built together to save laying
one wall.
“This is good enough for me, and much warmer
than a tent—we’ll stay here till morning, and take
the dogs inside,” said kind-hearted Nelson, already
unhitching the dogs from a sled.
Swanson did the same. The next moment their
small store was carried into the cabin, wood was
collected, and a cheery fire soon roared up the
chimney.
After the men had eaten their supper and the
dogs had been fed, pipes were brought out; and,
stretching themselves upon their fur sleeping bags
before the fire, the miners smoked and chatted
while resting their weary limbs.
Suddenly, in the midnight stillness they heard a
strange noise in the other part of the cabin. Some
one was moaning and crying for help. There was
no mistaking the sound, and both men were wide
awake and intently listening.
It was the cry of some one in distress. The
sounds grew more blood curdling. Nelson, unable
to restrain himself longer, ran outside to investigate.
Going to the window he looked inside. The
sight he beheld congealed his blood, and fastened
him to the spot as in a trance. This was the image
of a man surrounded by a cloud of white, mist-like
phosphorescent light, a deep scar standing out
like a bleeding gash down the side of the head.
Then the forgotten story of the murdered La Salle[Pg 387]
came to his mind, and for several minutes he was
chained to the spot by the terror of the spectacle.
The apparition was half lying upon the floor,
with arm uplifted, as if warding off a blow from
some deadly instrument. Finally, in the desperation
of his terror, Nelson called his partner to
come to his assistance. Upon the approach of his
companion he summoned enough courage to step
to the door at the other end of the cabin, and try
to open it. It was held fast by some superhuman
agency, which allowed the door to be only partly
opened.
Swanson, at sight of the ghostly visitor, was not
so badly overcome as his friend, and having an inquisitive
turn of mind, wished to find if the apparition
really existed. He called out, demanding to
be told who was there, but no answer came.
Still the mysterious, unearthly noises came
through the cabin door. No soughing of the wind
could make such sounds had a tempest been blowing,
but a deathly stillness prevailed, and no breath
of air stirred.
Then it was that Swanson gathered all that was
left of his fast disappearing courage, and said: “In
the name of the Father, Son and Holy Spirit, are
you demon, man or ghost?”
Suddenly the door opened and in the uncertain,
misty light the apparition raised its hands to the
stars as if in prayer, then it grew dark and the[Pg 388]
ghostly visitor vanished as if the earth had engulfed
it forever.
While turning this tale over in mind later, I came
to the conclusion, which seems a reasonable one,
that some fortunate miner had, in all probability,
hidden an amount of golden treasure in or about
the cabin on the creek, and wishing to keep others
away, had circulated the ghost story with good
effect.
When Eagle City was reached I telegraphed my
brother to meet me at the steamer’s dock in Dawson,
and my message was sent by one of Uncle
Sam’s boys in blue in charge of the office.
The town had grown considerably in the two
years since I visited it, and now boasted new government
buildings, officer’s quarters, and a Presbyterian
church, besides new stores and shops.
After Cudahy and Forty Mile, came Dawson, and
we steamed up to the city’s dock in the morning
fog, and were met by the usual multitude of people,
I having been seventeen days out from Golovin
Bay. There, among others, waited my brother
and his little son, and my joy at meeting them was
great. Landing, it was only a walk of a few minutes
to my kind old father, and my brother’s wife
was not far away.
I was now practically at home, for home is
where our dear ones are, and surroundings are
matters of small moment.
Three happy weeks followed, I went everywhere[Pg 389]
and noted well the improvements in the camp since
I last saw it. It was now a cleaner town every
way, with better order, good roads and bridges,
new government buildings, post-office and fine
large schoolhouse. New frame churches replaced
the old log ones in most cases. There was the governor’s
new palatial residence which would never
be graced by the presence of its mistress as she
and her babe had gone down to death a few weeks
before in the Islander disaster in Lynn Canal; and
there was the same steady stream of gold from the
wondrous Klondyke Creeks, which I was now determined
to visit.
One bright, warm day, taking the hand of the
small boy of the family, my sister and I started for
Bonanza Creek. We were bound for the house of
a friend who had invited us, and we would remain
over night, as the distance was five miles. My
kodak and three big red apples weighed little in
our hands, and we turned toward the Klondyke
River in high spirits.
For a mile the road was bordered with log
cabins on the hillside, with the famous little river
flowing on the other. We crossed the fine Ogilvie
Bridge, and soon found ourselves upon Bonanza
Creek, the stream which, with the Eldorado, had
given to the world perhaps the major part of
golden Klondyke treasure up to this date. Following
the trail by a short cut we crossed shaky foot
bridges, rested upon logs along the trail, and[Pg 390]
picked our way over boggy spots until our limbs
were weary.
Everywhere there were evidences of the industry
of the miners, but the claims and cabins looked deserted.
Only in a few instances were men at work
near the mouth of the creek. Many people were
going to and from Dawson, and bicycles and
wagons were numerous.
When we reached our destination we had walked
five miles in the hot sunshine, and were hungry
and warm, but a warm welcome from Mr. and Mrs.
M., as well as a good dinner, awaited us.
After resting a while we were shown around the
premises. Three log cabins were being built in a
row upon the hillside, the one finished being already
occupied by the M. family. Tunnels were
being made in the mountain by Mr. M., as well as
other claim owners near by, and across the gulch
mining operations were in full blast. On the M.
claim preparations were being made for winter
work, and it was expected that a valuable dump
would be taken out before spring. For three hundred
feet one tunnel entered the mountain back of
the cabins, and we were invited to go into it.
Putting on our warmest wraps, with candles in
hand, we followed our guide, the proprietor, for
some distance. It was like walking in a refrigerator,
for the walls and floor of the tunnel were
solidly frozen and sparkled with ice. Whether the
bright specks we saw were always frost, we did not[Pg 391]
enquire, etiquette forbidding too much curiosity,
but from the satisfied nods and smiles we understood
that it was a good claim, though only recently
purchased by Mr. M., a handful of pudgy
gold nuggets being shown us which fairly made
our eyes water (because they did not belong to us).
Here we lodged all night, enjoying a graphophone
entertainment in the evening. The next
morning my kodak was brought out, and before
leaving for home I had several views to carry with
me.
Our walk back to Dawson was much easier than
the one out to the claim.
From this on, we made ready to leave Dawson
for Seattle, and were soon upon our way. Again
I was forced to say good-bye to my father and
brother, though they would follow us a month
later, and together, my sister and I, stood with the
little boy on the deck of the steamer, waving our
good-byes.
We now traveled in luxury. We occupied a large
and elegant stateroom, ate first-class meals, and
had nothing to do but enjoy ourselves. To change
from steamer to steam cars at White Horse,
which was now a good mining town, was the work
of an hour’s time, while a day’s ride to Bennett and
over the White Pass to Skagway was a real
pleasure.
We found the quiet little port of Skagway
swarming with people rushing for the steamers,[Pg 392]
and as if to give us variety we had considerable
difficulty in finding our trunks in the custom’s
house, and in getting upon the steamer in the darkness
of the late evening; but at last it was all successfully
accomplished, and we took our last look
at Skagway.
Eleven days after leaving Dawson we reached
our journey’s end, and landed in Seattle, our home
coming being a source of delight to our dear waiting
ones, as well as to ourselves; our safe arrival
being another positive proof of the mercy and
goodness of God.
